fide Se be 8 TaN Gan pnd fol Bee Seat ngaliet hot s or Radi Hi ghah tp Forae = . mH re) SA < iV in EE SS, e. te Me > 7 ¢ evr 2) S Ss fod ‘ es Sey Qa & eis ey SON ane? “le eS cINcaRS Gaia E fees ae Ine) EDITS a cy COS —s annie Cochrane i Kc: 4 | t aN Hs Bron ee mints il 7 SS SNet: 4 Ul ‘i : i) ah ih igs ui Division of Mollusks Sectional Library HF i Hn 2 eae eS il Hin 3g Oo, i | Vas il 5 ; an i oe 2 ‘on lal rg ii z ot fen Wrrviipes ot Ara Rey | i te yee Pee ike. | a | 1 mcs, ; Sab Pt 7 ee ib a‘ i 4 fe) red Kx cS ; ? z NOK EN eX OFF, \ ial eee Bats seb y AIDS OY sa Sis Divigion of Mollusg is Seetiona! Library 3 Walle Be ELIGER A Quarterly published by NORTHERN CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL CLUB Berkeley, California Volume 5 July 1, 1962 to April 1, 1963 Volume 5 THE VELIGER Page III TABLE OF CONTENTS Cowrie holotype located. A checklist of mollusks for Puertecitos, Baja Crawford N. Cate .. GB dg, Mouphe) California, Mexico. Cowrie populations from Kenya (Neililuisca Gas- Fetenm Du Shane ea si eo ih. hs lei e waves ue SO tropoda). A correction. Franz A. Schilder & Maria Schilder. . 149 PNM oyna Gye Saati thie eisai meister ley yellin men unt Cypraea chinensis Gmelin, 1791 (Gastropoda) in Anew cowrie (Mollusca : Gastropoda) from Hawaii. west-central Philippines. Crawford N. Cate eters Moi ais. ar” veh cane Wee OC: Crawford N. Cate... ay . . 140 Destroyed type material. A new land snail from the Ieee Ricontains. Cave Gr site Vive! s Yo d 6 olen aoe oi California (Mollusca : Pulmonata : Polygyrid- Disposition of type specimens. ae). IRovolli SiWiMleiP 4-5 6 5 6 0 6 9 Oo 6 SB) Robert Ra lalimadpes = = 4 - 28 Further remarks on two rare cowrie species A new marine research station at Gunpinas: (Gastropoda). ’ Mexico. Franz Alfred Schilder . . . Boome ce ALS) Bruce Campbell .... ah haha raisins 177) Historical zoogeographic study of the Clavagel- A new species, genus and eavaetllky of marine lacea. flatworms (Turbellaria : Tricladida : Mari- Lee Anderson Smith. .. . SMO M apa 81S) cola) commensal with mollusks. 5 Hybrids between Cypraea tigris ieee 1758 John T. Holleman & Cadet Hand ... .20 and Cypraea pantherina Solander, 1786, A new species of Armina (Gastropoda: Nudi- Mollusca : Gastropoda). branchia) from the Gulf of California. Franz Alfred Schilder .. . eile A, ues James R. Lance. . . ei NS | Insular Haliotids in the western Pacific (Mollus - Anew species of Mitta GActecpods) from : Gastropoda). Hawaii. Hobos R.. Talmadge < . . Soho sale9 Jean M. Cate. .. . 80 Marine Pelecypoda from the no Pen Alaskan Anew Stiliger and anew Tore te (Molluacs: Coast. Opisthobranchia) from the northeastern Pa- Kunigunde Hilsemann . . . . 67 cific. James R. Lance. . . 5 StL Bie ae sec An unusual occurrence of Tees as nuttalli (Con- rad, 1837) (Mollusca: Pelecypoda). Warren O. Addicott... . . 143 A poison-secreting Wditeancn(iMollueea: Opis - thobranchia). IN Je WOllenaSs 5 a yay oo. 0 eo a JOA A range extension for two species of Hawaiian Terebridae (Gastropoda). Ro ID, JtEN 6 67 66 pr. AC Oase)e) A revised list of chitons fron Gusdelupe Island, Mexico (Mollusca: Polyplacophora) LMMsvin (Gig Sreowlder 5 6 4 |g ; Belicia cane yl We a Aspects of ctenidial feeding in gmamnature bi- valves. Charles R. Stasek ... . .78 Comments on a paper by R. TeEkos Abbott eeNU yan auICGeNy Wiens aslo og ah aes 5 SS) Comparisonof two rare cowrie species WiGwsr5- poda). CGrawfordyN.«Gater ) - 4. Sea came bre anno) Comparison of two similar species of Conus (Gastropoda) from the Gulf of California. Part I: A statistical analysis of some shell characters. way Isley WEIMGCH “nl 5 5 6 6 6 6 @ « oGS Notes ona Mitrella (Mollusca: Gist anees) from the Gulf of California. IDEN Ibo IslonveneCl 4 6 oo Bas we IGS) Notes on some tropical west Keir mollusks. Eugene Coan... : Sarena eye Notes on the California species oe Aplysia (Gas - tropoda : So eae Robert D. Beeman . . BH Rae ee amon be 8S) Notes on the nomenclature oi certain mitrid species. JieansMn «Gate 7) 27. oD Notes on the Ocisthobranchs ot ae west coast of North America. - IJ. The order Cephal- aspidea from San Diego to Vancouver Island. Joan E. Steinberg. . . Sierra Ud Observations on the Saattonod Terebellum tere- bellum (Linnaeus), with particular reference to the behavior of the eyes during burrowing. Donailidehs Abbott] 5). 2). Bi altace ese Preliminary report on time Siemens involved in hydrotropism in Helix aspersa (Gastro- poda : Pulmonata) following dehydration. Fred Herzberg & Anne Herzberg ... .87 Range extensions for Terebra robusta Hinds, 1844, and for Terebra formosa Deshayes, 1857. Oem IDMEMANS 5 S96 o¢ b 686 o no 0, BY Page IV THE VELIGER Volume 5 ee ee a Rediscovery of Terebra formosa Deshayes, 1857 Bruce Campbell. ents 101 Statistical studies on cowrie radulae. Franz A. Schilder & Maria Schilder. 106 Studies on Erosaria lamarckii Gray (Gastro- poda). Franz Alfred Schilder, Maria Schilder & Ronald Stewart Benton .. Ste iO Studies on mollusk Ro pularnome V. — Tegula rugosa (A. Adams, 1853). ; Rudolf Stohler 7, The California land snails jeieibererauinelingas ees reed- iana Willet and Helminthoglypta similans Hanna & Smith with comments on their rela- tionships (Gastropoda : Pulmonata). Allyn G. Smith 112 The drilling habit of Capulus danieli (Crosse) (Mollusca : Gastropoda). Wiieeuboiiey Oe 6 oc Sars eae OS The search for Tuerieelia neces Carpenter (Gastropoda). James W. Valentine. . . Ene The Terebridae (Mollusca: Gaatwonedal of Bi- leau Island, Madang Harbour, New Guinea. R. D. Burch 9/0 157 The types of Lamellaria shavenee Willett, 1939 (Gastropoda). Jean M. Cate & Crawford N. Cate .. .91 Two range extensions. Allyn G. Smith oc Use of the term 'Hypotype". R. Tucker Abbott... Pou ace cress: What's the difference? Tonoteee homeotype - plastotype - lectotype - neotype. 160 Rudolf Stohler .. SAL Fea TS ea AES Books, periodicals & re ates caer nae, wiser BO Cis es, Ua Information desk 0 = 58; 93 Notes & news . 55a 225 Lo AUTHOR INDEX Abbott; Donald Pi, i258 Me ch eel ae cine ake ol Abbott, R. Tucker sideline i ann Toren IANS oR Me pCO Addicott, Warren O. 143 Beeman, Robert D. 145 Benton, Ronald Stewart cf. Schilder, F. A., M. Schilder, & — Burch, John Q. . (60), (61), (62), (97), (99) Bunche Reo Diy. cis aes eek Sy cee OO waL Sye Campbell, G. Bruce . - LOD, tez Cate, Crawford N. . 6, 74, 93, 140 cf. also: Cate, Jean M., & — Cate, Jean M. : : 95, 80 Cate, Jean M., & Ciawiord Gate ee Goan, Eugene 2°" 2 os 92) cae) oe: es er DuShane, Helen. . :-. . ... <7.) eee Hand, Cadet cf. Holleman, John T., & — Hertlein, LeoG.. (60), (99) Herzberg, Anne cf. Herzberg, Fred, & — Herzberg, Fred, & Anne Herzberg... eon Holleman, John T., & Cadet Hand... . .20 Howard, Faye B. : 159 Hilsemann, Kunipunde =< 2). =) = eee Johannes, R. E... : 104 Keen, A. Myra (59), (61), 95, (100) Lance, James R. w Sone > Soon MeGowan, vohnwAs a inane (163) Orr,. Virginia, 0 2°. 2s = 2) 2s) es Ryan, Mary Jo : kth iit es . (60) Schilder, Franz Ata Were s., LAS Schilder, F. A., & Maria Schilder. . 106, 149 Schilder, F. A., M. Schilder, & R. 5S. Benton qnnee, eto . 30 Schilder; Maria cf, the two preceding entries Smith, Allyn G. 57, (61), (62), (97), (98), (100) 12) (23), 1405, 260) eae (162), (163). Smith, Lee Anderson. . . Meer es oo LE Sphon, (Gale Gy Sicsge oe a) cl ole Stasek, Charles R. bo et JO aie. 0 pgel ete Steinberg, Joan E. SU sas 1 oes COME 114 Stohler, Rudolf 58, 95, (99), 117, (123), (124) Pe eS APs Ei VS Gaia Ge a (162), (163) Talmadge, Robertokae). 2) commie Valentine, James W.. 4.0. 2° 2 1 See Wolfson, ‘Hay Heninyi 02) cute ere ERRATA page 13, column 1, line 4 from bottom: for 'the left margin' read:'the right margin' cover for No. 3: for 'Opisthobranhia' read: 'Opisthobranchia' page 111, column 1, line 3 from bottom: for 'pp. 4-6' read: 'part 4-6" Gae 594,65 ins VfB ; fell: A Quarterly published by NORTHERN CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL CLUB Berkeley, California VOLUME 5 July 1, 1962 NUMBER 1 CONTENTS Observations on the Gastropod Terebellum terebellum (LINNAEUS), with Particular Reference to the Behavior of the Eyes during Burrowing Dona.p P. ABBoTT —_ The Search for Turritella jewettii CARPENTER (Gastropoda) SI ASIESEV\ \ATPNIDINE Seema el ahulnn chemo Ui ti eD Sacre oe wig la ee Comparison of Two Rare Cowrie Species (Gastropoda ) (Plates 1 to 4; 2 Textfigures) CRAWEORDEN ACADEME emt mre ME Sure oa oe lta es ein a ey, Soe were” Ve LO Historical Zoogeographic Study of the Clavagellacea (2 Textfigures) rey ANDERSONGOMIUEM ime nne mM Man i a a cA GcRlia i) Voyeie a ue tuyues a, ver. ry Seon ery A New Species, Genus and Family of Marine Flatworms (Turbellaria: Tricladida, Maricola) Commensal with Mollusks (3 Textfigures) (OuNMEDHOLLEMAN Ga CADETSEIANDD 2), Geared ss et ee we ws 20 Comparison of Two Similar Species of Conus (Gastropoda) from the Gulf of California Part I: A Statistical Analysis of Some Shell Characters AE EIN RIV OLES ONGMmen Maan (ek tian TEM al Ne ye as ee ew OB A New Land Snail from the Klamath Mountains, California (Mollusca : Pulmonata : Polygyridae) (Plate 5) INOBE Rau Rem VAT MIAD GE mee sir arm te ep urine wae Sy 8 a a agen, ame 2O Studies on Evosaria lamarckii Gray (Gastropoda) F. A. ScuitpEr, M. ScHitpER & RONALD STEWART BENTON gat eerste ee 3 O [Continued on Inside Front Cover ] Subscriptions payable in advance to N. C. M. C. $ & 50 per volume Domestic; $ 4.80 in the Americas; $ 5.00 all other Foreign Countries. $ 1.80 for single copies of current volume only. Send subscriptions to: Mrs. PHoEBE BALcH, Treasurer, 1150 Brown Avenue, Lafayette, California. Address all other correspondence to: Dr. R. STOHLER, Editor, Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley 4, California. Second-Class Postage paid at Berkeley, California CONTENTS [CONTINUED |] A New Stiliger and a New Corambella (Mollusca : Opisthobranchia) from the Northwestern Pacific (Plate 6; 10 Textfigures ) JamMes R. LANCE .. . See ee ci keane 33 A Checklist of Mollusks for Puertecitos, Baja California, Mexico (1 Textfigure) HELEN DUSHANE: «2.6 UR foe ee ee A New Species of Armina (Gastropoda : Nudibranchia) from the Gulf of California (6 Textfigures) James R. LANGE 00 Sea a Ts ea 51 NOTES & NEWS 0 6 oe a ee ee Notes on the Nomenclature of Certain Mitrid Species JzEan M. Cate A Range Extension for Two Species of Hawaiian Terebridae (Gastropoda) R. D. Burcu Destroyed Type Material Gate G. SpHon, Jr. A Correction Attiyn G. SvatH INFORMATION DESK dase Sa. ae) Cesta. ar rs aa Saas ye 56 What’s the Difference? Topotype - Homeotype - Plastotype - Lectotype - Neoty pe. R. STOHLER BOOKS, PERIODICALS/& PAMPHILEIS |. 2) a). 9). san treed Note: The various taxa above species are indicated by the use of different type styles as ‘shown by the following examples: ORDER, Suborder, DIVISION, Subdivision, SECTION, SUPERFAMILY, FAmILy, Subfamily, Genus, (Subgenus). Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 1 Observations on the Gastropod Terebellum terebellum (Linnatus), with Particular Reference to the Behavior of the Eyes during Burrowing BY DONALD P. ABBOTT Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University, Pacific Grove, California Members of the prosobranch family Strom- bidae, particularly the species of Strombus, have long been known for their agility, their cu- rious methods of locomotion, and their well- developed and often beautifully colored eyes. Traditionally these features have been regarded as possessions related to a predatory existence. However, the studies of Yonge (1932) and Ro- bertson (1961) indicate that Lambis and Strombus are in reality specialized herbivores, feeding on small algae, algal detritus, and plant-like microorganisms, and that the same is very likely the case with the remaining genera of the family: Tibia, Dientomochilus, and Terebellum. Terebellum terebellum (Linnaeus) is widely distributed in the Indo-Pacific region. The gross anatomy has been described by Bergh (1895), and some additions made by Robertson (1961). Further, it has been noted that the smooth, streamlined, and fusiform shell is clearly adapted to a burrowing life (Morton, 1958, p. 45). Nevertheless, little is known of the biology of the species. The only published observations I have found on the behavior of the living animal are those of Arthur Adams in his Narrative of the Voyage of the SAMARANG, quoted in Tryon (1885, vol. 7, p. 130): "In its habits the animal of the Terebellum is exceedingly shy and timid, retracting its body into the shell on the slight- est alarm, It will remain stationary fora long time, moving its tentacles about cautiously in every direction, when, suddenly, it will roll over with its shell, and continue again perfectly quiet. They appear to have all the muscular ener- gy, vivacity, and doubtless, predatory boldness possessed by the Strombi, which they also resemble in their perfectly Organized eyes, and quickness of vision. Mr. Cuming in- forms me that he has seen them leap several inches from the ground, exactly as I have seen the animal of Strombus gibberulus, On one occasion, a beautiful specimen was lost to the above-mentioned enthusiastic collector, by the animal suddenly leaping into the water, as he was holding and ad- miring it in the palm of his hand, Those I kept in confine- ment died ina few days, and appear to beof amore delicate constitution than the hardy Strombus, " During the Hawaii- Philippines-Sulu Sea Ex- pedition, conducted in 1957 by the Bernice P. Bishop Museum (Honolulu) and the Philippines National Museum (Manila) with the generous support of Mrs. Mary Eleanor King of Honolulu, a brief opportunity arose to make some obser- vations on living individuals of Terebellum te- rebellum. Several specimens were obtained at night near South Lagoon on Tumindao Reef south of the Sibutu Islands, at about latitude 4° 33' 30"! N., longitude 119° 21'30"'E. The particular hab- itat was a great sandy flat, its surface nearly exposed at low tide and relatively barren except for isolated patches of turtle grass (Thalassia) and occasional deeper pools containing blocks of dead coral overgrown with algae. Some indi- viduals of Terebellum were found partly ex- posed on the bottom; others were buried just below the surface, their positions indicated by shallow mounds. Identification of the specimens was made by Mr. Fernando Dayrit, conchologist from the Philippines National Museum, who ac- companied the expedition. The following obser- vations are casual rather than systematic and are presented in the hope that they will stimu- late more complete observations by others. The morning after collection the specimens were placed in a large bowl of seawater pro- vided with an inch-deep layer of sand. Upon extending the foot from the shell, the animals flipped themselves over with such rapidity (tak- ing less than a second) that the movement was difficult to follow. The long eyestalks, lacking tentacles and bearing globular, turquoise-blue eyes at the tips, were then extended anteriorly, and the animals commenced to burrow. As each animal ploughed down into the sand, one of its eyestalks was extended upward and back over the shell. As this raised eyestalk was contacted by the sand which came to cover the anterior dorsal region of the shell, the or- Page 2 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 gan was moved in such a way that the terminal blue eyeball was placed just above the sand surface. The animals continued to move for- ward and down, burying themselves, but each one "'left behind itself'' one eye protruding above the surface. Since the exposed eye remained stationary relative to the sand around it, the eyestalk hidden below the sand was clearly elongating at a rate which matched the forward movement of the animal. When the shell was largely buried and its anterior end was judged to be approximately one inch ahead of the ex- posed eye, the siphon was extended upward through the sand at this point, the siphonal folds closely appressed to form a closed cone. ‘Once at the surface, the siphonal folds flared open terminally, and a swift current of water was drawn down into the mantle cavity. Following this inhalation, the second eye, thus far con- cealed below the surface of the sand with the rest of the animal, passed upward through the lumen of the siphon. With the second eye now exposed, the siphon folds unrolled and the si- phon was pulled down out of sight, leaving the blue eyeball just at the surface of the sand. Si- multaneously, the first eye, an inch to the rear, was withdrawn below the surface and disap- peared. These actions were observed to be re- peated with only minor variations as the animals burrowed along, their shells covered by a layer of sand perhaps a centimeter in depth. For- ward progression below the sand was nearly continuous, but the eyes were '"'walked’' forward, with one of them always stationary and exposed at the surface like a periscope during the bur- rowing. This remarkable behavior of the eyes, re- quiring highly extensile eyestalks and good co- ordination, deserves further study. However, it is not an entirely surprising development in Terebellum. It seems probable that the Strom- bidae are derived from a stock with the eyes arranged more or less as in Aporrhais (Yonge, 1937) and many other prosobranchs, where they bulge laterally from the bases of the tentacles, In species of Strombus the eyes are borne on greatly elongated eyestalks. The tentacles here arise from the eyestalks about half to three- quarters of the distance out from the bases to- ward the terminal eyes; they are comparatively small, and their tips scarcely reach beyond the distal ends of the eyes in preserved specimens | _portantly in escape responses evoked by the | presence of predators. (Bergh, 1895). In living Strombus the eyestalks extend forward and dorsally, and the eyes are held upward when the animal is active (Colton, 1905; Robertson, 1961), The right eyestalk curves upward through a special groove in the margin of the aperture, while the left curves upward in the groove of the very short siphon (Colton, 1905). This is of particular interest in view of the habit in Terebellum of passing the eye upward through the siphon during burrow- ing. In the latter form the siphon, while de- scribed by Bergh (1895) and others as short, is larger than in Strombus, a development proba- bly related to the burrowing mode of life. The tentacles, in some Strombus species at least, are extended forward and downward in life, their tips just above the substrate or contacting it (Colton, 1905, pl. 3, figs. 11-13; Robertson, 1961). In Tibia the eyestalks and tentacles ap- pear to be rather similar to those of Strombus (Pelseneer, 1906, fig. 46, after Adams), In Dientomochilus the tentacles are slightly longer than the eyestalks (Thiele, 1931). In Lambis the tentacles are very small and short in relation to the eyestalks, and arise near the tips of the latter (Pelseneer, 1906, fig. 75, after Wood- ward). The tendency in the Strombidae toward elongation of the eyestalks and reduction of the tentacles appears to reach its climax in the burrowing Terebellum, where the tentacles are entirely absent. Adams & Adams (1858, as cited in Bergh, 1895, p. 370) and Bergh (1895) have noted spe- cimens of Terebellum with asymmetrically de- veloped eyes and ‘eyestalks, and the figure in Tryon (1885, vol.7, Strombidae, pl. 11, fig. 27, after Adams) suggests a slight asymmetry in eyestalk size. No such asymmetry was noted in expanded living individuals before burrowing commenced, though the eyestalks are certainly capable of elaborate independent and asymmet- ric activity. The eyes themselves are exceptionally well-developed in members of the Strombidae. Their structure was studied a century ago in Strombus by Fischer, and numerous investigat- ors and casual observers over the years have commented on the marked responses of strom- bids to visual stimuli (e. g., Tryon, 1880, p. 36; 1885, p. 106; Robertson, 1961). It seems not un- likely that this marked development of the eyes, the manner in which they are held, and their apparent sensitivity and acuity, are, like the ability of some strombids to jump and tumble rapidly, related primarily to protection and es- cape. The observations of Robertson (1961) show that the agility of Strombus functions im- In this connection the slightly flattened shell and expanded outer lip of the aperture in numerous strombids may give the jumper a 50:50 chance of landing right side up, as well as lending stability in orientation Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 3 a while lying on or moving across the bottom. In Lambis the specialized foot and operculum per- mit locomotion and righting on sand, while the heavy shell, broad outer lip, and marginal spines help prevent overturning of the unat- tached animal in turbulent water and sinking in while moving across soft sand(see Yonge, 1932). In Terebellum no such stability in orienta- tion is provided by the narrow, fusiform shell, and the very rapid and effective righting re- sponse seems related to the hazard of being frequently overturned. Leaping in Terebellum, as described in the quotation from Adams, was not noted in the present observations, though the animals taken wriggled the foot rapidly and to such effect that the first specimen taken in hand was immediately dropped. This ability, plus the periscopic ''watchfulness'' of the eyes during burrowing, suggest adaptations of value in protection and escape. Literature Cited Bergh, Ludwig S. Rudolph 1895. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Strombiden, beson- ders der Gattung Terebellum Klein. Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Anat. Syst. 8: 342-378; pls. 22-23. Colton, H. S. 1905. Some notes on living Strombus pugilis, lus 19 (8): 85-88; pl. 3, figs. 11-13. Morton, John E. Nauti- 1958. Molluscs. Hutchinson, London. pp. 1-232; figs. 1-23, Pelseneer, P. 1906. Part 5. Mollusca, in: Lankester, E. R., ed., A treatise on zoology. Black, London. . 5: 1-355; figs. 1-301. Robertson, R. 1961. The feeding of Strombus and related herbivor- ous marine gastropods; with a review and field ob- servations. Notulae Natur. Acad, Nat. Sci, Phila., No. 343: 1-9; fig. 1, Thiele, Johannes 1931. Handbuch der systematischen Weichtierkunde. Fischer, Jena. 1: 1-778; figs. 1-783. Tryon, George W., Jr. 1880. Manual of conchology, 2: 1-289; pls. 1-70. 1885 Manual of conchology, 7: 1-309; pls. 1-58. Yonge, C. M. 1932. Notes on feeding and digestion in Pterocera and Vermetus, with a discussion on the occurrence of the crystalline style in the Gastropoda. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.) Great Barrier Reef Exped. Sci. Repts. 1 (10): 259-281; figs. 1-6; tables 1-3. 1937. The biology of Aporrhais pes-pelecani (L.) and A. serresiana (Mich.). J. Mar. Biol, Assn, U. K. 21: 687-703; figs. 1-6. The Search for Turritella jewettit CARPENTER BY JAMES W. VALENTINE Department of Geology, University of Missouri, Columbia During the years 1864 to 1866, Philip P. Carpenter described two species of Turritella from southern California, T. cooperi and T. jewettii. So far as is known, neither species is represented by a designated type specimen, al- though material on which Carpenter may have based T. cooperi is in the collections of the Mu- seum of Paleontology, University of California (Durham in Palmer, 1958, p. 168). There is little doubt but that the slim turritellid especi- ally common in Plio-Pleistocene, Pleistocene, and Recent faunas of southern California is in- deed T. cooperi, and this point is accepted with- out further question here. During the preparation of her invaluable memoir on the types of Carpenter's west coast marine shells, Palmer (1958, pp. 169-170) made an extensive search for type material of Turri- tella jewettii, No specimens certainly identified by Carpenter as T. jewettii are known. All spe- cimens that she found identified as T. jewettii and dating from Carpenter's time have proven to be T. cooperi, commonly young individuals. Cooper was evidently responsible for many of these sets. Merriam [1941, pp. 119 (footnote), 123] suggested that T. jewettii might have been based upon a fairly smooth variant of T. coop- eri, Page 4 Turritella jewettii was based upon material included in '. . .a very interesting series of Pliocene fossils from the neighborhood of Santa Barbara" (Carpenter, 1864, p. 539). The locality is further described as being ''. . .two miles from the coast, and 150 feet high’’ (Carpenter, loc, cit.). Carpenter's list of 45 forms in Jewett's collection leaves. no doubt but that the fossils are from the Santa Barbara formation. Turritella jewettii was not well described until later (Carpenter, 1866b, p.276). By that time Carpenter had specimens from San Diego that he identified as T. jewettii also. His remarks are "San Diego, on beach (Cassidy)"', and''Mr. Cassidy's specimens may be washed fossils, or very poor recent shells"! (Carpenter, loc. cit.). Arnold (1903) identified as Turritella jew- ettii a species that is found in the Pleistocene at San Pedro but which is not certainly known to occur either in the Santa Barbara or San Diego regions. Arnold's T. jewettii did not agree very closely with Carpenter's description and so was redescribed as T. pedroensis by Applin (MS.; Merriam, 1941, pp. 121-123, pl. 35, figs. 1- 9). Until recently the only species of Turritella known to occur in the Santa Barbara formation aside from Carpenter's record of T. jewettii was T. cooperi, lending support to the hypothe- sis that T. jewettii was based on variants of T. cooperi. Turritella cooperi living and fossil occurs also at San Diego. However, recent col- lecting has resulted in the discovery of a second species of Turritella in the Santa Barbara for- mation (Valentine, 1962). This species is iden- tified as T. hemphilli Merriam (Merriam, 1941, pp. 126-127, 'Turritella vanvlecki subsp. hemp- hilli Applin MS"). The type of T. hemphilli is from the San Diego formation at Pacific Beach. Might the species called T. hemphilli be the lost T. jewettii of Carpenter? In the Santa Barbara formation, Turritella hemphilli has been found at two localities in the Rincon Creek area (only half a mile from the ocean) and in an outcrop on Fairview Avenue (1.1 miles north of Goleta and 2.65 miles north of the ocean), All these localities are near 150 feet in elevation. Turritella hemphilli is asso- ciated with diverse molluscan assemblages that resemble the collection of Jewett as recorded by Carpenter. No specimens of T. hemphilli were found in the Packard's Hill ; region, al- though some localities there have yielded asso- ciations similar to Jewett's collection also. Carpenter's original description of Turri- tella jewettii in Latin is readily available THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 (1866b; reprinted, 1872; Oldroyd, 1927, p. 54— note that the word ''distantibus" in Carpenter's description is incorrectly given as ''distincti- bus'' in Oldroyd). A translation has kindly been rendered by Professor Anna S, Benjamin, De- partment of Classical Languages, University of Missouri. Shell turreted, quite terete and not at all thin; ashy yellow-red in color; whorls nearly flat, sutures distinct; surrounded by separate small ridges (of which two are ra- ther prominent on the younger shell) and by subobsolete spiral furrows; base not very angulate; aperture subquad- rate; lip thin, moderately sinuous [translation of Carpen - ter, 1866b, p. 276, lines 6-10]. This description closely fits Turritella hemphilli which has fine spirals with commonly two heavier spiral bands on early whorls which are themselves sculptured by fine spirals. On later whorls the heavy spirals decrease in strength and become obsolete while their fine spirals merge with those on the rest of the shell (well shown in Merriam, 1941, pl. 37, fig. 13; see also forms figured as T. vanvlecki teg- landae, same plate). It is interesting to contrast this description with that.of Turritella cooperi (Carpenter, 1866a, also translated by Professor Benjamin). Turritella cooperi is described as rather thin, and T. jewettii as not at all thin; T. cooperi has two ridges, and T. jewettii has small ridges, two of which are especially pronounced on ju- venile whorls; the base of T. cooperi is angu- late, but of T. jewettii not very angulate; and T. cooperi has an exceedingly sinuous lip, while Fr. jewettii has only a moderately sinuous lip. It certainly appears that Carpenter had two fairly distinct forms at hand, and though it is con- ceivable that these differences could be between two variants of T. cooperi, they are also strik- ingly like the differences between T. cooperi and T. hemphilli. Carpenter volunteered an additional bit of information about Turritella jewettii: it is ', , .nearest to T. sanguinea, Rve., from the Gulf,. but differs in the faintness of the sculp- ture'’ (Carpenter, 1866b, p.276). Turritella sanguinea is evidently a South African species incorrectly assigned to ''California’ by Reeve (1849, species 27, pl. 6, fig. 27). Carpenter's early references to it are based on Reéve's record(Carpenter, 1857). Later Carpenter lists it from La Paz (1864, p. 622), though it is not certain whether or not the identification was his If it was, he must have had some Gulf of California species in mind, own. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 5 Four species are known to include La Paz in their present ranges: Turritella gonostoma, T. leucostoma, T. mariana, and T. nodulosa. Of these, T. mariana and T. nodulosa look so little like Carpenter's description of T. jewettii, which 'T. sanguinea" is said to resemble, as to be immediately eliminated as candidates for a form that Carpenter identified as T. san- guinea. Both of the other species were known to Carpenter who lists them in early reports. The whorls of T, leucostoma are contracted an- teriorly, and sculptural details do not agree well with Carpenter's description of T. jewettii. Turritella gonostoma is closely allied to T. hemphilli and may be conspecific with it. A shell from South Africa identified as Turritella sanguinea and closely resembling Reeve's figure is at hand; it has rather fine spirals as Reeve's figure suggests, but stronger than those on adult T. hemphilli. It is dissimi- lar to both T. hemphilli and T. cooperi and re- sembles T. gonostoma only vaguely in color pattern. It does not seem that Carpenter's re- ference to T. sanguinea can be used at present as strong evidence in establishing the identity of T. jewettii, though it serves to emphasize that the sculpture of T. jewettii is weak. In summary, the distribution of Turritella hemphilli and its close agreement with Car- penter's description of T. jewettii suggests that these two forms may be identical. If this sug- gestion is accepted, T. jewettii has priority and must replace T. hemphilli. A neotype in better condition than the specimens at hand would be desirable. Acknowledgment I am most grateful to Mrs. Lou Ella Saul, Department of Geology, University of Califor- nia, Los Angeles, for the loan of the specimen of Turritella sanguinea, for copies of Reeve's description and illustration, and for other aid. Special thanks are due Professor Anna S. Ben- jamin, University of Missouri, for translating Carpenter's descriptions. Literature Cited Arnold, Ralph 1903. The paleontology and stratigraphy of the marine Pliocene and Pleistocene of San Pedro, California. Mem. Calif. Acad. Sci. 3: 1-149; pls. 1-37, Carpenter, Philip Pearsall 1857. Report on the present state of our knowledge with regard to the mollusca of the west coast of North America. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Rept. 26th Meeting: 159-368; pls. 6-9. — 1864, Supplementary report on the present state of our knowledge with regard to the mollusca of the west coast of North America. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Rept. (1863): 517-686. 1866a. Descriptions of new marine shells from the coast of California. Pt. III. Calif. Acad. Sci. Proc. 3: 207-224. 1866b. On the Pleistocene fossils collected by Col. E. Jewett, at Santa Barbara, California; with descrip- tions of new species. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, 17: 274-278, Sy eee 1872. The mollusks of western North America. Em- bracing the second report made to the British As- sociation on this subject, with other papers; reprirt- ed by permission, with a general index. Smiths. Misc. Coll. 252: 1-325; index. Merriam, Charles W. 1941. Fossil turritellas from the Pacific Coast region of North America. Univ. Calif. Pubs., Bull, Dept. Geol. Sci. 26 (1); 1-214; pls. 1-41. Oldroyd, Ida Shepard 1927. The marine shells of the west coast of North America. Stanford Univ. Pubs., Geol. Sci. 2 (3): 1-339; pls. 73-108. Palmer, Katherine Van Winkle 1958. Type specimens of marine mollusca described by P. P. Carpenter from the west coast (San Diego to British Columbia). Geol. Soc. Amer. Mem. 76: 1-376; ple. 1-35. Reeve, Lovell Augustus 1849. Conchologica Iconica, don, L, Reeves & Co, Valentine, James W. 1962. Molluscan biofacies of the Santa Barbara forma- tion, California (Abstract), Geol. Soc. Amer., Spec. Papers 62: 289, Vol. 5, Turritella. Lon- Page 6 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 Comparison of Two Rare Cowrie Species (Gastropoda) BY CRAWFORD N. CATE Conchological Club of Southern California, Los Angeles 7, California (Plates 1, 2, 3, 4; 2 Textfigures) The need for modern illustrations to re- solve the confusion between Cypraea (Zoila) venusta Sowerby, 1846, and C. (Z.) episema Ire- dale, 1939, became apparent to me recently af- ter studying several specimens that seemed identical,though according to their labels, rep- resenting both species. Upon comparing these specimens very closely with one in my collec- tion labelled C, venusta (see Plates 1 and 2, Figs. la, lb), and verifying the identities of both species through pertinent literature, I realized that no really adequate modern figure of either had been published. Iredale (1939, Pl. 27, Figs. 3, 4) provided photographs of dorsal and ventral views of C. episema (reproduced here on Plate 3, Figs. lan lb), but these were unfortunately somewhat blurred in the original reproduction. Allan (1956, Pl. 13, Fig. 1) represented only C. venusta, with drawings that do not clearly indi- cate the detail it is possible to portray in a photographic illustration, Schilder (1960, Pl. 14, Fig. 1) figured C. episema with good photo- graphs of dorsal and lateral views, but the ven- tral aspect, which is the most important for the purpose of distinguishing between C. episema and C. venusta, is lacking. Weaver (196l, p.5) illustrated the specimen of C, venusta used in this study with three well-reproduced photo- graphs. Aside from the above-mentioned mod- ern figures, one must refer to Sowerby (1870, Pl. 2, Figs. 5,6), Cox (1869, p. 358, Pl. 26, Figs. 1, la), Cox (1889, p. 187, Pl. 15, Figs. 1, 2), Weinkauff (1881, Pl. 20, Figs. 6, 7), and Tryon (1885, p. 176, Pl, 10, Figs. 44, 45) for the only other illustrations of either species that I have been able to locate in the literature. The pur- pose of this paper is to trace the references to C, venusta and C, episema, and to illustrate both species as fully as possible, with special emphasis on pointing out the differences be- tween them. I have been fortunate in being able to exam- ine at first-hand eight specimens of Cypraea episema. This unusual opportunity has been made possible through the kindness of Mr. Wil- liam E. Old of the American Museum of Natural History (Plate 2, Figs. 2a, 2b), Mr. E. L. Fobes of Omaha (Plate 2, Figs. 3a, 3b), and Mr. Clifton Weaver of Honolulu (Plate 3, Figs. 2a, 2b), all of whom have loaned their specimens for study. Mr. Ray Summers of Petaluma, California, also allowed me to study and measure the specimens in his collection, and Mrs. Thelma Hartley of Melbourne kindly provided color transparencies and the approximate measurements of speci- mens in her collection. The other shells ob- served are in my own collection, including the C. venusta which I purchased from Mr. Weaver, the measurements and locality data for all spe- cimens used are included in Table I. I had hoped to secure photographs of the holotype of C, venusta for inclusion here, but due to the re- organizational work now being done at the Brit- ish Museum (Natural History) it was not possi- ble to do so, Cypraea venusta and C, episema are closely related species of the " subgenus Zoila Jous- seaume, 1884, which is characterized chiefly by weakly developed apertural teeth and by fre- quently incomplete series of columellar teeth, Other species or subspecies assigned to this subgenus at the present time are C,. friendii Gray, 1831 (type species), C..thersites Gaskoin, 1848, C. marginata Gaskoin, 1848, C. decipiens Smith, 1880, C. vercoi Schilder, 1930, C. con- traria Iredale, 1935, and C. rosselli Cotton, 1948, All are of uncommon to rare occurrence, most are deep water species, and all are re- stricted to western and southern Australia. Vol. 5; No. 1 The present taxonomic position of Cypraea venusta is as follows: CYPRAEIDAE FLEMING, 1828 (em.) Cypraeinae SToiczKa, 1867 Cypraea LINNAEUS, 1758 Zoila JOUSSEAUMF, 1884 venusta SOWERBY, 1846 Synonyms: Cypraea thatcheri Cox, 1869 Cypraca roseopunctata MELVILL, 1888 (nom, nud.) Cypraea brunea Cox, 1889 Cypraea venusta var. brunea [Cox] Hipaco, 1906 Cypraea venusta var. bakeri GATLIFF, 1916 Because of the unavailability to most col- lectors of the early volume of the Journal of the Linnean Society of London containing Sowerby's THE VELIGER Page 7 original description, I include here a copy of the original Latin description, and a literal trans- lation into English which was generously fur- nished by Mr. George P. Kanakoff of the Los Angeles County Museum. Cypraea venusta, test4 ovato-ventricosd4 utrdque ex- tremitate anticd praecipué subrostrat4, dorso gibboso carnicolore maculis pallid@ castaneis notato, lateribus ba- salibus incrassatis carnicoloribus, extremitatibus pallid& castaneis roseo-tinctis, basi subplanulat& albicante extrem- itatibus carnicoloribus, spir4 valid& obtus4 anfractibus duo- bus, apertura elongat4 angust& rectiuscula intNs rosea postic® in canalem brevem sinistralem exeunte antic® sub- flexuosa, canali antica brevi rectiuscul@ paululim deflex4, dentibus labii externi circa 25 magnis interstitiis aequali- bus rotundatis; labii interni paucis (circa 16) majoribus dis- tantibus anticis maximis medianis fer® obsoletis, cavitate columellari parva alba. Table 1. Measurements (in millimeters) of specimens used in this study Length | Width| Height} columella] outer lip Specimen and locality * In the collection of: Cypraea venusta SowerRsy, 1846 Hypotype 1 UST 49.4 39.8 Cypraea episema IREDALE, 1939 Hypotype 1 Hypotype 2 Hypotype 3 Hypotype 4 Hypotype 5 Hypotype 6 Hypotype 7 Hypotype 8 Hypotype 9 Hypotype 10 Hypotype 11 Hypotype 12 Hypotype 13 (4) denotes faint, immature teeth (subadult) * localities Cypraea venusta SoweRBy, 1846 Hypotype 1 West Wallaby Island, Houtman Abrolhos Group (washed ashore west side of island, 1960) Cypraea episema IREDALE, 1939 C. N. Cate (No. 563) leg. Max Cramer Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. (No. 84 083) E. L. Fobes C. N. Cate (No. 1461) leg. M. Cramer C. S. Weaver; leg. Max Cramer Ray Summers Ray Summers Ray Summers Ray Summers Thelma Hartley Thelma Hartley; /eg. Barry Wilson Thelma Hartley; leg. Barry Wilson C.N. Cate (No. 1515); deg. B. Wilson | Max Cramer; /eg. Max Cramer Hypotype 1 25 fathoms, Geographe Bay Hypotype 2 40 feet, Geographe Bay off Dunsboro, near Cape Naturaliste, 1957 Hypotype 3 25 to 30 feet, on ceiling of cave, Sor- rento Reef, Perth Hypotype 4 With hypotype 3 Hypotype 5, 15 feet, Geographe Bay; July 1960 Hypotype 6 Geographe Bay, 1957 Hypotype 7 Geographe Bay Hypotype 8 Hypotype g Hypotype 10 Hypotype 11 Hypotype 12 Hypotype 13 Sorrento Reef, Perth North Western Australia, exact lo- cality unknown. Subfossil specimen 10 to 25 feet, Sorrento Beach, north of Fremantle. July 1, 1962 With hypotype 10 With hypotype 10 Sorrento Reef, limestone slab in soft green sponge Page 8 Shell ovate-ventricose, abruptly beaked at both ends; dorsal surface convex, flesh-colored and spotted with pale chestnut brown, lateral sides thick, flesh-colored, paler at the extremes, of more chestnut-rose color; base flattened, whitish and flesh-colored at ends; spire strongly obtuse with two whorls; aperture elongate, narrow, rather straight, in- side rose-pink; the posterior canal short, sinistral; denti- tion of outer lip approximately 25 large subequal inter- stices; the inner lip with 16 teeth larger and more distant at ends and almost obsolete in the middle; columellar cavity small and white. Sowerby adopted the name Cypraea venusta from an unpublished manuscript by Gaskoin, the whereabouts of which is unknown. The name had been associated with a unique specimen in the Saul Collection, but evidently was not pub- lished until Sowerby did so in 1846. In describ- ing this species Sowerby provided no type figure, and specified no type locality as such, though he added this comment: ''A very handsome Cowry, of which a single specimen has lately been re- ceived from Port Adelaide, South Australia." Sowerby may have recognized that Port Ade- laide quite possibly was not the exact locality where the specimen had been collected, and our present knowledge of the range of the species supports his seeming hesitancy to cite it spe- cifically. It seems appropriate here to summarize the various references to Cypraea venusta and C. episema in their chronological sequence, to broaden the understanding of the literary his- tories of these species. In 1847, one year after Sowerby's original publication of Cypraea venusta, his description was reprinted, word for word, in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. This refer- ence is sometimes erroneously cited as the basis for the species, but the date of actual pub- lication of C. venusta was one year earlier, No illustration was furnished in either. Cox (1869) described and figured Cypraea thatcheri (= C. venusta Sowerby) from two spe- cimens collected 10 years earlier somewhere in the Dampier Archipelago, listing the measurements as: "'L. 3 inches, W. 1 15/16, H. 111/16." Following his rather detailed de- scription, Cox further stated: ''The two speci- mens of this beautiful species now before me, one of which I send to be figured, were obtained by Mr. C. R. Thatcher, from a fisherman who took them at the locality above recorded, about ten years ago; and, so far as I know, no other specimens have yet been found. The two speci- mens are exactly alike in every way, and ina fine state of preservation. The surface of the shell is uniformly covered with a smooth shin- ing enamel, showing no trace of dorsal open- ing."' THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 Roebuck Bay® Breen Dampier GE - Archipelago J - Pe haa ake! . Roebourne WESTERN AUSTRALIA Houtman aoe Abrolhos Is. %, ¥: Fe Geraldton West Wallaby is Cervantes |. ‘:"- Sorrento Reef |®\pPerth Fremantle Geographe Bay Peinbury Cape Naturaliste~ Textfigure 1. Map showing the known ranges of Cypraea episema and Cypraea venusta Sowerby (1870) grudgingly used the Cox name Cypraea thatcheri in illustrating the spe- cies in Thesaurus Conchyliorum, saying "it would have been more graceful to have applied the [Gaskoin] manuscript name.'' His colored illustration is an adequate representation of C. venusta, and is the type figure for the species, From his statement about the manuscript name it would appear that it was probably the elder Sowerby who described the species originally, and that the younger Sowerby was not aware of this earlier paper by his father. Weinkauff (1881) likewise faithfully pic- tured Cypraea venusta in his illustration of ''C. thatcheri''. He converted the Cox measurements from inches to millimeters, as: L. 75 mm., W. 46 (50) mm., H. 42 mm. Brazier (1882), referring to Cypraea thatcheri, gave the measurements as ''Length 3 inches, width 15 inches", and corrected the type locality to ''Cervantes Island, west coast of Australia, not Dampier's Archipelago as first given by Mr. Thatcher.'' This seems to be the southernmost locality record presently known for C, venusta. Brazier's reasons for changing the measurements of the type specimen are not known, nor did he state the facts on which he THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 1 _Catr| Plate 1 Cypraea (Zoila) venusta SOWERBY, 1846 Kodachromes by Vicror Duran Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page g based his decision to change the type locality some 23 years after the specimens were col- tected, and 13 years after Cox cited the Dampier archipelago. However, according to current practice, his citation of Cervantes Island as the type locality for C. venusta must remain as valid until it has been correctly revised. It would seem that a locality somewhat to the north of this point might be more typical, but much additional collecting data will be neces- sary before any attempt should be made to change the type locality again. Jousseaume (1884), in establishing Zoila as a genus, designated Cypraea scottii Broderip, 1831 (= C, friendii Gray, 1831) as the type spe- cies, further designating only C. thersites Gas- koin, 1848, and C. marginata Gaskoin, 1848, to complete the genus, Cypraea thatcheri Cox (= C. venusta Sowerby) was referred at this time to another genus, Trona Jousseaume, 1884. Roberts in Tryon (1885) cited Cypraea ve- nusta with a brief description and a reproduc- tion of the type figure, stating ''Dampier's Is., West Australia'' as its type locality, apparently overlooking the comment by Brazier’ mentioned above. This is the earliest mention of the name C, thatcheri as a synonym of C. venusta. Roberts erroneously referred to the 1847 pub- lication in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History as the earliest date instead of the 1846 Linnean Society paper. While evidently using Sowerby's type figure to illustrate C, venusta in the Manual of Conchology, Roberts' brief de- scription employs terms which now seem more applicable to a typical specimen of C. episema: "base white, teeth thick and faint purplish white." Melvill (1888) followed Jousseaume's as- Signment of Cypraea venusta to Trona and com- pared it with C. (Trona) stercoraria Linnaeus, 1758. However, it is easy to recognize, even by a cursory comparison of their ventral surfaces, that these species belong in different subgenera, The only recognizable similarity is possibly the general bulbous appearance of each when only the dorsal aspects are considered, Melvill published the name ''C, roseopunctata Sb. MSS,"! in this paper as a synonym of C, venusta, and C, roseopunctata thereby became a nomen nudum. In 1889 Cox unknowingly described and il- lustrated a typical specimen of the species that later became Cypraea episema Iredale, 1939, er- roneously referring to it as C. venusta Sower- by. In this paper he acknowledged that his C. thatcheri was a synonym of C, venusta, but he seems not to have realized that the specimen he was discussing was misidentified. Cox named the type locality as Cape Naturaliste, ''where it was washed on Shore with the animal in it.” It is a curious coincidence that he added, "It is so unlike the type specimen [of C. venusta] that when I first saw it lying in a case of exhibits in the Melbourne Exhibition I mistook it for Cy- praea thersites, having a view of its dorsal sur- face only, but a moment's handling of it at once revealed its true nature, unlike as it is to the type.'’ It is this Cox paper that Iredale later cited for the original description of C, episema. A paper by Iredale (1935) mentions a label list of Cypraeidae privately printed by Cox in 1889, I have not seen this list, but it is appar- ent that a varietal name "'brunea’!' was applied therein to the species Cox had described earlier in the same year. was a misspelling for brunnea, but it seems appropriate to list it here in the synonymy ac- cording to Cox' original spelling. Iredale assumed that brunea {Ed. note: Ke enw The following was received from Dr. Myra "Stanford University has a copy of the Cox list. Perhaps this is a later printing. It is entitled, ''List of Cypraea as arranged by S. Ramond [sic] Roberts in Tryon's Manuel [sic] Conchology, intended for facilitating exchanges and labelling specimens in the collection of James C, Cox, M.D., Craig Crook, Pitt Street, St. Leonards, New South Wales, 1891.'"' It is also marked, "For private circulation only," which is imprinted in different type style above the title. 'On page 6, under Group C, ''Shell smooth, spotted, spots extending over the base" is the entry: '"Cypraea Venusta, Sowerby Sad ) a0 176 = Cypraea Thatcheri, Cox cee 177 Var. Cypraea Brunea, Cox dog. d00 do0 acewel (P. L.S.N.S. W.)'"} Hidalgo (1907) was the first to note specific differences between the forms we now refer to as Cypraea venusta and C. episema. He had seen the specimen of C, venusta in the Dautzen- berg Collection, and thought it was possibly the same shell figured by Cox in 1869 as C. thatch- eri. It was his opinion that the Sowerby 1870 figures of C, venusta did not represent the same species and pointed out certain differences in color pattern and dentition. He noted the vari- etal name brunea that had been applied by Cox, properly relegating it to synonymy (it was pre- occupied by at least two earlier species). Hi- dalgo, however, did not give a new name to this different form, as he might well have done. Gatliff (1916) described what he called a variety of Cypraea venusta, applying the name "Var. bakeri.’’ He regarded it as subspecifi - cally different because” two faintly distinguish - able white bands cross the dorsum, one being Page 10 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 narrower and almost central, the other at the anterior is rather broader; the remainder of the dorsum is tinted with flesh color." Gatliff illustrated his specimen well; from this figure and his description there is little doubt that he had an immature specimen of C. venusta at hand. Therefore, his variety has correctly been referred to the synonymy of that species. It is not known what has become of this specimen. Schilder (1932) cited the various references and synonyms of Cypraea venusta appearing in the literature before that date. Schilder & Schilder (1938) placed the spe- cies in the genus Zoila, apparently for the first time. They mentioned Cypraea thatcheri as a synonym, saying it is characterized by the white base and pale pink sides, giving its dentition formula as S.5-6; T. 10:44-5, citing collecting stations N.W. Australia, Dampier Archipelago, and Cape Naturaliste, and listing it as rare. Iredale (1935) cited the 1847 reprinting of the Sowerby paper as the original description of Cypraea venusta, mentioned C. thatcheri Cox, 1869, as a synonym, and ''C. venusta Cox,, 1889" as a variety, giving the respective type local- ities mentioned by each author. This was the ‘second time notice had been taken that a differ - ent species might be the basis for the second Cox figure, but Iredale merely mentioned it at this time. Four years later Iredale (1939) first ap- plied the name Cypraea episema to Cox! ''vari- ety.’’ He didnot redescribe it, referring instead to the 1889 Cox work, but as this direct refer- ence with its accompanying figure (see Plate 3, Figs. la, lb) constitutes a valid. description ac- cording to the rules of the International Com- mission on Zoological Nomenclature, the name will stand as valid. The fact that for most col- lectors the original description has been diffi- cult to obtain is probably responsible, at least in part, for some of the confusion connected with this species. Steadman & Cotton (1946) provided a com- plete itemized list of species and subspecies in the genus Zoila, referring Cypraea venusta and C, episema to subspecific rank under C, ther- sites thersites Gaskoin, 1848. This decision will be referred to again in this paper. Schilder & Schilder (1952) provided the first complete modern discussion of Cypraea venusta, though there is no illustration in their paper of the specimen discussed (see Plate 4, Figs. 1 to 3). They mentioned it as very rare, from the Dampierian Region; the dentition for- mula was given as 75 (66) 17:12. The remainder of this note is quoted here in full: 'Dampier. (Sowerby and Fulton): 1 ex: 74 (63) 17:12 (25 labial and 15 collumellar [sic] teeth); dorsum pale pink, with reddish orange spots, which are different in size, but rather round and not con- fluent, extremities greyish pink, sides pinkish white, base white, but fulvous along the mar- gins. Dautzenberg's label runs as follows: 'Cet exemplaire a été figuré in Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don, 1869, pl. 26, fig. 1', therefore one would think it to be the holotype of thatcheri Cox. This figure, however, which is reproduced by Roberts in Tryon, Man. of Conch., 7, pl. 10, fig. 44 and 45(1885) does not quite agree with Daut- zenberg's shell: the arrangement of the dorsal spots is different, as is the number of teeth (24 labial, 14 columellar teeth), and all features of the anterior extremity, especially regarding the terminal ridge, which is obsolete in Roberts' figure, but distinct and followed by a smaller intercalated denticle in Dautzenberg's shell; therefore, Dautzenberg's shell can be regarded at most as the paratype mentioned by Cox (Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1869, p. 358, 1869). "This species, bought by Dautzenberg [March 12, 1904] for £24/--/--, is extremely rare; we have seen but one shell each in the British Museum and in coll. Saul (Cambridge), and very few other specimens have been col- lected in North Western Australia." In 1956, Allan placed the two similar spe- cies, Cypraea venusta and C. episema, in dif- ferent categories, C. venusta as a full species and C. episema as a subspecies of C, thersites Gaskoin, 1849 (sic). Cypraea venusta cannot be a subspecies of C, thersites, notwithstanding this and the earlier decision by Steadman & Cotton; C. venusta has two years' priority over the latter name, though Allan points out that she and Iredale regard both C. venusta and C. epi- sema as subspecies of C, thersites. If this line Explanation of Plate 2 Figures 1a and 1b. Cypraea venusta SowerBy, 1846. Hypotype No. 1, ex C. N. Cate Collection Figures 2a and 2b. Cypraea episema IREDALE, 1939 Hypotype No. 1, ex Am. Museum of Natural History Collection Figures 3a and 3b. Cypraea episema IREDALE, 1939. Hypotype No. 2, ex E. L. Fobes Collection THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 1 [Cate] Plate 2 Figure 1 b TAKEO SusukI, photo. \ Vol. 5; No. 1 of reasoning were followed and the two species discussed here were related this closely to C. thersites Gaskoin, a major change in the sys- tematic arrangement of the Zoila species would be necessary, according to the rules of prior- ity. The result would be; Cypraea venusta ve- nusta Sowerby, 1846 (typical species); C. venusta thersites Gaskoin, 1848; C. venusta contraria Iredale, 1935; and C. venusta episema Iredale, 1939. In this 1956 paper Allan discusses the differences between the two ''subspecies" rather fully, illustrating, however, only C. venusta. Schilder (1960) considered Cypraea epise- ma a ''good species which was fished at Fre- mantle at the same time as friendii. It is easily distinguished from thersites by the whitish base, with brownish short lines on the teeth themselves (instead of the lines extending from the outer margin toward the aperture), the lighter colored sides with the more sharply de- fined dark spots, the dorsally less sharp-edged canals as well as the inner lip which is exter- nally impressed at one-quarter and three- quarters of the length. Among the Zoila, Z. episema is closest to the deep-water. form ve- nusta."' In 1961, Summers published a discussion of the two rare species though it now appears that all the specimens he used in his evaluation of them are Cypraea episema, one of these being an intrapopulation variant which will be dis- cussed later in this paper. In September 1961, Weaver published three photographs of a freshly collected Cypraea ve- nusta, the same specimen used in this study (see Plates 1 and 2, Figs. la, 1b). In October 1961 (p. 110) Schilder ambigu- ously lumped both species together under Cy- praea venusta despite having considered them separable in his 1960 paper. Discussion The two species under discussion have evi- dently been correctly assigned to Zoila, whichI prefer to consider as a subgenus of Cypraea rather than a full genus. Cypraea venusta and C. episema are perhaps more closely related to one another than are the others in that group, but still seem distinct enough to be considered separate species, at least until enough living specimens can be obtained to make possible a complete study of the anatomies of both forms. It is my opinion that their relationship to C. thersites is only as members of the same sub- genus. THE VELIGER Page 11 In classifying the Zoila, I would consider that the subgenus consists of four monotypic species and two polytypic species, the subspe- cies of the latter two being merely polytopic variants. Schilder's Prodrome (1938-1939), listing Cypraeathersites, C. vercoi, and C, con- traria as subspecies of C. friendii friendii has evidently been revised by his 1961 paper, which implies the same taxonomic revision of the Zoila species as I have suggested here, except for the inclusion of C. episema. The subgenus would therefore be arranged in the following manner: Cypraea venusta SowERBY, 1846 Cypraea marginata GASKOIN, 1848 Cypraca decipiens SMirH, 1830 Cypraea episema IREDALE, 1939 Cypraea friend friend GRAY, 1831 Cypraea friendi verco. SCHILDER, 1930 Cypraea thersites thersites GasKoIn, 1848 Cypraea thersites contraria IREDALE, 1935 In considering the reasons for the close similarity of the two species, one interesting possibility came to mind, namely, that they might be convergents from separate fossil an- cestors. However, a search of the limited amount of paleontological literature available to me (for West Australia) revealed no known fos-~- sil species even faintly resembling Cypraea venusta or C. episema; therefore, until further records can be studied, it will have to be as- sumed that they are both of Recent origin. An interesting discovery was made in the course of pursuing this study: the occurrence of a variant of Cypraea episema (see Plate 3, Figs. 2a, 2b, 3a, 3b) evidently restricted to the area of Sorrento Reef. This variant resembles the typical adult C. episema in all respects ex- cept that it is generally smaller and darker than specimens collected at stations farther south. Remarkably uniform as a group, the Sorrento Reef shells can be separated from other speci- mens of C, episema at a glance; they are con- siderably smaller (from 53 mm, to 63 mm, as compared to the 74 mm. to 80 mm. of typical C. episema), proportionately lighter in weight for their size, more compact generally and witha rich, nearly solid-patterned, almost black dor- sum, A personal note to C. S. Weaver from Max Cramer of Geraldton, Western Australia, says in part: ''I am sending my episema which came from Sorrento Reef just north of Perth in 30'-40' of water on a limestone reef, I have seen others and my specimen is smaller than most, but all taken in that area are about the -The Bunbury ones are large. . ." same size. . Page 12 Mr. Cramer's statement further corroborates the occurrence of a variant in this northern segment of the range of C, episema. It is my opinion that the existence of this variant has been another possible cause for much of the confusion between Cypraea episema and C. ve- nusta: at first glance the two forms of CG epi- sema seem different enough that it is easy to understand how one could consider them two separate species, especially since there were no readily available illustrations or type figures to make determinations possible. On closer examination, however, their morphological characters are almost identical except for size and coloration. Since C. venusta is relatively a much rarer species, not available generally for comparison, it could be considered a logical conclusion that the "'different’' northern form was probably C. venusta, as a similarity be- tween C. episema and C, venusta had been noted, and the northern collecting stations approached within approximately 100 miles of the known southern limits of C, venusta's range. Adult shells from the general area of Geo- graphe Bay (see Plate 2, Figures 2a, 2b, 3a, and 3b) (including Cape Naturaliste) are consistently larger and are giants by comparison with the Sorrento Reef variant. They are much heavier, more solid shells with a typically lighter, more scattered dorsal pattern. Further study will be necessary to discover the reason for this abrupt change in the species within so short a distance; it is possible that a temperature change and other ecological factors may be in part respon- sible for it. Perhaps the most significant fact about the variant's existence is the wedge-effect it has in separating the ranges of typical Cy- praea episema and C, venusta, The known range of Cypraea episema (see map, Textfig. 1) is from Geographe Bay north- ward to Sorrento Reef, roughly 40 miles north of Perth. The southernmost record for C. ve- nusta is approximately 100 miles north of this point, at Cervantes Island; it ranges northward through the Houtman Abrolhos Group to (possi- bly) the Dampier Archipelago, So few speci- mens of C. venusta have been recorded that no THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 more definite range limits can be established at present; most of the early lterature merely cites ''North West Australia" as the typical lo- cality. Brazier's (1882) citation of Cervantes Island established the type locality of C, ve- nusta, and Cape Naturaliste, mentioned by Cox in 1889, was apparently accepted by Iredale as the type locality for C. episema, The holotype of Cypraea venusta is in the type collection of the British Museum (Natural History). Other known specimens are in the Dautzenberg Collection (Brussels), the Saul Col- lection (Cambridge), and the Cate Collection (Los Angeles). At least one other specimen exists in Australia, presumably in the museum at Albany, Southwest Australia. Another speci- men or two are rumored to exist in the United States, but those listed here are the only veri- fied specimens I am able to cite at this time. The holotype of Cypraea episema is Num- ber D3'980 in the South Australian Museum at Adelaide. This species is more widely repre- sented in collections than C. venusta, though still of uncommon occurrence. Many of the known specimens are listed here in Table I. In a recent personal letter to me, Max Cramer mentions that he knows of the existence of four additional specimens, It is hoped that the pres- ent discussion will bring to light additional rec- ords of both species. My own specimen of Cypraea venusta (see Plates 1 and 2, Figs. la, 1b) is considerably dif- ferent morphologically from all of the other shells examined in this study. It fits Sowerby's description very well, and since, as mentioned earlier, it was impossible to obtain a photo- graph of the holotype, the Sowerby (1870) type figure was my only dependable reference point. The only difference between the type figure and my specimen is a slightly greater emphasis on the central two or three columellar teeth in the Sowerby illustration than seems appropriate; these teeth exist on my specimen, but they are very faint. Sowerby's description mentions these teeth as "almost obsolete in the middle” —a condition not readily apparent from the type Explanation of Plate 3 Figures 1a and 1b. Reproduction of type figure of Cypraea episema IREDALE, 1939 Figures 2a and 2b. Cypraea episema IREDALE, 1939. (Sorrento Reef variant) Hypotype No. 4, ex C. S. Weaver Collection Figures 3a and 3b. Cypraea cpisema IREDALE, 1939. (Sorrento Reef variant) Hypotype No. 3, Gane) ex C. N. Cate Collection THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 1 (Catge] Plate 3 Figure 1 a Takeo Susuxt, photo. , = a a hs oa ; = i } i =] i | a i i iat, ; ¥ * \ o i ip ; a tie hee Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 13 nn figure, but easily seen in my specimen and in the Dautzenberg specimen in the Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique (see Plate 4, Figures 1 to 3), In C. episema the columel- lar teeth are discontinuous, becoming entirely obsolete in the middle. It is possible that the artist wished to show the presence of the sug- gestion of teeth, but overdid the emphasis slightly in his drawing. This most important difference between the two species can be ob- served from the two drawings in Textfig. 2. Cypraea venusta differs from C. episema in being solid, humped anteriorly as well as to the rear; the bodywhorl is longer, more cylin- drically ventricose; the base and lip both slope concavely toward the aperture; the teeth are well defined, more numerous, numbering 16 on the columella. On the outer labial edge they are short, strong, with narrower interstices, more color, and number 23. The columellar teeth are finer, shorter abaperturally, extending well onto the fossula; the aperture is straighter, narrower, less curving, and constricted abapi- cally; the shell's extremities are more blunt; the color is basically rose-beige, copiously marked with large, deep, somewhat blurred chestnut spots and channels, many indistinct, others intermingled in various shades of brown; the sides above the margins are of varying in- tensities of grayish-pink, vertically rayed with striae; the left margin (only) has widely scat- tered, medium-sized brown spots; the base, teeth, and interstices differ further in being more colorful—a pale golden-orange tint, darker approaching the margins; the interior of the shell is a rosy-pink. A final difference is the wide, distinct mantle line of the basic color of the shell which traverses the right dorsum. The distinguishing features of Cypraea epi- sema are also readily recognizable. The shell is obconically ovate, humped adapically, slop- ing in a more gradual manner toward the front, moderately ventricose in the adapical hump. The sides are more acute and sharply angled; the margins are more thickly developed with a broad callus. The base is wider, noticeably so just to the rear of the center, and only very slightly concave adaxially. The columellar teeth are shorter, broader, club-like, less nu- merous, mainly confined to the abapical third of the columella, and are six in number. (On immature shells the columellar denticles may be more numerous, though mostly becoming ob- solete with maturity.) Unlike C. venusta, they do not overlap onto the fossula. The aperture is wider, curving more abruptly adapically. The extremities are heavier and more pro- duced; C. episema differs further with a basic off-white to white color, more heavily marked (though not solid, except in the Sorrento Reef variant where the dorsum is nearly a solid brownish-black) with a diffused pattern of vary- ing darker color intensities of deep chestnut brown. This species differs further in that the marginal callus striae are lateral rather than vertical; both right and left margins are spotted; the base, teeth, and interstices are white with occasionally a faintly perceptible brown tint on the crest of the teeth. There is no mantle line. Textfigure 2. Illustrating the differences in dentition: a. Cypraea venusta SowERBY, 1846 b. Cypraea episema IREDALE, 1939 Page 14 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 Conclusions To sum up my conclusions from the fore- going study, it is my opinion that, pending fur- ther information from fossil records, locality data, ecological enlightenment, the study of live-taken animals, and other considerations, Cypraea (Zoila) venusta Sowerby and C. (Z.) episema Iredale are distinct species, separable chiefly by morphological differences. It is an admitted possibility that further facts may come to light that could change this opinion. As a final note I should like to point out, for the benefit of those interested in comparing their specimens with the color plate included here, that the color has been rather faithfully reproduced and can be accepted with confidence as a fairly accurate representation of the color of a recently collected specimen of Cypraea ve- If there is any deviation from the color slightly nusta. of the actual specimen, it is perhaps more yellow than the true color. Acknowledgment To the many already mentioned who have assisted me in the research necessary for this paper I wish to add the name of Dr. Rudolf Stohler, who provided an important translation of the Schilder (1960) paper. I extend my grate- ful thanks to all of them, and especially to Jean Cate for her help and encouragement. Mrs. Emily Reid of The Veliger staff pro- vided the excellent textfigures; except as other- wise noted, the photographs are by Takeo Susuki, Literature Cited Allan, Joyce 1956. Cowry shells of world seas. to 15. Melbourne. Brazier, John 1882, Distribution and geographical range of Cowries in Australia, {Quoted from Hidalgo, 1906-1907, p. 90. Careful search of the literature has failed to yield aclue as to the place of publication of this pa- per; the conclusion reached is that it may have been a privately published pamphlet which is now unavail- able. The title is not listed in such standard bibli - ographical works as the Zoological Record, Zoolo- gischer Anzeiger, etc. Yet it seems unlikely that Hidalgo invented his paragraph on p. 90 or the ad - ditional reference on p, 553. — C, N. C.} pp. 1-170, pls. 1 Cox, James C, 1869. On three new species of marine shells. Zool. Soc, London 1869: 358-359, a 1889, Note on Cypraea venusta, Proc, Linn, Soc, New So. Wales, 2nd ser, 4: 187; pl. 15, figs. 1, 2. Gatliff, J. H. 1916. Description of two Australian cowries, ria Nat. Melbourne 32: 147-149, Hidalgo, J. G. 1906-1907. Monografia de las especies vivientes del género Cypraea. Mem, Real. Acad. Cienc, Madrid 25: 1-588. Iredale, Tom 1935. Australian cowries, 8 (2): 96-135; pls. 8-9. Proc, Victo- Pt. I. Austral. Zoolog., 2 1939. Australian cowries, Pt. II, 9 (3): 297-323; pls. 27-29. Jousseaume, F, 1884, Etude sur lafamille des Cypraeidae. Zool, Frang. 9: 81-100. Austral. Zoolog., Bull, Soc. Melvill, James Cosmo 1888. A catalogue of the species and varieties of Cyp- raea, Mem. Proc. Manchester Lit. Soc. ser. 4, 1 (5): 184-252; pls. 1, 2. Schilder, Franz Alfred 1932. Cypraeacea. Fossilium catalogus, pp. 1-276. 1960. Zur Kenntnis der Cypraeidae. Arch. Moll. 89 (4-6): 185-192; pls. 14-15, 1961. Another statistical study in size of cowries. The Veliger 4 (2): 107-112. Schilder, Franz Alfred, & Maria Schilder 1938. Prodrome of a monograph on living Cypraeidae. Proc. Mal. Soc. Lond., 23 (3): 119-231; 16 textfigs. oy ces fh : 1952. Ph. Dautzenberg's collection of Cypraeidae. Inst. Roy. Sci. Nat. Belg., 2nd ser,, No. Mém. 45; 1-243; pls. 1-4. Sowerby, George Brettingham 1846. Description of a new cowry. London 1; 314, Proc. Linn. Soc, 1847. Mag. Nat. Hist. Description of a new species of cowry. Ann. 19: ser. 1: 346. 1870, Thesaurus conchyliorum. Vol. 4, Monograph of the genus Cypraea: 1-58; pls. 1-37. Steadman, W. K., & B. C. Cotton 1946, Key to the classification of the cowries. So. Austral. Mus. 8: 504-530; pls. 8-13. Summers, Ray 1961, The venusta - episema puzzle, News 9 (5): 4, 8. Tryon, George W., Jr. Rec, Hawaiian Shell 1885. Manual of conchology (Cypraeidae), 7: 153-228; pls. 1-23. Weaver, Clifton S, 1961. The extremely rare Cypraea venusta Sby, Hawaiian Shell News 9 (11): 5; illust, Weinkauff, H. C. 1881. Die Gattungen Cypraea und Ovula. Conch. Cab. Martini & Chemnitz, Niirnberg; 1-166; pls. 1- 44, 520 figs. Explanation of Plate 4 Cypraea venusta Figure 1. Ventral aspect. Specimen in Collection Dautzenberg. Figure 2. Dorsal aspect. SOWERBY, 1846 Figure 3. Lateral aspect. Photographs through the courtesy of the Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique. Tue VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 1 [Cate] Plate 4 Figure 2 © InstiTuT Royat Des Sciences NATURELLES DE BELGIQUE Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 15 Historical Zoogeographic Study of the Clavagellacea BY LEE ANDERSON SMITH Department of Geology, Stanford University, Stanford, California (2 Textfigures) Introduction The restudy of this unusual pelecypod group, often referred to as the ''watering pot" shells, was undertaken as a revision for the "Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology" in which a resumé of the taxa and types of the su- perfamily will appear. A more complete review of the group was published in The Veliger, vol- ume 4, number 4 (Smith, 1962). During the investigation it was necessary to compile data on the relationships of over 100 species of the group. Interesting and somewhat puzzling distribution patterns emerged for spe- cies and higher taxa in both time and space. I am, therefore, attempting an analysis of the distribution patterns in the light of modern zoo- geographic thought. Apparent rarity of the clavagellids during all of their geologic history makes it difficult to arrive at other than hypothetical conclusions, There are no large numbers of fossil remains nor of living forms upon which to base statisti- cal analyses. Sparsity of the animals at any one time, and perhaps also difficulty of preser- vation in their usual habitats, have left pitifully incomplete the record of their geologic history. One is further hampered by incomplete studies of geologic sections in areas of clavagellid dis- tribution outside Europe. The present study should at least point up the necessity of taking into consideration the geologic record in zoogeographic investiga- tions, regardless of the incompleteness of that record. In the case of clavagellids, restriction to data on the Recent species would give the re- verse of what is probably the true history of the group. There are only four species living out- side the Indo-Pacific-Australasian region, yet most of the group's geologic history is record- ed in the strata of Europe. Indeed, it would be difficult to explain the present distribution without some knowledge of past occurrences. Historical zoogeography is neither clearly a means It must depend upon al- most every other discipline of the geologic and biologic sciences. The historical zoogeograph- er is accountable for the consideration of an ever-increasing bulk of data, from paleontology to pollution studies. At the present time he is torn between revelling in the tremendous vol- ume of available data and being crushed by its mass. After consideration of the already for- midable amount of data, he attempts to integrate his own and thus adds to the task of those who follow. nor an end. The extreme importance of both tempera- tures and land-mass distribution in the control of shelf faunas requires the careful considera- tion of paleoclimates and paleogeography, each of which is a synthesis of data from multiple- discipline approaches. Historical zoogeography must both use and test the earlier findings of diverse and often seemingly alien workers. Relationships and Distribution The two figures following will summarize as briefly as possible the findings of the earlier study (Smith, loc. cit.), Figure 1 diagrammati- cally represents the development of the clava- gellids throughout their known geologic history. Morphology and geographic distributions sug- gest that the penicillids arose in Early Tertiary _from Clavagella (Stirpulina) and that the rock- dwelling forms are later developments from Clavagella s.s. Figure 2 shows the change in geographic distribution of the group's members with ad- vancing time. The eastward shift during later Tertiary times is evident. The available geo- logic record indicates that the group inhabited mainly European waters until Late Oligocene. Bryopa is the only known survivor west of the Red Sea. Page 16 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 £ | 8 RECENT C. (DACOSTA HUMPHRE YIA ~-- PLEISTOCENE WSS PLIOCENE MIOCENE c.(BR ora ' bry p(PSEUDOBRECH) H PENIGILLUS, s.s. OLIGOCENE EOCENE PALEOCENE U. CRETACEOUS C.(STIRPULINA) CLAVAGELLA,s.s. | ‘ 2 Re ee 02468 M. CRETACEOUS ¢ NO, OF SPEC, Figure 1. Temporal distribution of Clavagellids and probable evolutionary development Modern clavagellids inhabit mainly clear shallow seas in subtropical shelf areas. The center of present-day clavagellid distribution lies in the vast areas of submerged shelf sur- rounding the Indo-Malay archipelago, from southern Japan to the northern shores of Aus- tralia, and as far west as the Mediterranean, It is important to note that, as members of the subtropical shelf faunas, the clavagellids must have required temperature and land area distributions differing from those of the modern world to allow (or force) their eastward move- ments during Middle to Late Tertiary times. Affinities have been noted in many animal groups between inhabitants of southwestern Mediterranean and subtropical Japanese waters, Numerous fossil occurrences of their relatives in present-day land areas such as India also attest to the presence of a former connecting seaway, This ancient water body — the Tethys Sea — extended, approximately through the modern Mediterranean area, from eastern North America to southern Asia, and existed from Early Mesozoic to Middle Tertiary times. Historical Zoogeography of the Clavagellids During Late Cretaceous time continental terrestrial areas were considerably restricted, and the areal extent of epicontinental seas was greater than at any time since Ordovician (Zeuner, 1945), The continents were compara- tively featureless, rather uniformly low in ele- vation. Tropical to subtropical floras occupied most of the southern two-thirds of the United States (MacGinitie, 1958). According to Durham (1950), the February isotherm of 18° C. must have been located at about 53° N. Lat., approxi- mately 1'500 miles north of its present location on the coast of Baja California. Suggested warmth of the seas would be sufficient to push subtropical faunas to the northern limits of the Tethys seaway. The Tethys existed for much of geologic history; but, being considerably north of the equator, it perhaps provided east-west passage of tropical, and to some extent subtropical, ma- rine faunas only during warmest times, e.g., Late Cretaceous to Late Eocene, According to Schuchert (1935), there existed shallow shelf areas bordering continuous lands which con- nected the European (about present-day Spain) with the North American region (about New York), During the warm Late Cretaceous, this could have provided the westward migration passage for subtropical shelf faunas necessary for the appearance of Clavagella (Stirpulina) ar- mata Morton in the Late Cretaceous of New Jersey. Continued warming then perhaps forced them back to the northeast along the coast be- yond the limits of the present North American continent, and thus outside the areas of our present exposures of younger strata. Similarly, the Tethys seaway provided even easier access for subtropical shelf faunas to the northern In- dian area during Late Cretaceous, as the con- nection of India with the Mediterranean region 3 e re) 5 | = rg 3 g z J <4 Py a ‘ < f Eg +g 92. eee 2 Ww dq = = q c(B8.) P(Pe) cia) ch&) cic) Pw.) PiPe) cls) cB) PIF) PiPe) c{D) RECENT if) oa PiPe) Piw) PIF) Piw) PLEISTOCENE P(Pe) PLIOCENE CG.) PPe) PiPe) PIF) cls.) PIF) PiW) MIOCENE cis.) cic) PiPe.) PIF) «= PAF) P(Ps.) OLIGOCENE CIB.) C{S.) piPe) c{G) c(S.) EOCENE CIC.) cis.) PALEOCENE cic) uv. cReTacEous §=©'S) GAS) cic) cic) C(c) Figure 2. Geographic distribution of Clavagellids from Late Cretaceous to Recent Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 17 is well established. This should adequately ex- plain the presence of Clavagella (Clavagella) semisulcata Forbes in Late Cretaceous strata of India. Questionable Middle Cretaceous occur- rences of Clavagella s.s. and its morphology suggest that it is the original stock and perhaps developed in the shelf areas of warm shallow seas of southern Europe. The lack of records from the southern hemisphere suggests that it was not a tropical form but originated in the northern subtropics prior to the Late Cre- taceous-Early Tertiary temperature maximum. Continued warming and access to the entire Tethys seaway suggest the possible avenue for eastward migration of Clavagella s. s. (to In- dia) and westward migration to North America of the then new C. (Stirpulina) branch. As the only living Stirpulina is found in Japanese wa- ters, it may be inferred that it was tolerant of slightly colder waters and was thus able to ne- gotiate the more northerly route to North America, whereas Clavagella s.s. could not, The suggestion that Stirpulina was the colder water form of the two is strengthened by the fact that in the cooler Pliocene the animal was still living in Central Europe, whereas Clava- gella s.s. is not found in Pliocene strata out- side the Italian peninsula. Paleocene - Eocene "Existent bitter arctic conditions around the poles would not be possible with the indi- cated oceanic temperatures of Late Cretaceous and Early Tertiary times'' (MacGinitie, 1958). Chaney (1947) reported evidence which indicates the existence of temperate deciduous forests around the North Pole ranging in age from Paleocene to Middle Eocene. Durham (1950) concluded that during the Eocene, the 18° C. iso- therm was between 53° and 55° North Latitude, even farther north than during Late Cretaceous. Tropical floras existed along the Gulf of Mexico during Early Tertiary and shifted northward, the advance culminating in Late Eocene (Chaney, 1947). After spreading as far as India and east- ern North America during Late Cretaceous, no Paleocene or Eocene records of clavagellids are known from areas outside Europe. This suggests that, for some reason, east-west mi- gration was halted by the end of Cretaceous and the group was forced to withdraw to the Euro- pean region, The configuration of the northern shores of the Tethys seaway may be offered as a reason for the apparent withdrawal to the cen- tral area. Since the clavagellids were appar- ently members of the subtropical shelf faunas, the continued rise in temperatures through Eo- cene would force northward migration (north- west from India and northeast from North America) along the northern arc of the Tethys Sea. This hypothesis is negatively supported by the lack of Eocene occurrences in southern Eu- rope. It would be positively supported by the discovery of Eocene clavagellids in Greenland and on the Scandinavian peninsula. Oligocene Emiliani (1958), from his study of deep sea cores, has indicated that in the Pacific abyssal equatorial temperatures of Middle Oligocene were about 10°C., and present-day circulation patterns suggest that temperatures must have been little less in the polar seas, Although pol- ar winter snows would be probable, permanent ice caps would be impossible under such condi- tions. The time from Early Oligocene to the first glacial stage of Pleistocene is marked by a gradual cooling and drying of climates (Mac- Ginitie, 1958). The decline of temperatures in Oligocene again allowed south and southeastward migra- tion of the subtropical shelf faunas. Perhaps discontinuous land and shelf areas existed be- tween Europe and North America, effectively restricting a remigration to the west. Clava- gellids returned to southern Europe and north- eastern Africa, and three new branches devel- oped to take advantage of the available environ- ments. Penicillus s.l. probably developed in the northern Tethys, perhaps during Early Oligo- cene, Continued lowering of temperatures would have brought it south into Europe (Pseu- dobrechites) and southeastward along the un- broken northeastern shore of the Tethys Sea into the Indo-Pacific region (Penicillus s.s.). The form Bryopa developed in the southern Eu- ropean area in Late Oligocene, perhaps replac- ing some tropical form which was probably forced to abandon its niche among the declining reef corals as the lowering of temperatures continued. The continued increase of climatic extremes apparently eliminated Pseudobrechites in the south-central Tethys and left Penicillus alone in the Indo-Pacific area, from which all later penicillids must have branched. Page 18 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 Neogene and Quaternary in Europe According to Durham (1950), the 18°C. isotherm had moved down the west coast of America to the approximate latitude of northern California by Early Miocene. This indicates the continued lowering of general oceanic tempera- tures which eventually brought about the decline of the tropical and subtropical Tethys faunas in the European area. This is evidenced by the restriction of many groups such as the reef corals, and their migration into the Indo-Pacific region (Gerth, 1925, in Ekman, 1953). During Miocene times Clavagella s.s.ap- peared in the Indian region, probably moving southeastward with other subtropical elements of the Tethys fauna. During Pliocene only Stir- pulina remained in the central European area, and Clavagella s.s. was effectively restricted to the southern extremities of that continent. Bryopa, which developed during cooler times than other clavagellids, was the only form to survive Pleistocene coldness in the Mediter- ranean region. It is possible that, since Bryopa migrated with other faunas into the Indo-Pacific region before effective closing of the Tethys seaway, it may have been reintroduced into the Mediterranean through the Red Sea during an interglacial stage of Pleistocene. There is, however, no supporting evidence from Pleisto- cene strata for such a supposition. Early Neogene in the Indo- West- Pacific The Oligocene introduction of Penicillus S.s. into the Indo-Pacific region opened new vistas for the development of the penicillid branch, Clavagella s.s., Bryopa, and Stirpu- lina survived the migration also but were prob- ably equatorially restricted much earlier than the newer forms. Penicillus, which developed during cooler Middle Tertiary time, was ap- parently able to make the most of vast shelf areas of the Indo-Malay region for rapid spread and the development of several new branches. During Miocene the penicillid Foegia de- veloped in the Indo-Malay area and migrated northeastward into the southern Japanese and Philippines region. Clavagella remained along the shores of the Indian Ocean and Penicillus s.s. developed new species and spread through the Indo-Pacific. Pliocene Axelrod (1956, 1957) has suggested from paleobotanical evidence that average tempera- tures at the beginning of Pliocene differed little from those of today but suggested that the tem- perature range was considerably less in the western United States (more equable climates), However, the northern oceans were apparently still warmer than those of today, as Durham (1950) suggests a position for the 18°C, iso- therm at 35° N. Latitude, some 5° to 6° north of its present location. From distribution stud- ies of fossil pulmonates, Frye & Leonard (1957) concluded that conditions of seasonal climates essentially like the present day were attained by Late Pliocene. A third penicillid group (Warnea) appeared in the South China Sea and is recorded from Pliocene strata of both Formosa and southern Japan. The Red Sea, much as we know it today — though a little cooler — came into existence during Pliocene, and equable climates allowed considerable spreading of the more eurythermal forms. Penicillus s.s. migrated into the Red Sea from the Indian Ocean, The higher than normal temperatures of that body of water were per- haps extant even then and may have made it possible for Penicillus to remain there until the present day. Pleistocene During the glacial stages the zone of maxi- mum cyclonic activity was even farther south than at present. Southward movement of the polar front and increased temperature gradients caused pluvial conditions in the zone just south of the glaciated area during glacial periods (MacGinitie, 1958). Manley (1955) indicated that north-south temperature gradients may have had at least double the present value. During such times of cyclic climatic changes, the stimuli to admixture, hybridization, and natural selection must have been greatly intensified (MacGinitie, 1958). During periods of intense glaciation, all clavagellids except Stirpulina were probably restricted to a narrow equatorial zone, being allowed northward and southward migration only during interglacial warming. Only such a distribution would effectively explain the present-day bipolarity of all except Stirpulina and branches developed during Recent times. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 19 Recent A gradual warming of world climates cul- minated in the soecalled ''Climatic-Optimum" about 6 000 years ago, followed by a return to the cooler conditions of the present day. Now, warming seems to have been renewed (MacGin- itie, 1958), resulting in the spread of tropical deserts from western India across the Mediter- ranean and northern Africa, and in the south- western United States (Wadia, 1955). The Recent so-called ''Climatic Optimum" (actually a post-Pleistocene interglacial stage) probably brought about bipolarity in most of the formerly equatorial groups. Gradual cooling has since allowed equatorial mingling of the es- sentially tropical forms. Two new groups, Humphreyia and Dacosta, have developed on the Australian coasts, prob- ably from the clavagellid line. Warnea proba- bly migrated around the shores of the Indian Ocean and into the Red Sea during an intergla- cial stage, or perhaps during the Early Recent warming. Subsequent cooling has eliminated it from intermediate areas, but adjacent desert conditions have maintained higher than normal temperatures in the Red Sea and Warnea has survived there. Acknowledgment This study was made possible through ac- cess to the library and museum facilities of Stanford University, the California Academy of Sciences, and the University of California at Berkeley. Grateful acknowledgment is extended to Dr. Myra Keen for continuous advice, assistance, and encouragement during the in- vestigation and for critically reading the final manuscript. However, the writer accepts full responsibility for any errors of transcription or of judgment. Literature Cited Axelrod, D. IL. 1956. Mio-Pliocene Floras from West Central Nevada Univ. Calif. Publ. Geol. Sci, 33: 1-322. 1957. Wate Tertiary Floras and the Sierra Nevada Up- lift. Geol. Soc. Am., Bull. 68: 19-46. Chaney, Ralph W. 1947. Tertiary centers and migration routes. Monographs, 17; 139-148 Durham, J. Wyatt 1950, Cenozoic marine climates of the Pacific coast. Geol. Soc. Am., Bull. 61: 1243-1264. Ecol. Ekman, S. 1952. Zoogeography of the sea. Sidgwick and Jack- son, Ltd., London. Emiliani, C, 1958. Ancient temperatures. Sci. Amer. 198: 54-63. Frye, J. C., & A. B. Leonard 1957. Ecological interpretations of Pliocene and Pleis- tocene stratigraphy in the Great Plains region. Am. Journ. Sci., 255: 1-11. MacGinitie, H. D. 1958. Climate since the Late Cretaceous, Zoogeogra- phy (a symposium). Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci. 51:61 to 79. Washington. Schuchert, C. 3 1935. Historical geology of the Antillean - Carribean sea. New York, Smith, Lee Anderson 1962. Revision of the Clavagellacea. (4): 167-174; figs. 1-9. Wadia, D. N. 1955. Deserts in Asia - their origin and development in Late Pleistocene time. Second Seward Mem. Lect., Birbal Sahni Inst. Paleobot., Lucknow. Zeuner, F. E. 1945. The Pleistocene period. The Veliger 4 Ray Soc. London. Page 20 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 A New Species, Genus, and Family of Marine Flatworms (Turbellaria: Tricladida, Maricola) Commensal with Mollusks BY JOHN T. HOLLEMAN Oakland City College, Oakland, California and CADET HAND Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley 4, California (3 Textfigures) Introduction The animal described in this report brings to three the number of marine triclad turbel- larians described from the Pacific Coast of North America. In his monograph of triclads, Wilhelmi (1909) described all the marine spe- cies known up to that time. Since 1909 new spe- cies of the Maricola have been added by Hallez (1911, 1913), Béhmig (1914), Hyman (1944, 1952, 1954, 1956), Marcus (1947, 1948), and Westblad (1952). In 1954 Hyman described the first ma- rine triclad known from the Pacific Coast of North America, a member of the Procerodidae, Procerodes pacifica, which was collected near San Diego, California. In 1956, a second, Ne- sion arcticum, representing a new family, the Nesionidae, was described from Alaska by Hy- man. The animal described below differs from all known marine triclads in an interesting and significant feature. The ovovitelline ducts enter the roof of the penis bulb, This unique feature makes it necessary to establish a new family, genus, and species, Materials G Methods The first specimens of the present triclad were collected one mile south of Stinson Beach, California, in 1956. About 70 specimens were collected at various times over the next several years and were preserved in Bouin's fixative. Bight additional specimens were received from Clinton A. Westervelt, Jr., of Lewis and Clark College, Portland, Oregon; 22 specimens were received from Howard Wright of the University of California, Berkeley; and 18 specimens from Dr. Dana Abell of Sacramento State College. Ten whole mounts were made and stained with aceto-carmine and counter-stained with fast green. Serial sections were cut in paraffin at 7 and 10 microns. A number of sets of serial sections were stained in alum-hematoxylin and counter-stained in eosin. Ten sets of serial sections were stained by the periodic acid- Schiff technique.. Systematics NEXILIDAE, new family Maricolous triclad Rarhellariads with ovo- vitelline ducts entering the penis bulb. Nexilis HOLLEMAN & HAND, gen. nov. With the characters of the family. Type: Nexilis epichitonius, spec. nov. Nexilis epichitonius HOLLEMAN & Hanpb, spec. nov. The mature living specimens are 3 mm, long and 1.5-2.0 mm. wide. Flattening during fixation may distort the shape so that the speci- mens may be slightly longer (4 mm.) and wider (3 mm.). The living specimens are white except for the black eyes. and the gut which is dark blackish-brown in color. Auricles are absent. Two eyes are located a short distance from the anterior margin, directly in front of the brain. Sections through the eyes show that they are pigmented ocellar cups without lenses. The epidermis is ciliated dorsally and ventrally. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 21 Figure 1: Nexilis epichitonius HOLLEMAN & Hanp, gen. et spec. nov.; drawn from a living specimen (specimen 2.5 mm.long) The male part of the reproductive system consists of four pairs of ventral testes segmen- tally arranged ina bilateral distribution. The members of the pairs are separated from one another by the anterior branch of the gut. The testes are located directly behind the ovaries, The sperm ducts run ventrally from the testes and posteriorly, parallel and medial to the ven- tral nerves, past the pharyngeal cavity, then upward in an S-shaped curve to enter separately into the seminal vesicle. The seminal vesicle connects with the large cavity, the bulbar lumen, within the base of the penis by means of a mi- nute canal within a papilla which protrudes pos- teriorly from the posterior wall of the seminal vesicle. The papilla has a muscular appear- ance. The female part of the reproductive system consists of a pair of ovaries located directly behind the brain and anterior to the testes. The ovovitelline ducts run posteriorly along the course of and lateral to the ventral nerves, Along the length of the ducts vitellaria can be observed. At the posterior end of the pharyn- geal cavity, the ovovitelline ducts converge dorsally to a point directly above the enlarged proximal maximal area of the bulbar lumen. At this point the ovovitelline ducts unite to form a common ovovitelline duct. The common ovovi- telline duct enters the roof of the bulbar lumen. Located around the common ovovitelline duct are glandular structures which are interpreted as cement glands. Egg capsules have been ob- served in living and preserved specimens and in sectioned material. The egg capsule occu- pies the enlarged proximal maximal area of the bulbar lumen. When the egg capsule is present, the seminal vesicle is compressed anteriorly and the penis bulb and penis papilla are dis- tended posteriorly. Discharge of the egg cap- sule has not been directly observed, but living specimens have been observed a short while after discharge of the egg capsule. Evidence of rupturing of the body wall for the discharge of the egg capsule has not been found, but obser- vations suggest that the egg capsule is passed down the ejaculatory duct and discharged through the common gonopore. This passage of the egg capsule is probably aided by the exten- sive musculature of the penis bulb and penis papilla. Within the ovaries are developing oocytes and eggs. Sperm have been observed at the exit of the ovovitelline duct from the ovary, and in some specimens sperm have been observed in the Ovary proper. An occasional variation in the arrangement of the testes has been observed. The variation consists of: first, three pairs of testes segmen- tally arranged in a bilateral distribution; sec- ond, three testes located on one side of the gut and four on the opposite side; the remaining variations were three and five, three and six, and finally four and five testes on opposite sides of the body. = Eyes cena OVAGY, Ao a Testes —— Pharynx Intestinal Diverticulum Penis Bulb Figure 2: Nexilis epichitonius HOLLEMAN & Hann, gen. et spec. nov.; drawing from a cleared whole- mount to show the distribution of the gonads. Page 22 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 Antrum Common Gonopore Penis Papilla Penis Bulb Bulbar Lumen Ovovitelline Duct Sperm Duct Mouth Pharynx Figure 3: Semidiagrammatic median sagittal section of Nexilis epichitonus HOLLEMAN & HAND, gen. et spec. nov. showing the copulatory apparatus. The triclad was found in association with Mopalia hindsii (Reeve, 1847) and was first ob- served in the mantle cavity of this chiton. Upon further investigation of the only other chiton in the vicinity, M. muscosa (Gould, 1846), the flat- worm was observed to associate only with M, hindsii. At times the flatworm was observed on the dorsal side of the mantle and under the edges of the plates. The worm does not seem to be parasitic on the chiton, but rather exists as a commensal, The specimens received from Mr. Wester- velt were found in a marine aquarium. The material in the aquarium had been collected from the north shore of Smuggler Cove near Short Sand Beach State Park in Tillamook County, Oregon, and no chitons were included. Dr. Eugene Kozloff, Lewis and Clark College, reports the worm to be in association with Mo- palia hindsii at Smuggler Cove. The specimens from Mr. Wright were col- lected on a dead Cancer productus Randall, 1839, at Sausalito, Marin County, California. The specimens were returned to the laboratory and fixed in Bouin's fixative. Specimens which were received from Dr. D. Abell were collected from the South Jetty, Coos Bay, Coos County, Oregon, on Thais emarginata (Deshayes, 1839). The type locality is designated as Stinson Beach, California (122° 37'W.; 37° 53'N.). The holotype (A. M.N.H. No. 503), as a set of sagittal sections, as wellas 10 preserved paratype spe- cimens (A. M. N.H. No. 504) have been deposited in the invertebrate section of the American Muse- um of Natural History. Acknowledgment We wish to express our gratitude to Dr. L. H. Hyman for her advice during the course of the work reported here. Literature Cited Béhmig, L. 1914. Die rhabdocoelen Turbellarien und Tricladen. in: E. von Drygalski, Deutsche Siidpolarexpedition 1901-1903. Berlin; Zool. 7 (1): 1-34. Hallez, P. 1911. tiques. to 463. 1913.. Vers polyclades et triclades maricoles. in: Jean Chracot; Deuxiéme expéd. antarct. frang. (1908-1910). Paris, 4: 1-69. Hyman, Libbie Henrietta 1944. Marine turbellaria from the Atlantic coast of North America. Amer. Mus. Novit. 1266; 1-15. Un bdellouride non-parasite des mers antarc- Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 152: 461 1952. Atlantic coast of the United States. 103: 195-200, Further notes on the turbellarian fauna of the Biol. Bull. ’ 1954, fornia. A new marine triclad from the coast of Cali- Amer. Mus. Novit. 1679; 1-5.. 1956. new species. Marcus, Ernst 1947. Turbelarios marinhos do Brasil, Bol. Fac. Fil. Cien. Letr., Univ. Sao Paulo, Zoologia 12: 99-215. North American triclad turbellaria. 15, Three Amer. Mus. Novit. 1808: 1-44. » 1948. Turbellaria do Brasil. Bol. Fac. Fil. Cien. Letr., Univ. Sao Paulo, Zoologia 13: 111-243. Westblad, E, 1952. Turbellaria (excl. Kalyptorhynchia) of the Swed- ish South Polar Expedition 1901-1903. in: N. H. Odhner (ed.), Further zoological results of the Swedish Antarctic expedition 1901-1903, under Nordenskjold. Stockholm, 4 (8): 1-55. Wilhelmi, J. : 1909. Tricladen. Faunau. Flora Golfes v. Neapel. Monograph no. 32, xii, 405 pp. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 23 Comparison of Two Similar Species of Conus (Gastropoda) from the Gulf of California Part I: A Statistical Analysis of Some Shell Characters BY FAY HENRY WOLFSON 3336 Poe Street, San Diego 6, California (6 Textfigures) The difficulties experienced by contempo- rary conchologists in the correct identification of Conus perplexus Sowerby, 1857, are not un- precedented, as Sowerby himself attested when he named this gastropod. In his original de- scription (1857, species no. 157, pl. 14) Sowerby remarked, ''This shell perplexes me because there is a variety of Conus puncticulatus which it nearly resembles."' The G@ puncticulatus of the older writers, however, is definitely not a West American species (Hanna & Strong, 1949, p. 290), while the resemblance which confounds us today is that between C. perplexus and C. ximenes Gray, 1839, both found in the Gulf of California. Shell pattern and color are so similar in Conus perplexus and C. ximenes as to be vir- tually identical. To separate the two species, it has been the practice to rely primarily on an apparent difference in size and proportion, and on this basis the smaller, fatter species has been designated C. perplexus, the thinner and longer, C. ximenes. It was my conviction that, if these two ''species" are actually distinct, there must be a more objective basis on which to separate them. For instance, I have exam- ined 1'448 cones from the Gulf of California, all of which I am satisfied to assign, on the basis of general shape, shell color and pattern, to this complex. But no feature was acceptable as a basis for deciding to which one of the two species a specimen should be assigned. As will be shown below, neither the literature nor con- siderations of size range, habitat, and geo- graphical distribution provided such a basis. Perhaps because an insufficient number of specimens was available to the authors, the lit- erature accessible to me does not contribute to a Clarification of the confusion. Sowerby's per- plexity was as nothing compared to that of Dall (1910, pp. 219-220). Hanna & Strong (loc. cit., p. 286) have attempted to unravel the synonymy but offer no means of discrimination between the two species. The size ranges given in the literature are not always applicable. Hill (1959) cites 26 x 16 mm. for Conus perplexus, 40 x 20 mm. for C. ximenes. Keen (1958, #926, p. 482, and #930, p. 483) gives lengths of 30 mm. (C. perplexus) and 42 mm, (C. ximenes). Hanna & Strong (loc. cit., p. 290) report dimensions for only one spe- cimen, a large C. perplexus, of 41.5 x 22 mm. None of these measurements fits the 78 cones which I collected at San Luis Gonzaga on 27 March 1961, the smallest of which was 40 x 25 mm. Nor would aperture color serve as a basis for separation of the two species. For, although ‘Keen (loc. cit.) mentions difference of color in- side the aperture ("'blue-violet, deeper within", for Conus perplexus; "purple" for C, ximenes) as a distinguishing characteristic and Hill (loc. cit.) describes both apertures as purple, aper- ture color in the 1 448 specimens varied from white through pink, blue-violet, and purple. Geographical distribution of the 1 448 cones studied covers both sides of the Gulf of Califor- nia, as well as the Pacific coasts of the Mexi- can mainland, Costa Rica, Nicaragua, and the Canal Zone (see Figure 1). Conus ximenes has been collected at every locality represented, and, although C. perplexus, in the collections I have examined, has not been reported south of Puertecitos on the west coast of the Gulf or south of Mazatlan on the east coast, the area in which these cones coexist is still an extensive one. As for habitat, the cones which I have col- lected myself (all on the west coast in the north- Page 24 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 ern part of the Gulf) were found almost entirely on sandbars exposed when the tide was out. In this region the ebbing tide, even when not ex- tremely low, uncovers a series of long, narrow sandbars which, as a rule, parallel the shore. They are separated by shallow, even narrower channels. There appears to be a distinct hori- zontal zonation of species of some of the com- mon molluscan genera, and it would not seem unreasonable to expect a similar zonation in the distribution of Conus. And yet, I have collected cones On adjacent sandbars during two conse- cutive low tides which, on the basis of their proportions, should be assigned to the two sep- arate species, Furthermore, two specimens differing enough to make their assignment to a single species questionable were found side by side at Cholla Bay (Gale Sphon, personal com- munication). Mexico Pacific Ocean 100 Kilometers Figure 1: Map showing the collecting stations of the specimens used in this study. General Areas Conus perplexus Conus ximenes 1 San Felipe 719 20 2 Puertecitos 1 54 3 San Luis Gonzaga 204 4 Bahia Los Angeles 11 5 La Paz 32 6 Puerto Penasco 150 46 7 Punta Libertad 14 8 Tiburon Island 151 6 9 Guaymas 4 4 10 Mazatlan 17 2 no specific Gulf locality given 13 Total 1042 406 The lack of even one diagnostic feature which I could use as a positive distinction be- tween these two taxa suggested to me the possi- bility that these cones might actually belong to a single species. This study was undertaken to ascertain by statistical methods whether or not a separation into two groups is valid and, if so, to seek a formula for use in distinguishing be- tween them. Methods & Procedures All cones included in this survey were col- lected in the Gulf of California proper (Figure 1). Specimens from the open oceanic coast of Mexico and its southern neighbors were exam- ined but are excluded from the data presented. The shells studied are held in the collec- tions of the San Diego Natural History Museum, the Santa Barbara Natural History Museum, and the Department of Zoology of the University of California at Berkeley, and in the private col- lections of Mr. and Mrs. Emery Chace, Helen DuShane, Faye Howard, Gale Sphon, Kay Webb, and in my own collection. Four hundred six of these specimens were labelled Conus ximenes, and 1'042 were labelled C. perplexus. Four measurements (length, width, length of bodywhorl, and apical angle) were recorded for these shells (Figure 2). The linear mea- surements were made to the nearest half milli- meter. All measurements were made to the degree of precision possible with the available instruments: lengths and widths by dividers and a millimeter rule; by a machine designed for the San Diego Natural History Museum; or by a very fine calipers. To measure the apical angles, a goniometer was improvised from a carpenter's bevel and a protractor. It soon became apparent that neither any single measurement nor any pair of measure- ments could give an accurate picture of the proportions of an individual specimen due to two inconsistent shell characteristics (both ex- tremely common in the shells labelled Conus ximenes and exceedingly rare in those desig- nated C. perplexus). The first consists of dam- age to the spire, altering its shape. This in- cludes broken or worn primary apical whorls, and the effect on the length measurements and on the apical angle is obvious. The second characteristic is the ''dropped shoulder" (Figure 3) which can affect the apical angle measure- ment by making it impossible to have three points of the spire in contact with the measur- ing instrument. It also distorts the ratio of Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 25 total length body whorl length Figure 2: Showing the measurements taken. bodywhorl length to total length from what might For example, from the data accumulated, one would expect a Conus ximenes with a maximum length of 42 mm. to have a bodywhorl length of about 35 mm. and a spire height of 7 mm., whereas, with a dropped shoulder, the bodywhorl length may be only 32 mm. and the height of the spire 10 mm. be considered a prototypic proportion. To proceed with the statistical operations, it was necessary to equalize the sample sizes. Four hundred six were selected from the Conus perplexus data by means of a random number table. As a first step the following calculations were made: 1. The proportion of spire height to total length was expressedas percent by dividing bodywhorl length by total length (= percent ratio). 2. An Obesity Index was determined by divid- ing length by width and multiplying by 100. For these two sets of figures and for the apical angle, histograms were plotted for the 812 shells, without regard to division into spe- cies. Each histogram showed a bimodal curve, indicating the possibility of two distinct groups. Figure 4 reproduces the histogram for Obesity Index. normal juncture Figure 3: Conus ximenes Gray, 1839. Dropped Shoulder. (compare with Figure 2) Next, histograms were plotted for each set of figures on the basis of the original separa- tion into species made by collector or curator. In each case there was a central overlap that was too extensive to provide any line of demar- cation between the two groups, and, for the per- cent ratio and apical angle, the range of Conus ximenes encompassed that of C. perplexus. As an example, the histogram for Obesity Index is given in Figure 5. 40 50 Figure 4: Histogram of Obesity Index of 812 Shells recorded without regard as to species. Page 26 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 | @ Conus perplexus Conus ximenes 60 LLLLLLLLLLA LLL La LLL CLL LLL LLL Zi LLL LLL LL Li N N N N N N \ N N N N N N N N N N N. ULL ZZ Figure 5: Histogram of Obesity Index of 812 Shells, recorded separately for the two species. Scatter diagrams were then drawn, corre- lating each set of figures with length. On the diagrams for the apical angles and for the per- cent ratio, the overlap remained too great for any separation. The diagram for Obesity Index, however, showed a clearer gap between the two groups. I then prepared a correlation diagram for the 812 shells (406 of each species) based simply upon length and width. This diagram showed practically no overlap, and the two es- timated regression lines seemed distinct enough to serve as a basis for further statistical tests. The length-width measurements were then subjected to multiple regression analysis, with width as the dependent variable, on the CDC 1604 computer of Scripps Institution of Oceano- The following sta- graphy (Dr. E. W. Fager). tistics were obtained. Conus xtmenes Conus perplexus significant at: <0.0001 < 0.0001 L 40.16 22.25 19.12 12.31 % variation in width accounted for by length 98.98 95s2) mean value of discriminant function 7.66 1.32 Since the shells had been divided into the two categories, it was possible to calculate a discriminant function (Mather, 1951, pp. 152- 159) from the regression coefficient and the variances obtained in the analysis. This may be approximately expressed by: Discriminant Function = X = Length - 1.7 (Width) Racial Difference = Cin SCupys 7.66 - 1.32 = 6.34 Discriminant Point = Xe a +$Racial Difference = 1.32 +3.17 = 4.49 x The discriminant function is applied in the following manner: any specimen for which X (length minus 1.7 times width) is greater than the discriminant point (4.49) may be assigned to Conus ximenes; specimens with a value of X below 4.49 are assignable to C. perplexus. The probability of misclassification is giv- en by the P associated with t (809 df) = 2.046 (p = less than 0.025). The discriminant function is therefore a very good basis for classifica- tion. Results Both sets of cones mentioned above (those taken on adjacent sandbars and the two that were found side by side) prove, by the applica- tion of this function, to have been correctly as- signed to the two separate groups. In addition to the statistical information, examination of these 1 448 cones has revealed one shell characteristic that is almost fool- proof for the visual separation of Conus per- plexus and C. ximenes, i.e., the configuration of the posterior notch at the top of the body- whorl as it diverges from the spire to form the outer lip. It is easily recognizable when look- ing directly down at the spire (Figure 6a) or straight at the lip edge of the bodywhorl (Figure 6b). In Conus perplexus the line formed by the notch is recurved (Figures 6a, 6b). In C. xi- menes, in contrast, the line is practically straight and usually oblique (Figures 6c, 6d). Although here, too, C. ximenes is exceedingly variable, careful inspection should eliminate confusion between its random curvature and the definite arcs of the notch in C. perplexus. I be- lieve that departure from a straight, oblique line in C. ximenes is a deviation from the norm as, in the 406 specimens examined, it was ac- companied by evidence of aberration or injury in every case. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 27 Figure 6: Illustrating Shell Differences for the two species, Conus perplexus SowERBY, 1875 and C. ximenes GRAY, 1839. a: apical view, b: lip of Conus perplexus; c: apical view, d: lip of Conus ximenes. Discussion Two other taxonomic questions have arisen from examination of these collections. One is the need for investigation of the validity for the Gulf of California of the taxon Conus mahogani (considered by some authors a race or variety or subspecies, C. ximenes mahogani Reeve, 1843). Shells which were labelled C. mahogani are not included in this survey, although most of them vary only slightly, if at all, in either appearance or measurements from C. ximenes. It is possible that they have been misidentified and should be reclassified as C, ximenes, At the same time there are a few speci- mens from Panama, labelled Conus mahogani, which are entirely different in shape and pro- portion, color and pattern, from any of the Gulf specimens so identified. Therefore, I suggest that this taxon needs revision. However, this problem is beyond the scope of my studies. In scrutinizing these collections it has be- come apparent that there may be still a third Species in this complex. About a dozen speci- mens, labelled Conus perplexus in some collec- tions and C. ximenes in others but differing from C. perplexus and C. ximenes at least as much as those two differ from each other, have come to light. A re-examination of these spe- cimens and a search for more are indicated. Handling, hunting, observing, and examining so large a number of specimens could hardly fail to raise many questions unrelated to the taxonomic issue. For instance, it is interesting to conjecture why Conus ximenes is so subject to aberrations in spire shape. Does this result from damage occurring when the outer lip of the shell is being laid down and is very thin? Of what significance is the fact that, with the exception of the large sampling from Kino Bay, which contains many atypical specimens, there is rarely any deviation from the normal spire shape in C. perplexus? Might these phenomena indicate a difference in the manner or rate of growth of these species? I intend to continue observing these animals in the field and in the aquarium, Both species show a surprisingly small size range in the samplings I have collected in 1961 and 1962. There is no continuous distribu- tion in length, and juveniles are extremely difficult to find. While the data which I am ac- cumulating may not solve these puzzles, they do suggest the possibility of a measure of growth rate. I also hope to begin a study of the radulae and anatomy of these cones. Acknowledgment I wish to express my grateful appreciation to Dr. Eric G. Barham and Dr. David Shepard of San Diego State College for the time and the guidance they have given me; to Drs. E. W. Fager and John MacGowan of Scripps Institution of Oceanography for advice and encouragement; to the museums and individuals who have made specimens available to me; to Mr. Emery Chace for aid with the literature; and to Alan, Lori, and Arthur Wolfson for assistance in col- lecting specimens. Summary The statistical tests reported here have supplied a means of distinguishing between Conus perplexus Sowerby, 1857, and C. ximenes Gray, 1839, that is reliable 97.5 times out of 100. A visual diagnostic feature has also been described. This study has demonstrated statistically what conchologists have always in- Page 28 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 stinctively felt: that there actually are two pop- ulations of cones living side by side in the Gulf of California which, in spite of extremely non- specific characters and habitat, comprise two Objectively definable groups. Literature Cited Dall, William Healey 1910. Summary of the shells of the genus Conus from the Pacific coast of America in the U. S. National Museum. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 38 (1741): 217-228. Hanna, G Dallas, & A. M. Strong 1949. West American mollusks of the genus Conus. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., 4th Ser., 26 (9): 247-322; pls. 5-10; 4 textfigs. Hill, Howard R. 1959. The cone shells of tropical west America, Veliger 2 (4): 30-32. Keen, A. Myra. 1958. Sea shells of tropical west America; marine mollusks from Lower California to Colombia, Stanford, Calif,, Stanford Univ. Press; xi + 624 pp., illust. Mather, Kurt 1951. Statistical analysis in biology London, Methuen & Co., Ltd. The A New Land Snail from the Klamath Mountains, California (Mollusca : Pulmonata : Polygyridae) BY ROBERT R. TALMADGE Willow Creek, Calilornia (Plate 5) In the fall of 1956, I discovered acciden- tally an unusual land snail belonging to the genus Vespericola. Because of winter storms and high water, no additional specimens were found until late summer of 1957. In subsequent sum- mers more specimens of this uncommon snail were collected, and more detailed information on its range and ecology was added. Unfortu- nately, all of this was lost in a fire in 1960. Further collecting since has replaced the loss, and at the present time there are enough speci- mens on hand for a critical review. A detailed study indicates the advisability of describing this rare snail as a new species. Vespericola karokorum TALMADGE, spec. nov. Description of Holotype An adult specimen with shell of fairly large size for the genus, low-spired, imperforate except for a small umbilical chink, with a mod- erately reflected lip and a well developed cres- centic, slightly arcuate parietal tooth. The pale brown or tan colored periostracum is thin and exhibits a matte surface which, under magnifi- cation of x20, consists of extremely fine trans- verse wrinkles, in some places broken up into minute granules. Major characteristic orna- mentation is the prominent, evenly and widely spaced, scimitar—shaped, fine pointed perios- tracal hairs, apparently not arranged in any definite geometric order and having their bases flattened in the direction of growth of the shell. Base of lip imperceptibly notched and slightly flared over the umbilical region, leaving a tiny umbilical pit not visible from a direct basal view. Total whorls nearly 6, well rounded, with a well impressed suture. The reflected lip is pale brown and has a form similar to other spe- cies in the genus. Maximum diameter, 16.2; minimum diameter, 13.6; height, 8.9 mm. Explanation of Plate 5 Holotype of Vespericola karokorum TALMADGE, spec. nov. Figure 1. Dorsal aspect. Figure 2. Ventral aspect. Figure 3. Lateral aspect. THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 1 [TaLmapcE] Plate 5 Figure 2 G Dattas Hanna, photo. { y a y : a PG a ; U 2 ‘ ‘ { j a i 4 Me i ; : - - iY rt yw =i) iY iy =>, i Ly = fe : 7 } i 5 = i > : 7? “ e § Vol. 5; No. 1 Type Locality Sawmill Gulch, a narrow fissure on the north side of the Klamath River, on the Ishi Pishi Road, 2.0 miles east of the Orleans Rang- er Station, Humboldt County, California. Col- lected by R. R. Talmadge, July 1961. Other localities include similar fissures on the Ishi Pishi Road from a point 1.5 to 2.5 miles east of Orleans, Humboldt County, California. Distribution of Specimens Holotype in the California Academy of Sci- ences, Paleontology Type Collection No. 12 380. Three paratypes in the same collection, Nos. 12 381, 12 382, and 12 383, Other paratypes to be deposited in the type collections of the United States National Museum, the Academy of Natu- ral Sciences of Philadelphia, the Museum of Comparative Zoology (Cambridge), the Chicago Natural History Museum, the San Diego Society of Natural History, Stanford University, and various private collections. The name is derived from the local tribe of Indians inhabiting the central Klamath River area: Karok, Comments It is astonishing to find a new and well de- fined species of the genus Vespericola in an area hitherto considered to be the particular province of species with densely set, short- haired periostracum represented by V. mega- soma (Dall in Pilsbry), V. megasoma euthales (Berry), and the smaller V. eritrichius (Berry). Vespericola karokorum is easily separable from each of these because of the prominent, long, curved, sparsely set hairs, strong parietal tooth, depressed form, and lack of an open um- bilicus. One might expect it to be more nearly related to the wide ranging V. columbiana pilosa (Henderson) (Alaska to Central California), but this is invariably narrowly umbilicate, higher spired, more densely pilose with shorter hairs, and with considerable variability in the pres- ence or absence of a parietal tooth and in its strength when present. The new species has the depressed form of the little known V. columbi- ana depressa (Pilsbry & Henderson) from the Dalles, Oregon, but this is a toothless form covered with rather densely set short hairs. Vespericola pinicola (Berry) from Monterey County, California, is another more hairy, toothless species with a higher spire. Vesperi- THE VELIGER eee eens shi wena Uae me |, BABE RD Page 29 cola karokorum is more like V. amigera (Ancey) from the Santa Cruz Mountains of California in general aspects, including size, but the latter has a densely pilose periostracum that is totally different. Besides, these two central Califor- nia species are far removed in range, and no intergrades with the northern California spe- cies are known to exist. Adult specimens of V. karokorum are constant in primary character- istics and exhibit little in the way of individual variations. The ecological niche of Vespericola karo- korum is notable. In the Klamath Mountains of northern California other Vespericola species may usually be found in the moist shaded areas in the smaller "V" canyons of tributary streams. They prefer the mossy rocks and the cover offered by accumulated debris along the canyon bottoms, but on occasions they are found in exposed locations under damp logs. In con- trast, V. karokorum seems to prefer only the deepest, narrowest, fissure-like gorges, never exposed habitats; they are always found ex- tremely close to water, often so close that the apex of the shell is wet as they cling to the un- derside of clean-washed rocks. They seem never to come out into the open, even on rainy or cloudy days, possible evidence that the spe- cies is entirely nocturnal. This remains to be verified, but hunting by night in the areas where these snails live is liable to be hazardous. So far, specimens have been found along what may be termed the ‘outside or current" side of a major bend in the Klamath River. The fissures and deep narrow canyons bordering the river are separated both upstream and down by steep slopes or cliffs of schist that become ex- tremely dry in summer. Any snails washed into the river from small tributary streams during heavy run-off would be tossed back onto the same side of the river within a short distance. Thus, the probabilities of finding ecologically suitable niches where they would be likely to survive are slim indeed, and this situation may effectively limit the distribution of the species by means of this fairly common method of dis- persion. Literature Cited Pilsbry, Henry A. 1940. Land Mollusca of North America (north of Mex- ico). Acad, Nat. Sci, Philadelphia Monogr. No. 3, Vol. 2, pt. 2: 892-912; figs. 512-521. Page 30 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 Studies on Frosaria lamarckiu Gray (Gastropoda) BY FLA & M. SCHILDER University of Halle (Saale), Germany and RONALD STEWART BENTON Mombasa, Kenya {Mr. Benton collected all Erosaria lamarckii from Port Reitz, described the locality and forwarded the statistical data of 179 specimens to the Schilders who added the data of another 105 specimens from Port Reitz and of 269 from other localities, and investigated the results statistically. } There are two geographical races of Ero- saria lamarckii Gray: the Indian E. 1. redimita Melvill (abbreviated ''I'' in this paper) from Pe- nang to Karachi, the Seychelles, and Mauritius, from Natal to Ras Ngomeni in Kenya; in Mada- gascar both races seem to occur (see Schilder, 1938). Recently, we have examined a large pop- ulation living at Port Reitz near Mombasa, Kenya, which seems to be intermediate in some respects (abbreviated ''R''). Port Reitz is named after Lieutenant Reitz of the Royal Navy who died in Mombasa as com- mandant of the island in 1825. It is merely an extension of Mombasa's main harbour, Kilindini, and is used as an anchorage for ocean-going vessels. The Erosaria lamarckii lamarckii have been found in two restricted areas on the shores of Port Reitz, namely, at an unnamed place on the north shore and at Ras Kigangone, or Flora Point, on the south shore. The rise and fall of the tide in these waters attains a maximum of 13 feet, and all cowries have only been found at very low spring tides. The water has always been very dirty and opaque. On the north shore at low tide the sand of the beach gives way to thick black mud inter- spersed here and there with areas of mud- covered rock on which are found broken frag- ments of rock and weeds. It is in these areas that hundreds of Erosaria lamarckii lamarckii were found, usually partially hidden but always to some extent exposed to the unnatural ele- ments In the same place another cowrie, Monetaria moneta (Lin- of sun, rain, and wind. naeus, 1758), was very abundant, and E. erosa (Linnaeus, 1758), E. helvola (Linnaeus, 1758), and Erronea caurica (Linnaeus, 1758) were com- mon, but Palmadusta diluculum (Reeve, 1845) [and one specimen of P, ziczac (Linnaeus, 1758)] were rare, The conditions at Flora Point on the south- ern shore appear to be the same as on the northern, but here Adusta onyx (Linnaeus, 1758) predominated over Erosaria l. lamarckii; Er- ronea caurica was quite common; and Erosaria erosa occurred occasionally; but no Monetaria moneta nor Palmadusta diluculum were found. No explanation can be given for the complete absence of M. moneta nor for the apparent transposition of the relative frequencies of E.1, lamarckii and A. onyx between the two localities which are less than a mile apart. The collect- ing ground on the south shore is closer to the actual harbour at Kilindini and therefore re- ceives more refuse from the ships. Deepwater berths have recently been constructed and opened to shipping, and one could be inclined to the belief that pollution of the water may be re- sponsible for the present absence of cowries, which is hoped to be temporary only. Besides, the disturbance of the creek-bed by dredging has caused the collecting areas to be coated with a blanket of weed not hitherto seen. The following characters of shells have been investigated in this study: L =the length of the shell, measured in tenths of a millimeter, reduced to mm., and tabled in classes the indicated means of which differ by 3 mm. (e.g., 18= 16.5 to 19.5 mm.). BL = the maximum breadth, expressed in percent of the length. DL, DC = the closeness of the labial and Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 31 columellar teeth respectively, expressed by letters (earlier letters of the alphabet indicate less numerous teeth than later letters; see Schilder, 1958). DF =the number of real denticles on the inner border of the fossula. Co = the color of the dorsum expressed by two letters, the first of which indicates the prevalent shade. As in previous papers, we have distinguished: a = white; b = brown; f = ful- vous; g = grey; l = orange; n = black; v = green (see Schilder, 1952). In summarizing, the prev- alent color has been considered of double the value of the accessory shade. Oc = the development of lilac grey ocelli within the white dorsal spots (the lateral ones excluded), expressed by the letters: i = absent; v = pale or scarce; and n = well developed (see Schilder, 1952). In the tables the sign ''0"’ indicates rare frequency in less than 0.5 percent, whereas the sign ''-"' indicates total absence. LENGTH The following table illustrates the variation in size, expressed in classes of 3 mm. (see above); the figures indicate percent of 143 I (in- cluding the data published in the diagram by Griffiths, 1956), 284 R, and 126 A. 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 eee eV ON NA Maer Re UO nye yes en oR Reo On et Mbit 86°27) 14 6 81 Oe ES ee pe To By Ne eb NG) 20) ey 2! The exact means are: I = 30.6; R= 31.9; and A=38.6 mm. The difference between I and A is mathematically significant, but R is simi- lar to I instead of to A as one would expect on the basis of geographical reasons. The median length in large areas is as follows: No. I mm. No. A mm, 66 Penang 29 16 Natal 39 (Griffiths) 23 Mozambique 37 25 Mergui — 34 46 No locality 40 Bombay 30 Zanzibar, 39 19 No locality 30 etc. 28 Karachi 31 11 Madagascar 35 5 Lemuria 30 The 28 I shells from Karachi were erroneously credited to Aden by Schlesch (see Schilder, 1931). The medians of I (29 to 34) distinctly differ from those of A (37 to 40), the dwarf A of Mada- gascar excluded. BREADTH The relative breadth varies considerably. The mean and the range (in brackets) of 90 per- cent of the least unusual shells (see Schilder, 1961) are as follows: I = 65.9 (60-71) R = 67.6 (62-73) A = 64.4 (59-70) Therefore, the average shells of R seem to be broader than both I and A. But there is a distinct correlation between length and relative breadth, as larger shells usually are more slender than small shells, so that the mean in- dex BL of shells of 25 30 35 40 mm. WB, sha IIs 70 66 63 59 in R: 73 OS) 05 2 in A: = 42 O8\ O44, These rough figures prove R to be intermediate between I and A with regard to its relative breadth. DENTITION There is no difference between I and A with regard to the closeness of the teeth on both lips, and R also agrees with both. The median of labial:columellar teeth is in each group 1:k, the range of 90 percent of 441 shells is (i-n):(h-m). FOSSULA The number of the fossular denticles varies from 1 to 5; the average number and the range (in brackets) of 90 percent of the shells are as follows: I = 2.0 (1-3) R= Dai les) A = 2.8 (2-5) But as larger shells show, on an average, more denticles than smaller shells of the same race, these figures exaggerate the larger figure in A: according to the regression line one must ex- pect in A of a length comparable to I and R (32 mm.) at most 2.5 fossular denticles, so that the general increase from I over R to A becomes less distinct. COLOR The occurrence of the various shades ex- plained above is as follows (expressed in per- Page 32 cent of 69 I, 272 R, and 78 A): a Vv fy 1 b s g n I 0O 14 64 2 14 5 0 - R 0O 8 24 1 57 7 2 A 0 8 23 1 56 6 5 1 There is a striking similarity of R to A, whereas I is quite different: the paler shades (f, v,a) amount to less than one-third only in A and R, but to more than three-quarters in I. OCELLATION The distribution of the three varieties in dorsal markings, called i:v:n, has been ex- pressed in percent of 69 I, 272 R, and 78 A, as follows: I = 94:4:2 R = 32:28:40 A = 5:23:72 Therefore, I and A are contrary, and R evidently is intermediate between the white spotted I and the ocellated A. Summary There is a distinct statistical difference between the eastern Erosaria 1. redimita (I) and the western E. 1. lamarckii (A) concerning the length of the shells, the general color of their dorsum, and the ocellation of the white dorsal spots; the differences in the relative breadth and in the denticulation of the fossula are less obvious, and in the closeness of the teeth along the aperture there is no difference at all. The population living in an isolated area at Port Reitz near Mombasa, i.e., on the northern limit of the East African Erosaria l. lamarckii, agrees with the latter in the brown dorsal color only; its size and fossula rather agree withE. l, redimita, which spreads from Malacca to the Seychelles not too far from the Kenya coast, so that one could suspect genetical influence; the THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 breadth and the dorsal markings are interme- diate. Therefore, the population of Port Reitz is exactly intermediate between the widely dis- tributed Indian and African races, both geo- graphically and morphologically. The few shells coming from Madagascar seem to connect the two races in another way. APPENDIX | Among 75 specimens from Port Reitz which were examined also anatomically, there were 34 females and 41 males (sex ratio: females = 45 percent), The average length of the shells, the animal of which could be examined, is 32.68 mm. in females and 31.95 mm. in males; the relative breadth is 68.47 and 67.46, respective- ly. Therefore, the females seem to be slightly larger and broader (especially in view of the fact that larger shells generally are more slen- der); but the difference is by no means signifi- cant mathematically. In the other characters there is evidently no sexual difference at all. The radula will be discussed in another paper. Literature Cited Griffiths, R. J. 1956. Cypraea in north-west Malaya. Jour. of Conch. 24: 85-90. Schilder, Franz Alfred ; 1958. Die Bezeichnung der Zahndichte der Cypraeacea. Arch. Molluskenkunde 87 (1-3): 77-80. a 1961. Another statistical study in size of cowries, The Veliger 4 (2): 107-112. Schilder, Franz Alfred, & Maria Schilder 1938. Prodrome of amonograph on living Cypraeidae. Proc. Mal. Soc. Lond., 23 (3): 119-231; 16 textfigs. a a ‘ 1952. Ph. Dautzenberg's collection of Cypraeidae. Mém. Inst. Roy. Sci. Nat. Belg., 2nd. ser., No. 45: 1-243; pls. 1-4. Schilder, Maria, & Franz Alfred Schilder 1931. Cypraeidés de la C6te d'Aden. France 56: 211-217. Bull. Soc. Zool, Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 33 A New Stiliger and a New Corambella (Mollusca : Opisthobranchia) from the Northwestern Pacific BY JAMES R. LANCE Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California, La Jolla, California (Plate 6; 10 Textfigures) The opisthobranch fauna of the Pacific Coast of North America includes a large number of species readily identified in the living state by their diversity of external morphological fea- tures and spectacular coloration. On the other hand, a not insignificant number of new species has been collected from this area, species which are so inconspicuous as to be only accidentally detected. While some of these unobtrusive forms are rare, or at best occur sporadically in conservative numbers, a few others form enormous annual populations in their respective habitats. The present paper is a result of investiga- _ tions carried out on twonew, inconspicuous species which are both extremely abundant, confined to entirely different habitats, and both represent genera new to the northwestern Paci- fic Coast. I amvery grateful to the Scripps Institution of Oceanography, Marine Life Research Pro- gram, for providing funds for the color plate, and to Dr. and Mrs. G Dallas Hanna of the Cal- ifornia Academy of Sciences for its expert exe- cution. It should be noted that both animals have been photographed non in situ in order to provide contrasting background. SACOGLOSSA Elysiacea HERMAEIDAE Stiliger fuscovittata LANCE, spec. nov. (Plate 6, Upper Figure; Textfigures 1 to 5) Many individuals of this species have been collected during every season over a period of several years. During the autumn and winter months they are rare; in the spring and summer large numbers may be found in the appropriate biotope. The largest individual measured was 10.2 mm. long and 1.1 mm. broad; the smallest specimen measured 1.7 mm. long and 0.2 mm. broad. individuals at the height of the spawning season is 7.6 mm. in length and 0.85 mm. in width. The holotype, upon which this description is based, was 8.0 mm. long and 0.9 mm. broad. All measurements given are for actively crawl- ing animals. The average size of sexually mature Figure 1: Stiliger fuscovittata LANCE, spec. nov. Dorsal view of living animal . rhinophore . pigmented area . eye spot anus . genital papilla . pericardial prominence . ceras . cutaneous gland ~ TRMmo7O0 OP Page 34 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 oannm =r] Figure 2: Stiliger fuscovittata LANCE, spec. nov. Antero-ventral view of living animal . rhinophore . oral lobe . mouth . anterior foot margin . genital papilla . side of body mr ao oT Pp The body in general shape is eolidiform, broadest in front, and tapering to an elongated, bluntly rounded tail (Textfig. 1). In some indi- viduals the tail may appear considerably shorter due to the presence of a fewsmall cerata occur- ring almost to the tip. The backis rounded, not at all marked off from the vertical sides of the body. At its anterior margin, the foot is as broad as the body, becoming progressively narrowed posteriorly. There are neither foot tentacles nor a median notch (Textfig. 2). In its ventral aspect, the head consists of two large, incon- spicuous lobes with the mouth appearing in the middle as a longitudinal slit. The cerata are arranged in two single series along either side of the back near its lateral edges. Theyariseat the antero-lateral margins of the pericardial prominence and run posterior- ly, alternating or not. Considerable variation in size, shape and number occurs between one individual andanother. Although detailed obser - vations on large numbers of specimens have been made, the irregular alternation of the high- ly deciduous cerata is without pattern and is undoubtedly a result of varying stages of ceratal The holotype, which represents the typical condition, has nine in the left row and tenin the right. The liver is brown, slender, rope-like and runs under the right and left rows of cerata. Each ceras receives a conspicuous unbranched diverticulum not quite reaching the tip. Several large cutaneous glands occur most abundantly in the middle and distal portions of regeneration. most cerata, and appear as conspicuous white spots. Similar but smaller glands are abundant on the anterior portion of the sides of the body. The rhinophores arenon-retractile, smooth and taper to blunt tips. They are neither auri- culatenor flattened. Each arises about half way up the sloping antero-lateral end of the body and points obliquely forward in life. The conspicuous blackeye spots are present immediately behind the rhinophores in regions free of epidermal pigment. In some individuals the eye spots border pigmented areas, but in no instance do they occur beneath such areas. The anus is located ona slightly elevated papilla on the mid-dorsal line immediately posterior to the eye spots. This position is considerably more anterior than that reported for other members of the genus. The genital papilla is prominent in living individuals and occurs slightly poster- ior to the anus about half way up the right side of the body. In life, the aperture faces some- what posteriorly. The radula consists of seven teeth in the ascending, 23 in the descending limb and about four undifferentiated elements in the spiral as- cus (Textfig. 3). Little variation in teeth num- ber inseveral individuals examined was obseryv- ed. The figured radulais from a paratype of equal size in order toretain the holotype intact. Figure 3: Stiliger fuscovittata LANCE, spec. nov. Radula, x 128 THE VELIGER, Val. 5, No. 1 [Lance] Plate 6 Corambella steinbergae LANCE, spec. nov. Kodachromes by James R. Lance H } i 4 4 Bis = 7 oS, $ 1: y ~~ i 2 { ( a Sie yoy z k 1 1 { " a >. P ’ cee i a a5: Og pn: . 1 On Vol. 5; No. 1 The body is nearly transparent and many of the internal organs may easily be observed without clearing. The reddish-brown pigmenta- tion varies between individuals in intensity, amount and pattern but not in basic color. The most constant feature of the pattern is two stripes, each of which arises about one third of the distance from the distal end of the rhino- phore, runs to its base, and proceeds posteri- orly on the back for a short distance, flanking the eye spot. Numerous streaks and splotches occur over the rest of the body (except on the foot sole which is colorless), and toa lesser degree on the cerata. As mentioned above, the cutaneous glands of the cerata form conspicuous white spots. Microscopic examination of the epidermis in the pigmented region revéals that the pigment flecks are gathered into a mosaic- like pattern (Textfig. 4). A dingy pale yellow color often occurs on the tip of the tail, distal portion of the rhinophores, and median region of the mouth lobes. This species has been collected only in San Diego and Mission Bays, where it feeds exclu- sively on the red alga Polysiphonia pacifica Hollenberg (1942)(identified by Mr. David Chap- man of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography), which is common on pilings and boat landings. Gonor (1961, pp. 86 and 95) has summarized the observations of several authors concerning the specificity of different species of Sacoglossa to one or a fewclosely related species of algae. Thus it is not surprising to find the present Stiliger occurring exclusively on P. pacifica. The egg capsules are thick, sausage shaped, exhibit considerable variation in length and amount of spiraling, and layed among the algal mass (Textfig. 5). The height of spawning is reached during May to July. The specific name fuscovittata was chosen to call attention to the brownish streakings which constitutes the principal coloration of this species. Figure 4: Stiliger fuscovittata LANCE, spec. nov. Detail of pattern in pigmented area, x 212 THE VELIGER Page 35 Figure 5: Stiliger fuscovittata LANCE, spec. nov. Egg capsule in situ Type locality: Mission Bay, San Diego, Ca- lifornia; on Polysiphonia pacifica Hollenberg, 19A2ee icatqesem 42 luong- milled 1 We The holotype is deposited at the California Academy of Sciences, where it is registered as Paleo. Type Coll. No. 12403; it will be incor- poratedintothe Frank Mace MacFarland Memo- rial Collection of Nudibranchs. NUDIBRANCHIA Doridacea EUDORIDACEA Phanerobranchia SUCTORIA CORAMBIDAE Corambella steinbergae LANCE, spec. nov. (Plate 6, Lower Figure; Textfigures 6 to 10) Synonymy: Corambella spec., STEINBERG, 1960; Corambella spec., LANCE, 1961. Numerically, this kelp-inhabiting species is one of the most abundant nudibranchs along the coast of southern California, and, if local pop- ulation sizeis typical, it must occur in enormous numbers throughout its entire range. Sixty- eight individuals have been counted from a single kelp frond during the height of its spawn- ing season. The largest individual measuredwas 8.2 mm. long and 5.1 mm. wide. During the spawn- ing season minute individuals measuring only 0.12 mm. in length are commonly observed Page 36 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 Figure 6: Corambella steinbergae LANCE, spec. nov. Dorsal view of living animal . oral tentacle . rhinophore . rhinophore sheath . hotum . posterior gill oOn0 Oo fp when small pieces of kelp are examined under a dissecting microscope. These small specimens represent that portion of the population which has only recently metamorphosed. Whencrawl- ing, the holotype was 5.3 mm. long and 3.2 mm. wide, which is average for a sexually mature individual. The general body form is oval, disc shaped and flattened when the animal is stationary, but somewhat more elongate and broader behind than in front when moving (Textfig. 6). The notum is broad, only slightly arched in the middle of the body, and flat and thin where it projects well beyond the foot margins. As in other members of the genus, its border is entire, not notched. A deciduous cuticle, similar to that described for other Corambidae occurs as the outer notal layer (see p. 9 in MacFarland and O'Donoghue, A new species of Corambe from the Pacific Coast of North America. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. ser. 4, 18(1): 1-27, 1929). The heart is located about two thirds of the way back on the midline of the body. The footis oval, rounded posteriorly, never extending beyond the lateral notal margins, and in some individuals is entire along the anterior edge (Textfig. 7). In other specimens an emar- gination is present, but never so pronounced as Figure 7: Corambella steinbergae LANCE, spec. nov. Ventral view of living animal in Corambe pacifica MacFarland & O'Donoghue, 1929. The presence or absence of a foot notch cannot be a specific characteristic since it occurs in varying degree. The branchiae are posterior, attached to the underside of the notum at the juncture between the notum and the foot; they number 3 to 6 on either side of the median line in typical indivi- duals. The two large posterior gills and the Figure 8: Corambella steinbergae LANCE, spec. nov. Detail of large gill Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 37 oral tentacles project beyond the notal margin when the animal is crawling. The anus lies be- tween the two most posterior large gills. The remainder progressively decrease in size out- ward. Each of the largest gills consists of a flattened, horizontally-oriented central element which gives rise to about 6 vertically directed secondary lamellae on either side (Textfig. 8). The smaller gills have fewer secondary lamel- lae. The retractile rhinophores are 1.2 mm. in length, smooth, and taper toa blunt point dis- tally. The sheaths have a smooth margin and are about one quarter the length of the rhino- phore. ~The penis is located about a third of the way back on the right side of the body. When fully extended in a living individual it is long, possesses a distal sharp constriction followed by a flared portion and has a flat, not tapering tip (Textfig. 9). These features are not evident in preserved specimens. The radula has the formula: 41-52 x 5.1.0.1.5 (Textfig. 10). The first lateral is the largest and bears 5 to 7 small denticles on its inner side. The fol- lowing 4 laterals decrease in size outward and are devoid of denticles. The color and patternvery closely resemble Corambe pacifica and consist of anearly trans- parent body overlaid with a reticulation of opaque white lines very closely approximating the ecto- cysts of the bryozoan colonies upon which it is found. Occurring within the boundaries of many of the cells formed by the white lines are irreg- ular splotches of rust-red with darker margins. The soft parts of each bryozoan zooid also possess a central spot of similar color. Thus the nudibranch is almost indistinguishable from its background. Figure 9: Corambella steinbergae LANCE, spec. nov. Penis PADDY Corambella steinbergae LANCE, spec. nov. Radula a. first lateral tooth b. outermost lateral tooth Figure 10: Type locality: Offshore kelp canopies, San Diego, California. Lat. 32°40'N, Long. 117° 14' Ww. The species name steinbergae was chosen to honor Miss Joan E, Steinberg who first not- iced the specific characters separating it from Corambe pacifica, and who has made valuable contributions to our knowledge of opisthobranchs from the Pacific. The holotype is registered as Paleo. Type Coll, No. 12'404 at the California Academy of Sciences. It will be incorporated into the Frank Mace MacFarland Memorial Collection of Nudi- branchs. Remarks: The genera Corambe and Coram- bella are currently separated by the presence of a posterior notal notch in the former, while the margin is entire in the latter. This single characteristic clearly separates the two sym- patric Pacific Coast genera. In addition, the present species is easily distinguished from Corambe pacifica by its long, smooth rhino- phores, possession of few gills, and well devel- oped head with long oral tentacles extending be- yond the notal margin. It differs from all other described species of Corambella by its long, smooth rhinophores. The branchial structure of the present species, however, shows closer affinity to Corambe pacifica than to the other 3 known species of the genus. Corambella bara- tariae Harry (1953), C. depressa Balch (1899), and C. carambola Marcus (1955) allhave simple, overlapping, plate-like gill lamellae. Page 38 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 The following species have been assigned to Corambella: 1. Corambella depressa Balch, 1899 Cold Spring Harbor, LongIsland, New York. Under stones on which Fucus was growing. 2. Corambella baratariae Harry, 1953 Barataria Bay, Grande Isle, Louisiana. On oyster beds(Crassostrea virginica) at depths of about five feet. 3. Corambella carambola Marcus, 1955 Island of Sao Sebastao, State of Sao Paulo, Brasil. On bryozoa growing on algae (Pa- dina) on stones in the upper littoral zone. 4. Corambella steinbergae Lance, spec. nov. Point Eugenia, Baja California, Mexico, to Vancouver Island, British Columbia. On offshore kelp fronds where it feeds on bry- o0zoa (Membranipora serrilamella). The systematic positionof the following species is uncertain, but it seems likely that subsequent examination will establish their af- finity with Corambella as it is currently defined: 1. Doridella obscura Verrill, 1873 Long Island Sound, New York, to Great Egg Harbor, New Jersey. At low water, under stones, and to 4 to 5 fathoms, 2. Corambe batava Kerbert, 1873 Netherlands. Literature Cited Balch, F. N. 1899, List of marine mollusca of Coldspring Harbour, Long Island, etc. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. 29 (7): 133-162. Gonor, Jefferson J. 1961. Observations onthe biology of Hermaeina smithi, a sacoglossan Opisthobranch from the west coast of North America. The Veliger 4 (2): 85-98; figs. 1 to 13. Harry, H. W. 1953. Corambella baratariae, a new species of Nudi- branch from the coast of Louisiana. Occ. Pap. Marine Lab, Louisiana State Univ. 8: 1-9. Hollenberg, J. 1942. An account of the species of Polysiphonia on the Pacific coast of North America. I. Oligosiphonia . Amer. Jour. Bot. 29: 772. Kerbert, C. 1886. Over het geslacht Corambe, Bergh. Tijdschr. Nederland. Dierkund. Vereen., 2nd. ser., D. 1, AflL 2: 3-6. Lance, James R. 1961. A distributional list of Southern California Opis- thobranchs. The Veliger 4 (2): 64-69. Marcus, Ernst 1955. Opisthobranchia from Brazil. Bol. Fac. Fil. Cien. Letr., Univ. S40 Paulo, Zoologia 20: 89-262, Steinberg, Joan E. 1960. Rare and little known opisthobranch mollusks from the west coast of North America. The Ve- liger 3 (2): 49. Verrill, A. E. 1873. Report upon the invertebrate animals of Vine- yard Sound and adjacent waters. Rept. U. S. Com. Fish & Fisheries 1871-1872, Washington; 664 pp. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 39 A Checklist of Mollusks for Puertecitos, Baja California, Mexico BY HELEN DUSHANE Conchological Club of Southern California, Los Angeles 7, California (1 Textfigure) Introduction Puertecitos on the west shore of the Gulf of California is 180 miles south of the International Boundary, at Latitude 30° 25'N., Longitude 114° 39'W.. It nestles between low, rocky promon- tories, and at each low tide the great rush of tidal bore drains away some 18 to 20 feet of water, leaving a rocky rubble area at one's feet and, beyond that, a muddy sand flat broken by runnels and drainage channels. The variety of molluscan life here includes Tagelus, Dosinia, Chione, plus Terebra and Oliva. On the coral- line shelf are Trigonostoma and Strombina, while Mitra, Anachis, and various amphineurans hide under the boulders. The outer strand, at extreme low tide, offers such rarities as Tere- bra bridgesi and Clavus ianthe, while the rubble at the foot of the promontories shields Cypraea annettae, Trivia solandri, Lima orbignyi, and L. pacifica. This paper is intended to supply collectors with a working list and does not presume to be all-inclusive. The specimens include those tak- en by active collectors in an area of about five miles north to about five miles south of the tiny settlement of Puertecitos, Systematic Account In this list the following format is adopted: 1, The species number given by Keen (1958) and the scientific name. 2. An asterisk (*) preceding the Keen number indicates range extension. 3. Relative abundance or rarity; a number in parentheses indicates the number of per- sons known by me to have taken this species at Puertecitos. 4. The habitat of the specimen such as ‘sand beach, low tide" or "intertidally, un- der rocks". 5. Range extensions are noted, giving the most northerly previously recorded place of oc- currence. It must be remembered that the northern limits for a species given in Keen (1958) are generalized and based upon ad- mittedly incomplete lists. An attempt is made here to point out any extension of range from that reported in Keen's work. 6, The following individuals have made their collections available and are designated in the working list by initials: Dr. Bruce Campbell Ca Emery Chace Ch Eugene Coan Co Joseph and Helen DuShane D Faye Howard H Dr. Homer King K Dr. Donald Shasky Sh Gale Sphon Sp Ecological Notes on Eighteen Collecting Areas as numbered on map (figure 1) 1. Shore is rocky with turnable-sized rocks that reveal Trivia solandri, Cypraea annettae, Pterynotus erinaceoides, small Turridae, and the common mollusks. At only a very low spring tide is a small sandbar exposed on which have been found Terebra berryi, T. variegata, Cancellaria obesa, and Strombus galeatus in shallow water. 2. Shore similar to (1) except rocks are larg- er and, in addition to the above, Coralliophila squamosa, Cymatium gibbosum, Heliacus bi- canaliculatus are encountered. 3. Shore of large rocks, cliffs, caves. 4. Medium-sized rocks with much plant growth. On this growth are found Mitra tristis, Parametaria duponti, Trivia solandri, Jenneria pustulata, Cypraea annettae, Arca pacifica, A. THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 Page 40 k to San Felipe ¢ . » 4 Puertecitos a . ot * Baja California S, a th = ee REG cig OM ML eae to San Luis Gonzaga on Gulf of California Sand Bars Rocky Areas Rocky Reefs 200 300 400 Scale in feet Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 41 mutabilis, Modiolus capax, Fusinus felipensis, F. ambustus, and at a very low tide the gor- gonians are uncovered and Neosimnia and Cy- phoma may be found. 5. This area consists of coarse sand and broken shells with draining runnels in which are found Olivella, Hormospira maculosa, Te- rebra berryi, and Conus ximenes. 6. Typical sandbar with Terebra variegata and Cassis centiquadrata. 7. Anarea of small tidepools with runnels and rocks on the reef. Shells found here are Trig- onostoma goniostoma, Muricanthus nigritus, Hexaplex erythrostomus, Crassispira nymphia, Cc. grandimaculata, and others. 8. This is a small area of low lying rocky reefs from which come almost all of the borers, including Lithophaga, Petricola, and Gregari- ella. 9. Here are numerous small- and medium- sized rocks on which are Ostrea palmula. Under the rocks are O. angelica, Plicatula anomioides, Phenacolepas osculans, and Chitons, Tegulas, Acanthinas, and Pinnas. 10, Fair-sized sand flat that remains wet and yields Tagelus, Solen rosaceus, and Diplo- dontas. 11, Large sandbar that is exposed at almost all low tides and has the usual sand dwellers, such as Terebra variegata, Glycymeris, Trachycar- dium, Polinices, and Natica. 12. This is a good place to dig Semele, Diplo- donta, and Protothaca. 13, A unique area because where the rocky shore meets the sand there is a zone of mud in- terspersed with rocks where Crassispira is found, Pitar concinnus occurs on the sandbar close by. 14, Sandy area where Terebra armillata, Oli- vella, Oliva, Donax gracilis, and D. navicula can be found, 15, On this sandbar, bare at low tide, are Te- rebra, Donax, Olivella fletcheri, O. dama, Oli- va incrassata, Laevicardium elatum, Dosinia, and Polinices. 16, A rocky shore with medium- and large- sized rocks under which, or at night, may be found Acmaea, Turridae, Chitons, Trivia, and Cypraea. 17, Rocky shore with large rocks and sandy: tidepools. Cassis coarctata has been taken here. 18. Medium-sized rocks in an exposed area. When the Gulf is rough, this is a very exposed area; therefore, only the hardier forms are found, such as Acmaea, Chitons, Nerita, and Acanthina. Acknowledgment It takes many people to pursue a problem to its proper conclusion; therefore, my grati- tude is extended to Dr. Bruce Campbell whose accurate map makes the area meaningful to the reader; to Dr. Donald Shasky, whose time and interest contributed materially to this paper; to Emery Chace, Eugene Coan, Faye Howard, Homer King, and Bruce Campbell for checklists that offered a working basis; to Gale Sphon, who not only made his collection available but gave unstintingly of his time to the manuscript; to Dr. Myra Keen, who identified troublesome spe- cimens and is always a source of inspiration to the worker; and to Joseph DuShane, whose pa- tient understanding has given me the time nec- essary for completion. Pelecypoda *5 Nuculana costellata (Sowerby, 18 3 3); rare (1), sand beach, low tide, Santa Inez Bay south (Ch). 12. Nuculana impar (Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932); rare (2), sand beach (Sh, D). 36 Arca mutabilis (Sowerby, 1833); com- mon under rocks, low tide (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). 37 Arca pacifica (Sowerby, 1833); common around rocks, intertidally (Sh, D, Sp, Go; K,. Gh, Ga; Hi): 38 Arca lurida (Sowerby, 1833); one valve (H). 39 Barbatia bailyi (Bartsch, 1931); one valve (H). 40 Barbatia gradata(Broderip & Sowerby, 1829); (H). 43 Barbatia reeveana (Orbigny, 1846); common intertidally (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). *44 Barbatia illota (Sowerby, 1833); com- mon attached to rocks, intertidally, Angel de la Guarda Island south to Peru (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). 46 Arcopsis solida (Sowerby, 1833); com- mon attached to rocks, intertidally (Sh, D, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). 57 Anadara multicostata (Sowerby, 1833); rare (4), on sandbar, low tide (Sh, Sp, Co, K). Page 42 *6 9 75 76 80 83 85 86 90 9la 94 95 98 101 106 107 108 *110 *111 116 117 119 Noetia reversa (Sowerby, 1833); low tide, around rocks, rare (2), Concep- cién Bay south (K, Ch). Glycymeris sp.; around rocks, low tide, rare (1) (Ca). Glycymeris maculata (Broderip, 1832); sand beach, uncommon (Sh, D, Sp, K, Ca, H). Glycymeris multicostata (Sowerby, 1833); uncommon, sand beach (Sh, K, Ch, H). Brachidontes multiformis (Carpenter, 1855); uncommon, attached to rocks and rubble, low tide (Sh, Sp, Co, H). Hormomya adamsiana (Dunker, 1857); intertidally among rubble, common (Sh, ID, (i, Je), Mytella guyanensis (Lamarck, 1819); among rocks in sand, rare (1) (H). Mytella speciosa (Reeve, 1857); (Ch). Lithophaga aristata (Dillwyn, 1817); in Spondylus calcifer, common (Sh, K, Ch, Ca, H). Lithophaga attenuata rogersi Berry, 1957; boring into coralline rubble, common (Sh, D, Sp, K, Ch, Ca, H). Lithophaga plumula (Hanley, 1843); (Sh, Sp, Ca). Lithophaga spatiosa (Carpenter, 1856); common (Sh, Sp, K, Ch, H). Gregariella coarctata (Carpenter, 1856); boring into reef (Ch, H, Ca). Modiolus capax (Conrad, 1837); attached to rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Co, K, Ch, H). Lioberus salvadoricus (Hertlein & Strong, 1946); attached to rocks, inter- tidally (Sh, Ch, Ca). Pteria sterna (Gould, 1851); (K, H, Ca). Pinctada mazatlanica (Hanley, 1856); (H). Vulsella pacifica Dall, 1916; rare (1) Nicaragua (Ch). Pinna rugosa Sowerby, 1835; tip of Baja California to Panama (Sp, K, Ch, Ca, H). Atrina maura (Sowerby, 1835); between rocks, low tide, juveniles (Sh, K, Ca). Atrina tuberculosa (Sowerby, 1835); (Sp, H). Isognomon chemnitzianus (Orbigny, 1853); attached to rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Isognomon janus Carpenter, 1856; at- tached to rocks, intertidally, uncom- mon (Sh, D, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Ostrea angelica Rochebrune, 1895; on rocks, intertidally, uncommon (K, Ch, Ca). Ostrea cf. O, conchaphila Carpenter, 1856; on rocks, low tide, rare(1l) (Ch). THE VELIGER 124 126 132 141 142 144 145 146 147 148 150 185 187 200 201 205 206 *208 Vol. 5; No. 1 Ostrea palmula Carpenter, 1856; on rocks exposed to surf, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ca). Pecten vogdesi Arnold, 1906; beach valves (D, Co, K, Ca). Aequipecten circularis (Sowerby, 1835); sand beach, juveniles, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, H). Lima hemphilli Hertlein & Strong, 1946; rare (1) (H). Lima orbignyi Lamy, 1930; under boul- ders, low tide, uncommon(D, Ch, Ca). Lima pacifica Orbigny, 1846; under boulders, low tide, not uncommon (Sh, D, Sp, Co, H). Spondylus princeps Broderip, 1833; rare (1) (H). Spondylus calcifer Carpenter, 1856; be- low low-tide level (Sh, D). Spondylus ursipes Berry, 1959; below low-tide level, rare (1) (H). Plicatula anomioides Keen, 1958; at- tached to flat rocks, intertidally, com- mon (Sh, D, Sp, K, Ch, Ca, H). Plicatula inezana Durham, 1950; at- tached to flat rocks, low tide, rare (1) (Co). Plicatula spondylopsis Rochebrune, 1895; rare (1) (H). Anomia peruviana Orbigny, 1846; at- tached to Donax, intertidally, uncom- mon (K). Crassinella pacifica (C. B. Adams, 1852); living specimens from siftings 5 to 10 feet below low tide (Sh). Cardita affinis californica Deshayes, 1854; attached to rocks, low tide, com- mon (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Cardita cf. C. radiata Sowerby, 1833; under rocks, attached by byssus, low tide (D). Lucina lampra (Dall, 1901); intertidal- ly, 6 to 18 inches in sand with Tagelus californianus, uncommon (Ch, Ca, H). Lucina prolongata Carpenter, 1855; in- tertidally (H). Codakia distinguenda (Tryon, 1872); freshly dead in pairs, sandy drainage channels and in octopus holes, common (Sh) Dy Spy Gh; Ga, pts) Ctena chiquita (Dall, 1901); rare (1) (H). Ctena mexicana (Dall, 1901); low tide, sand beach, common (Sh, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ga, H). Divalinga eburnea (Reeve, 1850); dead valves on beach near high-tide level, rare (1) (Ca). Diplodonta inezensis (Hertlein & Strong, 1947); rare (1), Santa Inez Bay (Ch). Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 43 ee ee eS (1 *213 214 218 221 236 237 238 241 242 248 252 255 256 258 262 263 *270 273 280 Diplodonta orbellus (Gould, 1851); sandy nests under rocks, intertidally, com- mon (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Diplodonta sericata (Reeve, 1850); un- der rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Co, K, Ch, H). Diplodonta caelata (Reeve, 1850); rare (1), Sihuatanejo, Mexico, south to Ecu- ador (H). Diplodonta semirugosa Dall, 1899; out of Chama buddiana (Co, H). Basterotia peninsularis Jordan, 1936; dead specimen (Ch). Ensitellops hertleini Emerson & Puf- fer, 1957; rare (1) (H). Solecardia eburnea Conrad, 1849; in- tertidally, uncommon, valves only (K, Ch, Ca). Sportella stearnsii Dall, 1899; living on sea cucumbers (holothuria), rare (1) (Ca). Chama buddiana C.B. Adams, 1852; at- tached to rocks, intertidally, common (Sp, D, Co, K, Ch, H). Chama sordida Broderip, 1835; attached to rocks, rare (1) (H). Chama squamuligera Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; attached to rocks, intertidally, rare (1) (H). Pseudochama saavedrai Hertlein & Strong, 1946; attached to conglomerate, low tide, rare (2) (D, Ch). Trachycardium panamense (Sowerby, 1833); muddy sand beach, low tide, common (Sh, D, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Papyridea aspersa (Sowerby, 1833); muddy sand beach, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch). Trigoniocardia granifera (Broderip & Sowerby, 1829); mud flats, low tide, un- common (Sh, D, H). Trigoniocardia biangulata (Broderip & Sowerby, 1829); intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, K, Ch). Laevicardium elatum (Sowerby, 1833); sand beach, low tide, uncommon (Sh, Sp, Co, K, Ca). Laevicardium elenense (Sowerby, 1840); muddy sand beach and sandbars, tide, common (Sh, D, K, Ch, Ca). Gouldia californica Dall, 1917; rare (1) La Paz to Panama (Ch). Tivela byronensis (Gray, 1838); sand beach, intertidally, common(Sh, D, Sp, GowiGh Gay oh). Transennella puella (Carpenter, 1864); uncommon, sand beach, low tide (D). Transennella sp. (Ch). low 298 303 306 318 319 * 320 321 323 326 327 328 331 335 *337 340 341 345 *347 348 Pitar newcombianus (Gabb, 1865); sand beach, low tide, uncommon (Sh, Ch). Pitar pollicaris (Carpenter, 1864); low tide, rare (1) (Sp). Pitar concinnus (Sowerby, 1835); sand beach, intertidally, fairly common (Sh, K, Ch, Ca, H). Pitar tortuosus (Broderip, 1835); sand beach, uncommon (D, K, Ch). Megapitaria squalida (Sowerby, 1835); muddy sand beach, common (Sh, D, Sp, (COs US Gay, Gey, 186 Dosinia ponderosa (Gray, 1838); muddy sand beach, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, CGhyCa,ai) Chione californiensis (Broderip, 1835); muddy sand beach, common (D, H). Chione compta (Broderip, 1835); dead valves on sand beach (D). Chione guatulcoensis Hertlein & Strong, 1948; intertidally, sand beach, rare (1), Port Guatulco, Mexico, to Panama Bay (Ch). Chione undatella (Sowerby, 1835); in- tertidally, sand beach, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, Ch, H). Chione fluctifraga (Sowerby, 1853); sand beach, dead valve (D). Chione gnidia (Broderip & Sowerby, 1829); intertidally, muddy sand, un- common (H). Chione pulicaria (Broderip, 1835); in- tertidally, sand beach, common (Sp, D, K, Ch, Ca). Chione purpurissata Dall, 1902; inter- tidally, rare (1) (H). Chione mariae (Orbigny, 1846); low tide, sand beach, rare (4) (Sh, Sp, Ch, H). Chione picta Willett, 1944; low tide, sand beach, rare (4) (Sh, Sp, Ch, H). Anomalocardia subimbricata tumens (Verrill, 1870); low tide, sandbars, rare (2), southern part of the Gulf of California (D, H). Protothaca grata (Say, 1831); muddy sand and rubble, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, Ch, Ca, H). Protothaca asperrima (Sowerby, 1835); sand beach and rubble, intertidally, un- common (D, K, Ca). Petricola lucasana Hertlein & Strong, 1948; in crevices, common (Sh, D, K, Ch, H, Ca). Petricola denticulata Sowerby, 1834; on reef with Lithophaga, rare (2), La Paz to Peru (K, H). Petricola parallela Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; valves on beach (Ch). THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 a red oe ee * 383 384 387 389 393 *398 *435 436 439 44] 450 45] 462 467 471 472 477 Petricola robusta Sowerby, 1834; bor- ing in clay (Ch). Petricola botula Olsson, 1961; one com- plete dead specimen (Ca). Cooperella subdiaphana (Carpenter, 1864); sand beach, intertidally (Sp, Ch). Mactra dolabriformis (Conrad, 1867); muddy sand flat (Sp, D, Ca, H). Mactra nasuta Gould, 1851; intertidally, rare (1) (Sp). Tellina inaequistriata Donovan, 1802; sand beach, rare (1) (Ch). Tellina prora Hanley, 1844; muddy sand, low tide, rare (1), La Paz to Ec- uador (D). Tellina rubescens Hanley, 1844; inter- tidally, rare(1l), Tenacatita Bay, Mexi- co, to Peru (H). Tellina simulans C. B. Adams, 1852; muddy sand, low tide, uncommon (D, K). Tellina cristallina Spengler, 1798; one valve, rare (H). Tellina meropsis Dall, 1900; muddy sand, low tide, rare (K, Ch). Tellina arenica Hertlein & Strong, 1949; rare (Ch). ; Tellina guaymasensis Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; muddy sand, low tide, rare (1), Guaymas, Mexico (Ch). Tellina, a new species, to be described by Dr. Myra Keen; sand beach, uncom- mon (D). Macoma indentata Carpenter, 1864; rare (H). Macoma cf. M. mazatlanica (Deshayes, 1855); rare (1), Mazatlan (Sh). Macoma pacis Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; sand beach, low tide, uncommon (D, Ch, Ca, H). Strigilla costulifera (M6érch, 1860); rare (2) (Sh, Ca). Strigilla lenticula Philippi, 1846; inter- tidally, sand beach, rare (1) (D). Donax gracilis Hanley, 1845; common, sand flats (Sh, D, Sp, Co, Ca). Donax navicula Hanley, 1845; intertid- ally, sand flats, common (Sh, D, Sp, K, Ch, Ca, H). Sanguinolaria tellinoides A. Adams, 1850; rare (1) (H). Heterodonax bimaculatus (Linnaeus, 1758); uncommon (Sh, H). Tagelus californianus (Conrad, 1837); mud flats, actively burrowing, common (Sh, D; Sp; Go, K, Ch, Ca, A): Tagelus violascens (Carpenter, 1855); mud flats, rare (1) (Ch). Semele bicolor (C. B. Adams, 1852); mud flats, rare (2) (Ch, Ca). 482 483 508 *512 516 518 oZal 523 524 525 527 538 542 546 553 573 578 579 585 589 12 Semele flavescens (Gould, 1851); under rocky rubble, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sy, 1h, Ga, Caio Semele formosa (Sowerby, 1832); rare (1) (K). Semele guaymasensis Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; rocky rubble, low tide, uncom- mon (Sh, D, Ch). Cumingia lamellosa Sowerby, 1833; nestling in rock crevices, intertidally, uncommon (Sh, Ca), Solen cf. S. mexicanus Dall, 1899; rare, Gulf of Tehuantepec, Mexico, to Nica- ragua (K). Solen rosaceus Carpenter, 1864; inter - tidally, in runnels, rare (2) (D, Ca). Ensis californicus Dall, 1899; intertid- ally, in runnels, rare (2) (D, kK). Sphenia fragilis Carpenter, 1856; nes- tling in cavities and holes (D, Ch, H). Corbula bicarinata Sowerby, 1833; around rocks, low tide, fairly common (Sh, D, Sp, Ch, Ca). Corbula biradiata Sowerby, 183 3; around rocks, intertidally (Ch, Ca). Corbula cf. C. luteola Carpenter, 1864; in dead Semele flavescens, sand beach (D). Corbula nasuta Sowerby, 1833; around rocks, intertidally, uncommon (Sh, Ch). Corbula tenuis Sowerby, 1833; in beach drift (H). Hiatella arctica (Linnaeus, 1767); in rocky crevices, intertidally (Sh, Co, Ch). Pholas chiloensis Molina, 1782; beach specimen (Ch). Diplothyra curta (Sowerby, 1834); rare (1) (H). Pandora granulata Dall, 1915; (Sh). Lyonsia gouldii Dall, 1915; sand beach, low night tide, uncommon (Sh, D, Ch). Lyonsia inflata Conrad, 1837; in crev- ices, rocky reef, uncommon (Sh, D). Periploma planiusculum Sowerby, 1834; low tide, uncommon (Sh). Thracia curta Conrad, 1837; dead valve (K). Scaphopoda Dentalium inversum Deshayes, 1826; beach specimen (Ch, Ca). Dentalium sp.; alive on sand beach (Ca). Dentalium sp.; in sand near boulder, low tide, beach specimen, rare (D). Cadulus panamensis Pilsbry & Sharp, 1897; below low-tide level (Ch). Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VE LIGER Page 45 *5 l2a 14 16 18 «28 «30 32 «33 34 4) 45 47 52 53 Gastropoda Acmaea acutapex Berry, 1960; common on rocks at mid-tide level (D, Sp, K, Ch). Acmaea filosa Carpenter, 1865; rare (1), El Salvador to Panama (H). Acmaea mitella Menke, 1847; among big barnacles (H). Acmaea mitella fayae Hertlein, 1958; mid-tide level, rare (2) (D, Sp). Acmaea strongiana Hertlein, 1958; on rocks at mid-tide level, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Acmaea turveri Hertlein&Strong, 1951; on rocks at high-, mid-tide level, com- mon (Sh, Sp, K, Ch, Ca, H). Nomaeopelta dalliana (Pilsbry, 1891); mid-tide level, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Nomaeopelta goodmani Berry, 1960; high-tide level, uncommon (topotypes) (D, Sp, K, Ch, Ca, H). Nomaeopelta stanfordiana (Berry, 1957); mid-tide level, common (Sh, D, Sp, K, Ch, Ca). Lucapinella aequalis (Sowerby, 1835); uncommon, Port Guatulco, Mexico, to Ecuador (D, H). Lucapinella milleri Berry, 1960; rare (1) (Ch). Diodora alta (C. B. Adams, 1852); mid- tide level, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Diodora constantiae Kanakoff, 1953; un- der boulders, rare (1) (H). Diodora inaequalis (Sowerby, 1835); mid-tide level, under rocks (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Diodora panamensis (Sowerby, 1835); rare (1), on rocks, Panama (Ch). Diodora saturnalis (Carpenter, 1864); mid-tide level, on rocks, rare (2) (Sh, D). Calliostoma eximium (Reeve, 1843); under rocks, mid-tide level, rare (2) (Sp, K). Calliostoma marshalli Lowe, 1935; un- der rocks, mid-tide level, rare(2) (Sh, Ch). Calliostoma palmeri Dall, 1871; beach specimen (D). Tegula globulus (Carpenter, 1856); un- der and on rocks, high-tide level, com- mon (Sh, Co, Ch), Tegula ligulata (Menke, 1850); on rocks, rare (1) (Ch). 54 58 64 67 81 82 85 86 98 99 *113 * 158 165 175 Tegula mariana Dall, 1919; under and on rocks, high-tide level, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch). Tegula rugosa (A. Adams, 1853); on rocks, high-tide level, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch). Turbo fluctuosus Wood, 1828; among stones, mid-tide level, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca). Turbo saxosus Wood, 1828; juveniles only, Los Angeles Bay, Gulf of Califor- nia, to Peru (Ch), Liotia acuticostata Carpenter, 1864; beach specimen (Ch). Liotia carinata Carpenter, 1864; (Ch). Liotia rammata Dall, 1918; (Ch). Tricolia substriata (Carpenter, 1864); under rocks (D, Ch). Nerita scabricosta Lamarck, 1822; high-tide level, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, KiGaserH)) Nerita funiculata Menke, 1851; on rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca). Phenacolepas malonei Vanatta, 1912; on rocks, intertidally, rare (3) (Sp, Co, Ch). Phenacolepas osculans (C. B. Adams, 1852); on rocks, intertidally, rare (2) (Sh, D). Eulima sp.; dead specimen (D). Balcis sp.; two species (Sh). Epitonium vivesi Hertlein & Strong, 1951; rare (1) (Sh). Epitonium walkerianum Hertlein & Strong, 1951; under rocks, rare(2) (Sh, D). Epitonium cf. E, colpoicum Dall, 1917; under rocks, rare(1), La Paz to Pana- ma (D). Epitonium hexagonum (Sowerby, 1844); rare (2) (Ca, H). Epitonium oerstedianum Hertlein & Strong, 1951; rare (1) (H). Opalia diadema (Sowerby, 1832); under rocks, low tide, rare (1), Mazatlan, Mexico, to Galapagos Islands (D). Opalia retiporosa (Carpenter, 1864); rare (2) (Sp, Ch). Littorina dubiosa penicillata Carpen- ter, 1864; common on rocks at splash zone (Sh, D, Sp, Co, Ch, Ca, H). Cyclostremiscus granti Baker, Hanna, & Strong, 1938; in siftings, 5 to 10 feet below lowetide level, one specimen (Sh). Macromphalina sp.; in siftings, 5 to 10 feet below low-tide level (Sh). Page 46 180 189a 191 193 3k 194 196 197 198 201 203 211 THE VELIGER Chonebasis symmetrica Pilsbry & Olsson; below low-tide level (H). Solariorbis sp.; in siftings, 5 to 10 feet below low-tide level (Sh). Teinostoma amplectans Carpenter, 1857; sand beach, just below low-tide level (Sh, D, H). Teinostoma sp.; (H). Vitrinella sp.; sand beach, just below low-tide level (Sh, Co). Assiminea sp. (Sh). Rissoina burragei Bartsch, 1915(D, Ch). Rissoina firmata C. B. Adams, 1852 (H). Rissoina or Rissoella (Sh). Rissoina woodwardii Carpenter, 1856; just below low-tide level, sand beach (Sh). Barleeia sp. (Ch). Turritella anactor Berry, 1957; sand beach, low tide, uncommon; all beach specimens (D, Co, Ch, Ca). Vermicularia pellucida eburnea (Reeve, 1842); among rubble, low tide, good specimens uncommon (D, Co, Ch, Ca). Architectonica nobilis Ré6ding, 1798; beach specimens, rare (2) (D). Heliacus bicanaliculatus (Valenciennes, 1832); intertidally, in runnels, uncom- mon (D, K, Ch). Heliacus planispira Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; extreme low tide, Panama (Sh). Caecum sp.; in siftings, 5 to 10 feet below low-tide level (Sh, H). Elephantanellum, two species; in sif- tings, 5 to 10 feet below low-tide level (Sh, H). Elephantulum sp.; in dead Semele flav- escens, common (D, Ch). Elephantulum sp.; in siftings, 5 to 10 feet below low-tide level (Sh, D). Fartulum sp.; in siftings, 5 to 10 feet below low-tide level (Sh, D, H). Micranellum sp.; in dead Semele flav- escens (D, H). Modulus cerodes (A. Adams, 1851); muddy sand flats, uncommon (Sp). Modulus disculus (Philippi, 1846); on muddy coralline reef, common (D, Sp, Co, KK, Ch, Ca), Vermetus centiqguadrus Valenciennes, 1846; on rocks, fairly common (K, Ca). Vermetus indentatus (Carpenter, 1856); among rocks, mid-tide, uncommon (K, Gar He Petaloconchus macrophragma Carpen- ter, 1856; among rocks, mid-tide, rare (2)) (Gh, Ga). Cerithium maculosum Kiener, 1841; on rocky reef, intertidally, uncommon (K, Gar Vol. 5; No. 1 214 Cerithium sculptum Sowerby, 1855; un- 215 219 225 227 230 233 237 240 241 242 *243 245 der rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sia, (GO, 15, (Cli, (Ca), Cerithium stercusmuscarum Valenci- ennes, 1833; muddy sand flats, intertid- ally, common (Sh, D, Co, K, Ch, Ca), Triphora, three species (Sh, D). Triphora contrerasi Baker, 1926 (Ch). Bittium sp. (D). Cerithiopsis bristolae Baker, Hanna, & Strong, 1938; (Sh). Cerithiopsis sp. (Sh, D, Ch). Seila assimilata C. B. Adams, 1852; sand beach, low tide (Sh, Ch). Alaba jeannettae Bartsch, 1911 (Ch, H). Alabina diomedae Bartsch, 1911 (Sh). Alabina tenuisculpta Carpenter, 1864; (Ch). Cerithidea albonodosa Gould & Carpen- ter, 1857; muddy sand, high-tide level, uncommon (K, Ca). Hipponix antiquatus (Linnaeus, 1767); on rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Ch). Hipponix pilosus (Deshayes, 1832); on rocks, intertidally, common (Sp, D, Co, Ke GhenGair Fossarus angiostoma C. B. Adams, 1852) (EH) Fossarus megasoma C. B. Adams, 1852; (H). Fossarus cf. F. tuberosus Carpenter, 1857; under rocks, intertidally, rare (1) (Sh). Iselica sp.; sand beach, low tide (Sh, D, Sp). Vanikoro aperta (Carpenter, 1864); rare (1), Cape San Lucas, Baja California (H). Vanikoro sp. (Ch). Calyptraea mamillaris. Broderip, 1834; attached to rocks and other shells, in- tertidally, fairly common (D, K, Ch, Ca). Cheilea cepacea (Broderip, 1834); rare (Ch). Crepidula arenata (Broderip, 1834); on dead shells, intertidally, not common (D). Crepidula excavata (Broderip, 183 4); on other shells, low tide, uncommon (D, Ch). Crepidula incurva (Broderip, 1834); on dead shells, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, H). Crepidula lessonii (Broderip, 1834); un- der stones, intertidally, rare, Oaxaca, Mexico, to Peru (D). Crepidula onyx Sowerby, 1824; common, especially on Cypraea annettae, low tide (D, K, H). Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER. Page 47 I a ee a ee 248 249 252 254 258 266 272 274 275 *280 287 289 296 299 *300 *301 305 307 308 Crepidula perforans (Valenciennes, 1846); in pholad holes, uncommon (Co, Ch). Crepidula striolata Menke, 1851; at- tached to underside of stones, intertid- ally, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch). Crepidula uncata Menke, 1847; attached to gorgonians and dead shells, rare (Sh, H). Crucibulum scutellatum (Wood, 1828); on rocky reefs, intertidally, uncommon (D, Sp, K, Ch). Crucibulum spinosum (Sowerby, 1824); on dead shells and rocks, intertidally, uncommon (D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca). Natica chemnitzii Pfeiffer, 1840; sand flats, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Polinices bifasciatus (Gray, 1834); sand flats, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K;) Ga; A). Polinices uber (Valenciennes, 1832); sand flats, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, Ch, Ca, H). Polinices reclusianus (Deshayes, 1839); sandbars, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Sinum cf, S. debile (Gould, 1853 [1852)]); on tide flats, low tide, rare (Sh). Lamellaria inflata (C. B. Adams, 1852); near boulder, brown soft parts, rare (1), Panama (D). Cypraea annettae Dall, 1909; under rocks, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Erato columbella Menke, 1847; rocks, low tide, rare (Ch). Trivia californiana (Gray, 1828); on boulders, low tide, dead specimens only (D, K). Trivia solandri (Sowerby, 1832); on boulders, low tide, uncommon (Sh, D, Sp, Co, Ch, Ca, H). Jenneria pustulata (Solander, 1786); un- der and on rocks, low tide, rare, south- ern end of Gulf of California to Ecuador (Sh, D, Sp, Ca). Cyphoma emarginatum (Sowerby, 1830); on gorgonians, rare, Mazatla4n, Mexico, to Ecuador (Sh, Ca). Neosimnia quaylei (Lowe, 1935); on gorgonians, shallow water (Sh, D, Sp, K, Ca). Strombus galeatus Swainson, 1823; muddy runnels, around rocks, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Strombus gracilior Sowerby, 1825; muddy sand flats, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, H). under *313 317 324 335 339 344 348 358 367 *369 387 388 389 398 404 409 411 412 Strombus granulatus Swainson, 1822; around rocks, in runnels, uncommon (Shy Diekeu Cant): Cassis coarctata Sowerby, 1825; rare, among boulders, La Paz, Gulf of Cali- fornia, to Ecuador (Ca). Cassis centiquadrata (Valenciennes, 1832); around rocks and on sandbars at very low tide, uncommon (Sp, Ch). Ficus ventricosa (Sowerby, 1825); beach specimens and dredged by shrimp boats (K, Ca). Cymatium gibbosum (Broderip, 1833): under rocks, intertidally, uncommon (Sh, D, Sp, Ch). Murex elenensis Dall, 1909; dead spe- cimens on beach (Sh, K, Ca, H), Hexaplex erythrostomus (Swainson, 1831); juveniles on and around rocks and on rocky reefs, adults at low tide on sand beach, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ga, H). Muricanthus nigritus (Philippi, 1845); uncommon except as juveniles among rocks, low tide (Sh, D, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). Pterynotus erinaceoides (Valenciennes, 1832); among rocks, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, K). Ocenebra parva (E. A. Smith, 1877); between rocks, low tide, rare (1) (D). Muricopsis armatus (A. Adams, 1854); beach specimen (Ca). Muricopsis zeteki Hertlein & Strong, 1951; under rocks, low tide, uncommon, Mazatlan, Mexico, to Panama (Sh, D, Sp). Coralliophila costata (Blainville, 1832); coral reef, low tide, uncommon (Sh, D, Sp). Coralliophila hindsii (Carpenter, 1857); beach specimen (Ch). Coralliophila squamosa (Broderip, 1833); under rocks, low tide, rare(1) (Sp). Thais biserialis (Blainville, 1832); un- der rocks, intertidally, rare (2) (Sp, Ca). Acanthina angelica I. Oldroyd, 1918; mid-tide level, common (Sh, Sp, Co, K, GhaiGas bt). Acanthina tuberculata (Sowerby, 1835); on rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Co, K, Gh, HB). Morula ferruginosa (Reeve, 1846); un- der rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, H): Morula lugubris (C. B. Adams, 1852); under rocks, uncommon (Sh, D). Page 48 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 424 Anachis coronata (Sowerby, 1832); un- *586 Nassarius taeniolatus (Philippi, 1845); der rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, rare, around and under rocks, Acapul- Si, CO, IX, Cla, Gap I). co, Mexico, to Chile (Sh). 429 Anachis diminuta (C. B. Adams, 1852); 587 Nassarius versicolor (C. B. Adams, on rocks, low tide, uncommon (Sh, D, 1852); around rocks and on sand flats Ca). as tide recedes, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, *437 Anachis hilli Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; un- Ga, H). der rocks, intertidally, uncommon, 591 Nassarius iodes (Dall, 1917); around Sonoran coast of Mexico to Nicaragua rocks as tide recedes, common(D, Co, (Sh, D; Sp; Go, Ga, A). KenGh))e 444 Anachis nigricans (Sowerby, 1844); un- 592 Nassarius luteostoma (Broderip & So- der rocks, intertidally, uncommon (Sh, werby, 1829); around rocks as tide re- D; Sp; K; Ca, Ho). cedes, uncommon (D, K). 454 Anachis sanfelipensis Lowe, 1935; un- 593 Nassarius moestus (Hinds, 1844); der rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, around rocks as tide recedes, common Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ga). (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). 455 Anachis scalarina (Sowerby, 1832); un- 595 Nassarius tiarula (Kiener, 1841); around der rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, rocks as tide recedes, common (Sh, D, Ca). Sp, K, Ch). 464 Anachis varia (Sowerby, 1832); under 612 Fusinus ambustus (Gould, 1853 [? 1852]); rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, on muddy sandflats, intertidally, com- Conk. Gh Car mon (Sh, D, K, Ch, Ga). 470 Cosmioconcha palmeri(Dall, 1913); un- 617 Fusinus cinereus (Reeve, 1847); (H). der rocks, rare (1) (D). 618 Fusinus felipensis Lowe, 1935; on rocky *478 Mitrella dorma Baker, Hanna, & Strong, reef, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, 1938; under rocks, low tide, uncommon, Co, Ch, Ca). southern part of Gulf of California (Sh, 620 Oliva incrassata (Solander, 1786); on D, Sp). sand flats as tide turns, common (Sh, D, 480 Mitrella granti Lowe, 1935; under Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, oH): rocks, low tide, rare (2) (Sh, Sp). 625 Oliva spicata (Réding, 1798); sand flats, *482 Mitrella lalage Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; low tide, rare (2) (K, H). on rocks, extreme low tide, uncommon, 627 Oliva undatella Lamarck, 1810; sand southern part of Gulf of California (D, beach, low tide, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, Ch). Ca, H). 483 Mitrella millepunctata (Carpenter, 634 Olivella dama (Wood, 1828); sand flats 1864); on rocks, extreme low tide, rare as tide turns, common (Sh, D, Sp, ©, (2) (D, Sp). K, Ch, Ca). 484 Mitrella ocellata (Gmelin, 1791); under 634a Olivella fletcherae Berry, 1958; sand rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, flats as tide turns, common (Sh, D, Sp, Co, Ch). ing, (Cle Nassarina, probably a new species; in "640 Olivella volutella (Lamarck 1811); sand siftings from 5 to 10 feet below low- beach, rare (2), Central America to tide level (Sh). Ecuador (D, kK). 494 Parametaria dupontii (Kiener, 1849-50); 645 Olivella zanoeta (Duclos, 1835); sand under rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, flats as tide turns, common (Sh, D, Sp, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca). Govekeuni\r 497 Pyrene fuscata (Sowerby, 1832); under Olivella sp. (D). rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, 646 Mitra solitaria C. B. Adams, 1858; Co, K, Ch, Ca). among rocks, low tide, uncommon (Sh, 515 Strombina maculosa (Sowerby, 1832); D, Sp; Gh, Ga, B). muddy sand, among rocks, uncommon 656 Mitra tristis Broderip, 1836; under (D) Sp, K, Ga): rocks, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Sp, 541 Cantharus capitaneus (Berry, 1957); (Soy, Ie, (Chey, (Gai, 1h), beach specimen (Ch, Ca). 662 Mitra sulcata Sowerby, 1825; beach 543 Cantharus macrospira (Berry, 1957); specimens (D, Sp). muddy sand (Sh, Sp, Co, Ch, Ca). Mitra fultoni; under rocks, intertidally, *551 Engina solida (Dall, 1917); under rocks, rare (1) (Sp). low tide, rare, La Paz, Gulf of Cali- 667 Lyria pedersenii (Verrill, 1870); under fornia to Acapulco, Mexico (Sh, D, Ca). rocks, low tide, rare (1) (Ch). Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 49 669 Marginella californica Tomlin, 1916; Mangelia cf, M. oenoa Dall, 1919; in- under muddy rocks, uncommon (Sh, H). tertidally, rare (1) (Sh). Cystiscus sp. (Sh). *866 Mangelia subdiaphana Carpenter, 1864; 685 Cancellaria obesa Sowerby, 1832; sand intertidally, rare (1), Cape San Lucas, spits, low tide at night, rare (4) (Sh, D, Gulf of California (Sp). Sp, Ca). *867 Mangelia antiochroa Pilsbry & Lowe, 693 Cancellaria cassidiformis Sowerby, 1932; intertidally, rare (1), Panama (H), 1832; sand spits, low tide, rare (2) (D, 870 Mangelia cyrene Dall, 1919; intertidal- Ca). ly, rare (1) (H). 710 Trigonostoma goniostoma Sowerby, Mangelia doris Dall, 1919; intertidally, 1832; rocky reef, low tide, common (Sh, rane) (jl) (Et): DSPs) Kay Cay) El): Mangelia, two species (Sh, Ch). 726 Knefastia funiculata (Kiener, 1838-40, *894 Tenaturris cf. T. nereis (Pilsbry & ex. Valenciennes MS); rocky reef, low Lowe, 1932); under rocks, low tide, tide, uncommon (D, Sp). rare (3), Nicaragua (Sh, Sp, Ca). 727 Knefastia olivacea (Sowerby, 1833); 908 Hormospira maculosa (Sowerby, 1834); rocky reef, low tide, common (Sh, D, among rocky rubble, intertidally, un- Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca). common (D, Sp, K, Ca). 753 Clavus ianthe (Dall, 1919); sand beach, 910 Pleuroliria nobilis (Hinds, 1843); low night tide, rare(6) (Sh, D, Sp, K, washed up by storm, alive (D). Ca, H). 922 Conus princeps Linnaeus, 1758; dead 758 Clavus pembertoni Lowe, 1935; dead specimen (Ch). specimen (H). 926 Conus perplexus Sowerby, 1857; sand 769 Clathrodrillia pilsbryi Lowe,1935; dead beach, low tide, uncommon (D, Ch, Ca), specimens (D, Ca). 930 Conus ximenes Gray, 1839; in coarse *770 Clathrodrillia aenone Dall, 1919; rocky sand, edge of runnels, low tide, com- reef, rare (2), Agua Verde Bay, Gulf monu(Shy Drops Cowka Garekile of California (D, Sp). *948 Terebra robusta Hinds, 1844; sand *790 Crassispira bacchia Dall, 1919; under beach, low tide, rare (2), Guaymas, rocks, intertidally, rare (3), La Paz, Mexico, to Ecuador (D). Gulf of California (D, Sp, Ca). 949 Terebra strigata Sowerby, 1825, cf. T. *802 Crassispira erebus Pilsbry & Lowe, ornata; beach specimen (D). 1932; rocky reefs, low tide, uncommon, 956 Terebra armillata Hinds, 1844; muddy Southern Mexico to Panama (Sh, D, K, sand flats, intertidally, common (Sh, Ch, H). Din GowGarell) *809 Crassispira grandimaculata (C. B. *958 Terebra cf. T. bridgesi Dall, 1908; Adams, 1852); under rocks, intertidally, sand beach, low night tide, uncommon uncommon, Nicaragua to Panama (D, (18), Panama (Sh, D, H). Sp, Ca). 963 Terebra glauca Hinds, 1844; sand 815 Crassispira lucasensis (Bartsch, 1950) beach, intertidally, uncommon (Sh, D, ? = C. kluthi Jordan, 1936; sand beach Ch). and under rocks, low tide, common (Sh, "968 Terebra ligyrus Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). sand beach, intertidally, rare (1), 822 Crassispira nymphia Pilsbry & Lowe, Guaymas, Mexico (Sp). 1932; under rocks, low tide, common 980 Terebra variegata Gray, 1834; sand (Sh, D, Sp, Co, K, Ch, Ca, H). beach, intertidally, common (Sh, D, Co, 825 Crassispira pluto Pilsbry & Lowe, K, Ca, H). 1932; under rocks, low tide, common Terebra berryi Campbell, 1961; sand (Sh, D, Sp, K, Ch). beach, low tide, rare (2) (D, Ca). * 839 Crassispira xanti Hertlein & Strong, 982 Bulla gouldiana Pilsbry, 1895; among 1951; rare(2), southern end of the Gulf rubble as tide recedes, common (Sh, D, of California to Costa Rica (Sh, Sp). Spy Com kon Gast) *840 Crassispira zonulata (Reeve, 1843); un- 986 Haminoea strongi Baker & Hanna, 1927; der rocks, low tide, rare (2), Nicara- rare (4) (Sh, Sp, Ch, H). gua to Panama (Sp, H). 992 Acteocina angustior Baker & Hanna, 85la Mangelia hamata Carpenter, 1865; in- 1927; sand beach, uncommon (Sh, D, tertidally, rare (1) (H). Ch). 863a Mangelia cf. M. euryclea Dall, 1919; 994 Acteocina inculta (Gould & Carpenter, intertidally, rare (1) (Sp). 1857); sand beach (Sh, D). Page 50 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 1025 1033 27 28 38 39 41 42 44 45 46 47 49 Baker, Odostomia aepynota planicosta Baker, Hanna, & Strong, 1928; rare (1) (Sh). Odostomia, three species (Sh). Turbonilla, three species (Sh). Pedipes liratus Binney, 1860; rare (2) (Sh, H). Williamia peltoides (Carpenter, 1864); dead specimen, rare (Ch). Amphineura Chiton virgulatus Sowerby, 1840; under stones, intertidally, common (D, Co, H). Acanthochitona cf. A. avicula Carpen- ter, 1856; rare (1) (H). Acanthochitona exquisita (Pilsbry & Lowe, 1893); crawling on rocks at night, common (D, Sp, Co, Ch, Ga, H). Lepidopleurus internexus Carpenter, 1865; under rocks (Ch). Callistochiton gabbi Pilsbry, 1893; un- der stones, intertidally, common (H). Callistochiton infortunatus Pilsbry, 1893; under stones, intertidally, un- common (H). Callistochiton palmulatus Carpenter, 1856 (H). Chaetopleura euryplax Berry, 1945; un- der stones, rare (D). Lepidozona clathrata (Reeve, 1847); un- der stones and in crevices, uncommon (ID), (C@p» 181). Lepidozona serrata (Carpenter, 1864); under stones, rare, Cape San Lucas, Baja California (H). Lepidozona subtilis Berry, 1956; in crevices, intertidally, common (D, Co, H). (H). Stenoplax limaciformis (Sowerby, 1832); under stones, intertidally, common (Co, H). Stenoplax magdalenensis (Hinds, 1845); under and on rocks, intertidally, com- mon (Ch, H). Stenoplax mariposa (Dall, 1919); under stones, intertidally, common (D, Co, Ch, 1a). Stenoplax conspicua sonorana Berry, 1956; on rocks and in tidepools (H). Nuttallina crossota Berry, 1956; on rocks and in tidepools (H). (H). Literature Cited Fred C. 1926. Mollusca of the family Triphoridae. Proc, Calif. Acad. Sci. ser. 4, 15(6): 223-239; pl. 24. Baker, Fred C., G Dallas Hanna, & A. M. Strong 1928. Some Pyramidellidae from the Gulf of California Proc, Calif. Acad. Sci. ser. 4, 17(7): 205-246, pls. 11-12 : ==) ===>, ; , & - 1938. Some mollusca of the families Cerithiopsidae, Cerithiidae and Cyclostrematidae from the Gulf of California and adjacent waters. Proc, Calif. Acad. Sci. ser. 4, 23(15): 217-244; pls. 17-23. Bartsch, Paul 1910. The west American mollusks of the genus Alaba. Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus. 39(1781): 153-156; 3 figs. 1911. The Recent and fossil mollusks of the genus Ala- bina from the west coast of America. Proc. U, S, Nat. Mus. 39(1790): 409-418; pls. 61-62. 1915. The Recent and fossil mollusks of the genus Ris- soina from the west coast of America. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 49(2094): 33-62; pls. 28-33. Berry, S. Stillman 1960. Leaflets in Malacology 1 (19): 115-122. Burch, JohnQ. 1944-1946. Distributional list of the west American marine mollusca from San Diego, California, to (Extracts from the) Min. Conch, 33 to 63. the Polar Sea. Club Southern Calif. nos. Campbell, Bruce 1961. Four new Panamic gastropods. (1): 25-28; pl. 5. Dall, William Healey 1919. Descriptions of new species of mollusks of the family Turritidae from the west coast of America and adjacent regions. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 56 (2288): 1-86; pls. 1-24. The Veliger 4 Jordan, Eric K. 1936. The Pleistocene fauna of Magdalena Bay, Lower California. Contr. Dept. Geo. Stanford Univ. 1 (4): 107-173; pls. 17-19. Kanakoff, George P., & William K. Emerson 1959. Late Pleistocene invertebrates of the Newport Bay area. Los Angeles County Mus. Contr. Sci. ee Ss Keen, A. Myra 1958. Sea shells of tropical west America; marine mollusks from Lower California to Colombia . Stanford, Calif., Stanford Univ. Press; xi + 624 pp., illus. Oldroyd, Ida Shepard 1925. The marine shells of the west coast of North America. Stanford Univ. Pubs., Geol. Sci. 1]: 1- 248; pls. 1-57. 1927. The marine shells of the west coast of North America. Stanford Univ. Pubs., Geol. Sci. 2 (1): 1-297, pls. 1-29. 1927. The marine shells of the west coast of North America. Stanford Univ. Pubs., Geol. Sci. 2 (2): 1-300; pls. 30-72. 1927. The marine shells of the west coast of North America. Stanford Univ. Pubs., Geol. Sci. 2 (3): 1-339; pls. 73-108. : Olsson, Axel A. 1961. Mollusks of the tropical eastern Pacific, par- ticularly fromthe southernhalf of the Panamic Pa- cific faunal province (Panama to Peru). Part I. Panamic-Pacific pelecypoda. Paleont. Res. Inst. Ithaca, N. y., pp. 1-574; pls. 1-86. Pilsbry, Henry A., & Axel A. Olsson -1945-1952. Vitrinellidae and similar gastropods of the Panamic Province. Pt. I. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 97: 249 - 278; pls. 22-30 Pt. Il. ibid., 104: 35-88; pls. 2-13. Sphon, Gale G., Jr. 1961. Notes on the Mitridae of the Eastern Pacific, L Mitra fultoni E. A. Smith. The Veliger 4 (1): 32 to 36; pl. 7, 1 textfig. Turner, Ruth D. 1956. The eastern Pacific marine mollusks described by C. B. Adams. Occ. Pap, Mollusks, Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard 2 (20): 21-135; pls. 5-11. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 51 A New Species of Armina (Gastropoda : Nudibranchia) from the Gulf of California BY JAMES R. LANCE Scripps Institution of Oceanography, La Jolla, California (6 Textfigures) Of the four suborders of nudibranchiate mollusks, the Arminacea comprises the least number of species. Although highly polymor- phous, and in many respects structurally inter- mediate between doridiform and eolidiform animals, the three families of this suborder known to occur on the Pacific Coast of North America are readily distinguishable from each other. Both the Dironidae and Antiopellidae possess cerata, and in the former a conspicuous frontal veil is also present. In the latter the cerata extend around the anterior portion of the notum. The Arminidae are characterized by the absence of any appendages on the notum, the occurrence of gills on the under surface of the lateral notal margins, and the presence of a distinct frontal veil. To this third family may now be added an additional species with certain morphological features so distinctive as to depart from the orthodox concept of the Arminidae. I am deeply grateful to Mr. and Mrs. Alan Wolfson, whose collections from the Gulf of California have provided me with the opportunity of examining this interesting new species. NUDIBRANCHIA Arminacea EUARMINACEA ARMINIDAE Armina convolvula LANCE, spec. nov. The largest of six specimens collected measured 75 mm. in length and 32 mm. in breadth (36 mm. at the widest point between the angles of the foot) when actively crawling. The smallest individual was 44 mm. long and 19 mm. broad. The specimen (holotype) upon which this description is based was of average size and measured 60 mm. long and 25 mm. broad when alive. The body is broadest in front and tapers very slightly to a rounded tail. The entire no- tum is free except for a very narrow region be- tween the rhinophores, where it slopes forward and sharply downward to expand into a broad frontal veil with an undulating anterior margin (Figure 1). The entire surface of the notum is textured with about 20 to 25 highly convoluted ridges that originate at its anterior border and run posteriorly and somewhat obliquely from the median line. In the lateral notal regions the ridges are not entire but occur as linear series of asymmetrical papillae. At the ante- rior end, one to three ridges continue forward between the rhinophores and run for a short Figure 1: Armina convolvula LaNcE, spec. nov. Dorsal view of living animal. Page 52 Figure 2: Armina convolvula LANCE, spec. nov. Ventral view of living animal with foot rolled over to expose hyponotum. . dorsal fold of veil . mouth . ventral fold of veil . hyponotum . genital aperture . anterior branchial lamellae . renal pore . glandular lamella . side of body 10. anal papilla 11. posterior branchiae 12. foot On MHonPon n= Ne) distance onto the veil. In some individuals the veil is heavily ridged, while in others only a few short ridges interspersed between irregu- lar papillae occur. The foot is broad, very thin, and extends well beyond the lateral and slightly beyond the posterior parts of the body. It is united to the hyponotum by a vertical septum at the posterior end. Anteriorly it is weakly bi- labiate, the upper lip being very thin, with lat- eral corners produced into acute angles (Figure 2). A ventral portion of the veil occurs as a slender, transverse flap (Figure 3), and follows the contour of the anterior margin of the foot. The mouth is situated between the flap and the upper border of the foot. The animal is strikingly colored. The en- tire notum is dark chocolate brown and thickly THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 set with small, irregular, opaque-white spots, most of which are set upon the summits of the notal ridges. Unlike most species of Armina, in which a color pattern of longitudinal stripes is displayed, this species appears to have the white markings more or less uniformly dis- tributed over the entire notum due to the highly convoluted nature of the ridges and the uni- formity of the dark background color. The foot is an intense flesh-pink with three distinct bands of color circumscribing its dorsal mar- gin. On the outer edge a very thin white line occurs flanked by a central broad band of bright orange. Around the inner side runs a wide stripe of opalescent blue-white identical in col- or to that found in Hermissenda crassicornis. A thin line of the same color originates at the upper border of each rhinophore stalk, descends along its anterior border, and becomes more diffused as it proceeds obliquely to terminate at the outer posterior margin of the veil. The stalk and tips of the rhinophores are colorless, but the clavi are reddish brown. The inner surfaces of the fold of the veil are covered with minute white dots, and the hyponotum, foot, and gills are more sparsely flecked with the same. The anterior margin of the veil is orange. No variations in color pattern occurred between the largest and smallest specimens. The longitudinally directed anterior bran- chial lamellae are located on the under surfaces of the lateral notal margins, about one-third of the way back, and consist of about 20 longer lamellae alternating with an equal number of shorter ones (Figure 4a). In different individu- als, one, two, or three of these anterior lamellae Figure 3: Armina convolvula LANCE, spec. nov. Antero-lateral view of living animal. 1. rhinophore 2. anterior edge of notum . dorsal fold of veil . ventral fold of veil . foot angle nN eB OO Vol. 5; No. 1 4 Figure 4: Armina convoluula LANCE, spec. nov. a. anterior branchial lamellae with one gill folded over to expose smaller alternating gill. b. posterior gill. c. anal papilla. extend back into the structurally differentiated posterior branchiae (Figure 4b). These latter gills are fan-shaped, arranged in four or five irregular rows running back nearly to the pos- terior septum, and attached to the subepidermal digestive diverticulae. The smallest are lo- cated nearest the notal margins, becoming in- creasingly larger more medianly where the major branches of the digestive diverticulae emerge. A total of 86 were counted on one side in an individual 58 mm. in length. The rhinophores are 4.4 mm. in height and highly contractile but not retractile within a common subepidermal chamber. They may, however, be completely withdrawn below the level of the notum into temporary individual chambers formed by the stalks rolling outside- in. Such is the case in preserved specimens. At its base the stalk is wider than the clavus but rapidly tapers to a slender neck. The claws Figure 5: Armina convolvula LANCE, spec. nov. a. outer view of jaw plate. b. detail of scales of masticatory process. THE VELIGER Page 53 is nearly vertically perfoliate with 12 to 18 leaves more or less joined along the anterior margin, and tipped with an elongated, slender papilla. The genital aperture is on the right side of the body just anterior to and below the first branchial lamellae. Slightly over halfway back, on the same side of the body, is located an elon- gated anal papilla bearing a group of terminal lobes (Figure 4c). The renal pore is on a line halfway between these two apertures. Armina convolvula ‘LANCE, spec. nov. Figure 6: Radular ‘Teeth . central tooth, x 320 . first two laterals, x 320 two central laterals, x 128 . two outermost laterals, x 320 Qo» In addition to the two types of branchial lamellae, a thick, white, glandular lamella, at- tached close to the edge of the hyponotum, oc- curs about halfway back on either side. The slender jaws are 9 mm. in length, highly arched, and a deep horn color (Figure 5a). The weak masticatory process bears a thickened, slightly undulating margin covered with several rows of scales (Figure 5b). The radula measured 5.1 mm. in length and 4.8 mm. broad and contained 40 rows of teeth in the combination 88:1:88. Central elements consist- .ing of large, elongated, rectangular basal plates bearing cusps with five to nine denticles on ei- Page 54 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 ther side occurred in three specimens examined (Figure 6a). Unlike other species of Armina, the cusp does not bear a single, strong, termi- nal denticle, but two, relatively broad, blunt, median ones. Although the hook of the first lat- eral is shorter and broader, itis not differenti- ated from the rest (Figure 6b). The central laterals bear a highly variable number of mi- nute denticles (usually 10 to 18) toward the tip (Figure 6c). The outermost laterals rapidly de- crease in size and have smooth borders (Figure 6d). Descriptions of the jaws and radula are from paratypes in order to retain the holotype intact. Type Locality G@ Range Approximately 15 miles south of San Felipe, Mexico, on the eastern shore of Baja Califor- Latitude 30° 48' N., Longitude 114° 42' Ww. All specimens were collected in a rocky asso- nia. ciation at the lower edge of the intertidal area during a minus tide. When placed on a sandy substrate in an aquarium, a tendency to burrow was observed. The specific name convolvula was chosen to call attention to the highly convoluted ridges on the notum. The holotype is deposited at the California Academy of Sciences where it is registered as Paleontology Type Collection No. 12 402; it will be incorporated into the Frank Mace MacFar- land Memorial Collection of Nudibranchs. REMARKS Three species of Armina have been de- scribed from the Pacific Coast of North Amer— ica since Cooper's original description of A. ous individuals from San Diego Bay, while typi- cally lacking in detail, were adequate at that time to distinguish the species he was describ- In the ensuing hundred years Bergh (1876) proposed A. vancouverensis, O'Donoghue (1924) described A. columbiana, and Pruvot-Fol (1955) separated A. digueti, all from Cooper's spe- cies and from each other on the basis of minor morphological variations which appear to be highly inconsistent. ing. Marcus (1961) obtained two specimens of Armina from Tomales Bay, California, assigned one to A. columbiana and the other to A. cali- fornica, and suggested that the possession of nuchal papillae by the former was a distinguish- ing characteristic. The remaining species have been separated on the basis of variations in the radula and disposition of the notal ridges and related patterns of pigmentation. It is improb- able that characters of such small magnitude will justify retaining all four as distinct spe- cies, but this can only be determined when series from separate geographical areas have been compared. The propriety of including the present spe- cies in the family Arminidae, according to the concepts of Odhner (1939), is questionable because of the absence of both a common rhino- phoral chamber and an entirely free notal mar- gin. However, the figures for Armina japonica (Baba, 1949) clearly indicate an inter-rhinophoral continuity between the notum and the veil. The present species possesses other dis- tinguishing characteristics of the Arminidae, viz., a similar radula, two types of branchial lamellae on the underside of the notum, a renal pore situated between the anterior genital aper- ture and posterior anus on the right side of the body, a well developed anterior veil, anda lon- gitudinally ridged notum free of appendages. These morphological features, in combination with a behavioral tendency to burrow in sandy substrates, indicate a close affinity to the Ar- minidae. In view of the highly polymorphic nature of the Arminacea, the dearth of species so far as- cribed to this suborder, and our near total lack - of knowledge of the Panamic opisthobranch fauna belonging to this group, I postpone the question of creating a higher monospecific tax- on and suggest the inclusion of this species for the present time in the genus Armina. Literature Cited Baba, Kikutar6é 1949, Opisthobranchia of Sagami Bay collected by Hia Majesty, the Emperor of Japan. 4+2+194+7 pp., pls. 1-50. Iwanami Shoten, Tokyo. Bergh, (Ludwig S,) Rudolph 1876. Neue Beitrage zur Kenntni® der Pleurophyllidi- en. Malakozool. Blatt. 23: 1-14; pl. 1. Cooper, James Graham 1862. Some generaand species of California mollusca. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. 2: 202-207. Marcus, Ernst 1961. Opisthobranch mollusks from California. The Veliger 3 (Suppl., pt. I): 1-84; pls. 1-10. Odhner, Nils 1939. Opisthobranchiate mollusca from the western and northern coasts of Norway. Norske Vi- densk. Selsk. Skr. No. 1, 93 pp. O'Donoghue, Charles H. Kgl. 1924. Notes on the nudibranchiate mollusca from the Vancouver Island region. IV. Trans. Roy. Canad. Inst. 15 (1): 1-33; pls. 1-2. Pruvot-Fol, Alice 1955. Les Arminiadae. Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. sér. 2, 27 (6): 462-468. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 55 Notes & News Notes on the Nomenclature of Certain Mitrid Species BY JEAN M. CATE Conchological Club of Southern California Los Angeles 7, California It has come to my attention that a few un- intentional errors or omissions have appeared in papers I have published in this journal during the past year. I wish to correct them or com- ment on them, as follows. 1, 1960, The Veliger, 3(2): 49. For Mitra nigra (Schroéter, 1788), read Mitra nigra (Gme- lin, 1791). A note regarding this correction has been published by R. T. Abbott (The Veliger, 4(4): 213). 2. 1961. The Veliger, 4(1): 4-8; ibid., 4(2): 76-85. For each citation of Vexillum regina (Sowerby, 1825), read Vexillum regina (Sowerby, 1828). This part of Sowerby's Genera of Shells was actually published three years after the date printed on the flyleaf of the first part. He did cite V. regina in 1825 in the Tankerville Catalogue, but this is a nomen nudum. 3. I have been reminded that Vexillum taeni- atum (Lamarck, 1811) has supposedly been re- placed by V. ornatum (Link, 1807) on the basis of a note by Tomlin in the Nautilus (1920, Nau- tilus, 33: 134). Tomlin's statement follows: "Voluta ornata Link. No fig. quoted, but I do not think that there can be any doubt that the de- scription is a clear and accurate one of taeniata Lamarck as now understood. Mitra ornata will therefore supersede M. taeniata."' For several reasons I did not attempt in my papers (1961, op. cit.) to include complete synonymies for the various species discussed; hence, it seemed unnecessary to refer to the Tomlin notice. It is my opinion that Link's ra- ther vague discussion of Voluta ornata (1807, Beschreibung der Naturalien-Sammlung der Universitat zu Rostock, p. 128) does not consti- tute a valid species description according to the rules of the International Commission of Zool- ogical Nomenclature, and that Tomlin's state- ment, therefore, may be disregarded. Although a good figure of Vexillum taeniatum appears in Ous areas the Encyclopédie Méthodique (1797, Pl. 373, Figs. 7a, 7b) that could presumably have been cited as an illustration, Link made no reference to any figure, as Tomlin pointed out. Lacking such a reference, Link's description could apply to any of several mitrid species, of which the six discussed in J. Cate (1961, op. cit.) are only a few. A literal translation of Link's description (for which I am indebted to Dr. Rudolf Stohler) says only this: ''V.ornata. Similar to the pre- ceding one, ["'V. elegans (= V. plicariag") J. C.] but less striped, and the base not recurved. Each whorl is yellow above, then follows a brown band and the lower portion is white; close to the base the yellow fields and brown bands alternate.'' It would be difficult to prove that Vexillum taeniatum (Lamarck) was the species Link meant by this sketchy description and not V. vittatum (Swainson) or V. compressum (Sowerby), to mention only two possibilities. I consider V. taeniatum (Lamarck, 1811) the first name validly applied to the species in question, until more conclusive proof can be found that this name should be superseded by any other. A Range Extension for Two Species of Hawaiian Terebridae (Gastropoda) BY R. D. BURCH 510 Hadley Street, Houston 3, Texas Hastula lauta (PEASE, 1869) Through the courtesy of Dr. Arthur H. Clarke, Jr., Malacologist, National Museum of Canada, I recently had the opportunity to exam- ine a large number of Terebridae taken by div- ers in waters of six to ten feet off Alabat Island, Philippines (Latitude 14° 20'N., Longitude 122° 0'E.). These specimens were collected by the Norton Expedition, 1959, and donated to the Museum by one of the expedition members, Mr. Pedro de Mesa, Quezon City, Philippine Islands. These specimens bear the National Museum of Canada catalogue number 12002. This material included a number of Tere- bridae species recorded as indigenous in vari- of the Indo-Pacific; however, the following among them have been recorded from Hawaii: Terebra columellaris Hinds, 1843; T. Page 56 babylonia Lamarck, 1822; T. chlorata Lamarck, 1822; T. plumbea Quoy & Gaimard, 1832; T. af- finis Gray, 1834; T. funiculata Hinds, 1843; Hastula verreauxi (Deshayes, 1857); H. casta (Hinds, 1843); and H. lauta (Pease, 1869). Recent references have recorded Hastula lauta as a species endemic to Hawaii and have reported the habitat to be deep water. Mrs. Elizabeth Harrison of Honolulu and Mr. and Mrs. Crawford N. Cate of Los Angeles have generously loaned a large number of spe- cimens of Hastula lauta taken from several Ha- waiian localities, and comparison of these with the Alabat Island specimens shows them to be identical. The Hawaiian specimens display a range of color forms not duplicated in variety by the Alabat Island shells; however, the color is identical in many individual specimens. Un- less marked, mixed specimens from the two areas cannot be separated; color-pattern, size, apical angle, sculpture, rib-count, and other pertinent characteristics being compatible, Ac- cording to collection data accompanying speci- mens of H. lauta in both the Harrison and Cate collections, it has been taken alive at depths ranging between 6 and 100 feet. Hastula lauta can be expected to occur westward from Hawaii to Alabat Island in the Philippines. This major range extension (in degrees Longitude) of the species has been ac- complished while maintaining a relatively nar- row range in Latitude (less than 7°). Additional specimens of Hastula lauta col- lected off Alabat Island can also be found in the collections of Mr. J. E. Norton and Mr. Pedro de Mesa of the Philippines and in the Burch col- lection of Terebridae. A number of Hastula species have a super- ficial resemblance to H. lauta, anda series of each of the following Indo-Pacific species has been considered as comparison material: H. diversa (E. A. Smith, 1901); H. lepida (Hinds, 1843); H. verreauxi (Deshayes, 1857); H. mera (Hinds, 1843); and H. strigillata (Linnaeus, 1787). Terebra contigua PEASE, 1871 The generosity of Mr. W. C. DeWitt of Freeport, Texas, has recently made available to me a number of Terebra specimens which had been collected at Canton Island in the Phoe- nix Island Group, rounded to the nearest degree as Lat. 3° South, Long. 172° West. These were a part of the collection made at that island by Mr. Raymond C. Naumann of Angleton, Texas} during March through August, 1942. Mr. Nau- THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 mann has since furnished additional collection data for these specimens which show them to have been littoral or dredged off the east and south beaches of Canton Island. Of the three Terebra species collected by Mr. Naumann at Canton Island, ail have been recorded from Hawaii as follows: T. dimidiata (Linnaeus, 1758), one specimen, an albino of this species dredged on the south side of the island; T. cancellata Quoy & Gaimard, 1833, two spe- cimens littoral on the east beach; T. contigua Pease, 1871, three specimens littoral on the east and south beaches. Terebra contigua has been recorded as a species endemic to Hawaii where it is consid- ered as rare; however, it can be expected to occur southward and westward from Hawaii to Canton Island. Terebra contigua is a very distinctive spe- cies, difficult to confuse with others of the small Terebras; however, several species have some superficial resemblance to it. Series of a num- ber of Indo-Pacific species in my collection have been compared in establishing this identi- fication and range extension; among these are the following which have been recorded from Hawaii: T. plumbea Quoy & Gaimard, 1832; T. nitida Hinds, 1843; T. clappi Pilsbry, 1920; and T. rosacea Pease, 1869. Acknowledgment I wish to express my thanks to Dr. Clarke for having provided his Alabat Island specimens and for his permission to cite them. The inter- est and generous assistance of Elizabeth Har- rison and Crawford and Jean Cate in loaning their collections of Hawaiian Terebridae is ac- knowledged with gratitude. Mr. de Mesa's original contribution of specimens and his sub- sequent kindness in confirming the collection data is very much appreciated. My friend, Bill DeWitt, has been of great assistance with the Canton Island specimens, as well as with other species cited here; while Mr, Naumann has been patient with his time and generous with speci- mens from his collections. Literature Cited Hawaiian Shell News 1960. Provisional check list of gastropods recorded from the Hawaiian chain, Terebra. 8 (4): 8; and 8 (5): 8. Tinker, Spencer Wilkie 1958, Pacific sea shells (rev. ed.). family, pp.. 184-200; illus. Weaver, Clifton S. 1960-1961. The genera Terebra and Hastula. marine mollusks } (1 to 9 incl.); 1-36; illus. The auger shell Hawaii. Vol. 5; No. 1 THE Destroyed Type Material BY GALE G. SPHON, JR. Santa Barbara Museum of Natural History Santa Barbara, California On April 12, 1962, the Ornithology- Mammalogy and the Entomology—Conchology laboratories and collections of the Santa Bar- bara Museum of Natural History were destroyed by fire. The former was completely destroyed and very serious damage was done to the latter. Among the things lost in the Invertebrate De- partment was the small, but rapidly growing, collection of molluscan type material. Even though there were no holotypes involved, it is felt by all involved that the complete loss of our paratypes and hypotypes should be reported. The following list includes my own type material which was at the Museum and was also lost in the fire. PARATYPES Acanthina tyrianthina Berry (1 SBMNH; 1 Sphon) Ariela mitriformis Shasky (2 Sphon) Berthelinia belvederica Keen & Smith (3 SBMNH) Chione picta Willett (figured paratype) (1 SBMNH) Clathrodrillia bicarinata Shasky (2 Sphon) Crassispira nymphia Pilsbry & Lowe (2 SBMNH) Ischnochiton catalinae Willett (1 SBMNH) Lamellaria sharoni Willett (1 SBMNH) Lithophaga attenuata rogersi Berry (1 Sphon) Melanella randolphi | Vanatta (2 SBMNH) Mitra directa Berry (1 Sphon) Nassarius howardae Chace (1 SBMNH; 1 Sphon) Ocenebra keenae Bormann(1 SBMNH) Pseudomelatoma (Burchia) redondo@msis Burch (1 SBMNH) Trivia elsiae Howard & Sphon (1 SBMNH; 1! Sphon) Turritella anactor Berry (1 SBMNH) HYPOTYPES Cancellaria obesa Sowerby (1 Sphon) cited by Shasky, The Veliger, 4(1), 1961 Crassispira grandimaculata (Cc. B. Adams, 1852) (1 Sphon) cited by Sphon, The Veliger, 3(1), 1960 Crassispira pluto Pilsbry & Lowe (? SBMNH) cited by McLean, Trans, San Diego Soc, ~ Nat. Hist., 12(28), 1961 VELIGER Page 57 Iselica ovoidea Gould (? SBMNH) cited by McLean, Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., 12(28), 1961 Macrarene coronadensis Stohler (1 SBMNH) hypotype no. 16 cited by Stohler, Proc. Calif. Acad: Sceiz. 29(1l)5 1959 Mitra erythrogramma Tomlin (1 Sphon) cited by Sphon, The Veliger, 3(1), 1960 Mitra fultoni E. A. Smith (1 Sphon) figured by Sphon, The Veliger, 4(1), 1961. Trivia californiana (Sowerby) (? SBMNH) cited by McLean, Trans. San Diego Soc, Nat. Hist., 12(28), 1961 Trivia solandri (Sowerby) (? SBMNH) cited by McLean, Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., 12(28), 1961 Truncatella bairdiana C. B. Adams (? SBMNH) cited by McLean, Trans, San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist., 12(28), 1961 Typhis lowei Pilsbry (1 Sphon) cited by Shas- ky, The Veliger, 4(1), 1961 A Correction BY ALLYN G. SMITH California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco 18, California I am indebted to Dr. H. B. Baker for call- ing attention to an oversight in my article "The Type Species of Lepidopleurus Leach in Risso, 1826"'", which appeared in The Veliger, vol. 2, no. 4, pp. 75-77, April 1, 1960. In this (p. 75, col. 1, line 5) the selection of Chiton cajetanus as the type species was attributed to J. E. Gray, 1847. As Dr. Baker correctly points out, A.N. Herrmannsen in "Indicis Generum Malacozo- orum Primordia. . .", vol. 1, p. 582, designated the same species as type with a publication date of May 25, 1847. This has precedence over Gray's selection, which was published in No- vember of the same year. While this is of rela- tively minor significance, in the interest of accuracy, it is suggested that ''Herrmannsen" be substituted for "J. E. Gray" on page 75. Also, for completeness, Herrmannsen's work should be added to the list of selected refer- ences as it is a most important one in taxonomic work on the mollusks. Literature Cited Smith, Allyn G. 1960. The type species of Lepidopleurus Leach in Risso, 1826. The Veliger 2 (4): 75-77; pl. 17. Page 58 Covers for Volume 4 have been prepared, exactly like those for volume 3. Due to Postal Regulations we are unable to include a copy with the current number. Those of our subscribers whowish to obtain a copy may do so by sending 25 cents to Mrs. Balch, 1150 Brown Avenue, Lafayette, California. We esti- mate that this will cover the actual cost of pack- ing and mailing. Please, do not send postage stamps in payment. The same postal regulations made it neces - sary forus to bind the index and front cover in- to the last issue of volume 4, Information Desk What's the Difference? Topotype - Homeotype - Plastotype Lectotype - Neotype BY R. STOHLER Department of Zoology University of California, Berkeley 4, California Secondary types include the topotype, ho- meotype, plastotype, lectotype, and neotype. The sequence in which we listed these is not necessarily in the order of their respective im- portance. We chose this arrangement rather because the first of these types need little ex- plaining beyond their definition. We designate as topotypes any specimens that come from the type locality, obtained at any time other than when the holotype was col- lected, Of course, in order to be a true topo- type the specimen must come from the actual type locality. By this we mean that if the type locality was originally designated as ''Pacific Ocean" not every specimen of that species col- lected anywhere in the Pacific Ocean is a topo- type. If the original type locality designation was proper, then we should know a very nar- rowly circumscribed area, possibly a small ravine or a large rock, exactly identified and identifiable. And then all subsequently found specimens from that ravine or that rock will be topotypes,. THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 A homeotype is a specimen of a particular species that was compared by a very competent observer with the primary type material, be it the holotype and paratypes, or with the syntypes (and the older cotypes). Of course, the term implies not merely that a specimen was com- pared with the primary type but also that it was found to agree in every important detail. Other terms have been used for this kind of material, such as comparotype, but such terms are not desirable and the word homeotype is the offi- cially accepted one. The plastotype is a three-dimensional re- production of the primary type. This is often resorted to in the case of petrefactions where frequently plaster casts are relatively easily made. However, with the modern techniques of latex rubber reproductions, more complex types can be reproduced faithfully. For the time be- ing such material is expensive, but it may be anticipated that the day will come when the technique has been so developed that reproduc- tions of the actual type specimens will be rela- tively inexpensive and then such plastotypes may be sent for examination to qualified work- ers. Today we can often obtain good photo- graphs of primary types from the responsible repositories. However, even the best photo- graph does not completely take the place of the actual specimen. And even stereoscopic color photographs leave something — though admit- tedly not much —to be desired. Of greater importance than the three types already discussed are the lectotype and the neo- type. If the original author failed to designate a particular specimen as the holotype (and, of course, assuming that the type lot contains more than just one specimen), then it is the privilege of the first competent reviewer of the group concerned to select one particular specimen from among the syntypes (or cotypes, as the case may be) and designate that specimenas the lectotype. This then becomes equivalent to the holotype. Of course, the reviewer will exercise the best judgment, carefully comparing every specimen in the lot with the original description and endeavoring to ascertain which particular specimen the original author would most proba- bly have designated as the holotype, had he really done so. If the first reviewer of the group does not exercise this prerogative, then any subsequent reviewer has the same privilege. But once a lectotype has been selected, there can be no further change. The lectotype has then become just as important as the primary type. In fact, it can be considered as a primary type since it came from the original type mate- It is unnecessary to stress that the lecto- the rial. type should be preserved as carefully as Vol. 5; No. 1 holotype should be. It is desirable that the primary type mate- rial be preserved with the greatest of care, protected against loss by any conceivable means — theft, fire, explosion, etc. This is one reason why the original author should select as repository for his holotypes an institution which can guarantee the utmost in protection and why it gives me cold shivers to think of some type material retained by the original authors during their lifetimes. No matter how careful a person may be, as long as he lives in a private resi- dence his house may burn to the ground and ev- erything contained therein may be completely destroyed. But not only private residences are subject to destruction. Public museums can be destroyed by fire and earthquake; collections may be looted by ignorant — or not so ignorant — military personnel in overrun countries dur- ing war times. In short, in spite of the greatest care, it is still possible that the original type material may become lost. If the author had available a number of paratypes and had these distributed widely or at least as widely as pos- sible, then one of the paratypes may be selected as a lectotype. There are, however, also very valid reasons for an entire type lot, including many paratypes, to be kept together. In any event, if the original type lot is lost through accident or misdeed, then it may become neces- Sary, in order to avoid confusion, to select a specimen of the particular species andto desig- nate it as neotype. This is, however, a very serious step and one not to be taken lightly. In fact, the International Commission on Zoologi- cal Nomenclature has established rules which are much more stringent than those applicable to describing a new taxon. Among these rules we mention: the person selecting a neotype must first establish beyond a reasonable doubt that the original type material is completely de- stroyed or lost beyond hope of recovery (this holds true especially with type material of early authors; such type specimens were often sold and frequently replacedin collections with ''bet- ter'' specimens); the selection or an adequate reference to the selection must be published in the Bulletin of Zoological Nomenclature; the newly established type (neotype) must be de- scribed as accurately as possible and deposited in a recognized repository, just as a holotype must be deposited; the author also must furnish adequate evidence that his identification is cor- rect. Within five years after such publication in the Bulletin other workers may challenge this selection if in their opinion it was unwise or in- correct, In such a case the International Com- mission will probably review all the evidence and make a final decision. THE VELIGER Page 59 Books, Periodicals, Pamphlets FOSSILS: AN INTRODUCTION TO PREHISTORIC LIFE by William H. Matthew, III Barnes & Noble, New York. Pp. xii + 337, 180 figures in text. $2.25. [Also available in cloth, $5.75] This book fills a long-felt need for a clearly written guide that one can recommend to laymen and beginning students of paleontology. It cov- ers, briefly yet concisely, all the background information needed to start the study of fossils: how they are formed, what uses they serve in scientific work, how to collect and identify them, and how to arrange the collection. In ad- dition there are chapters that give a sketch of Earth's history, the history of paleontology, the history of man — eleven chapters in all. Five appendices provide useful supplementary infor- mation: the main divisions of the organic world, a glossary of terms, a list of publications, a condensed list of geological information centers of the United States, and a partial list of muse- ums displaying fossils. Author and publishers are to be congratu- lated on the appearance of the book. The illus- trations, most of which are culled from previous literature, are well chosen and make the work useful not only to the layman but also to the professional. In a compendium of such broad coverage, some misstatements are to be ex- pected. The number here seems to be unusually low, which augurs well for the usefulness of this book, Two minor errors were noted: the text states (p. 219) that the beak in the pelecypod is "commonly located on the anterior (front) end of the shell’, but fortunately Figure 110 cor- rectly shows it as part of the dorsal margin; also (p. 184), pelecypods donot range from Early Cambrian time, for the first that are un- questionable are from latest Cambrian or Early Ordovician strata. These, however, are minor defects in a book that can be recommended as a good introduction to paleontology. MK PROCEEDINGS OF THE MALACOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON Vol. 34, Pt. 6. December 1961, "Size and sex in Cypraecidae” by R. J. Griffiths. ; MK Page 60 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 COMMON SEASHORE LIFE OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA by Joel Hedgpeth and Sam Hinton, Naturegraph Company, Healdsburg, California. Pp. 65, 10 color illustra- tions, 160 textfigs. 1961. Cloth, $3.25; paper, $1.75. If you are an amateur naturalist or a seri- student of shore life and are fortunate enough to be studying or holidaying along the southern California coast, you will find this compact and elucidating manual an ous invaluable guide for identifying the more common seashore animals and marine plants living from Point Conception to the Mexican border. The intro- duction gives a brief outline of the geography and the climatic and tidal conditions, particu- larly in the La Jolla area (with map). The text by Joel W. Hedgpeth, Director of the University of the Pacific's Marine Station of Biological Science at Dillon Beach, graphi- cally describes the flora and fauna by life zones in typical locales. Excellent black—and-white illustrations, though some mislabeled, are by Sam Hinton, Science Director of the Museum- Aquarium of the Scripps Institution of Oceano- graphy, who has also written the section on the birds. The last half of the guide provides a valu- able systematic list in the form of a simple synoptic key of the common and most spectacu- lar seaweeds and animals by Vinson Brown, il- lustrated by Carol Lyness. This includes many organisms not covered in the more detailed de- scriptions, which will help beginning collectors and students in naming their specimens. While emphasis throughout the book is on animals, enough attention is given to marine algae and to various ecological factors for the reader to un- derstand the natural relationships of seashore life. The key provides further understanding by outlining the relationships between and within the broad groups of marine life in an easily un- derstood style. The authors have included a list of 12 suggested references for a more detailed study. The index is based primarily on com- mon names. Although the manual deals specifically with the life along the coastal waters of southern California, enough of the plants and animals de- scribed are found also in waters to the north to make it useful to students of the seashore along the coast of central and northern California. Mary Jo Ryan San Francisco State College CONTRIBUICAO A PALEONTOLOGIA DO ESTADO DO PARA. Revisa6 da Familia Pectinidae da Formagao Pirabas (Mioceno Inferior) com a descripgao de novas espécies. VI — MOLLUSCA — PELECYPODA by C. S. Ferreira Arquivos do Museu Nacional (Rio de Janeiro), vol. 50, pp. 135-165, 4 pls. December 31, 1960. This work contains descriptions, discus- sions, keys, and illustrations of 12 species (two doubtfully identified) from the Pirabas forma- tion in Brazil considered to be of early Miocene age. The species are placed in two genera, Amusium with one species, and Chlamys with the remainder which are arranged under Chlamys, Argopecten, and Leptopecten, The following are described as new: Chlamys jap- ericensis, n. sp., C. (Argopecten) tetristriata, n.sp., C. (A.) coopericellus, n.sp., C. (A.) ca- panemensis, n.sp., and C, (Leptopecten) pira- bensis, n. sp. Of special interest to West American workers is the form cited as ''Chlamys (Lepto- pecten) cf. latiaurata (Conrad, 1837)". Conrad's species has not been reported occurring before Pliocene time in the eastern Pacific. Judging from the illustrations only, the Brazilian form resembles some species of Leptopecten de- scribed from the late Cenozoic of the Caribbean region more closely than it does the West American species. LGH BRAIN AND BEHAVIOR IN CEPHALOPODS by M. J. Wells Stanford University Press, Stanford, California. Illustrated. June 1962. About $4.50. A detailed description of the structure and behavior of the class of mollusks that includes octopuses, squids, and cuttlefish, with empha- sis on nervous organization. JQB Vol. 5; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 61 SEA SHELLS OF THE WORLD by R, Tucker Abbott in consultation with Herbert S. Zim Illustrations by George and Marina Sandstrom. A Golden Nature Guide, Golden Press, New York. 160 pp., 790 figs. in color. 1962. $1.- (limpbound); $3.50 (library edition). There has long been a need for a guide to the commoner shells of the world, which now is met by a book of handy size. The color illus- trations are large enough for use in identifying, the descriptions are short but adequate, and the selection is satisfactory. An introductory sec- tion gives the fundamentals on distribution, classification, and organization of mollusks. Indications of size are included for each form, and grouping within family categories shows geographic occurrence. terms are kept to a minimum; however, scien- tific names for each species are given, with name of author (but not date). Parentheses for authors' names are omitted, and common names (mostly coined from the scientific name) are given primary place in boldface type, ahead of the scientific name. Formal systematic Proofreading and attention to detail seem to have been done with care; one small over- sight on page 72 is the attributing of Murex re- gius Swainson, 1821, and M. brassica Lamarck, 1822, both to Gmelin (1791). This is a book that one can recommend with confidence to laymen, and even the professional workers will find it convenient for reference. MK BETWEEN PACIFIC TIDES by Edward F. Ricketts and Jack Calvin Third edition, revised by Joel W. Hedg- peth. Stanford University Press, Stan- ford, California. May 1962. $8.75. Includes a new chapter on marine ecology and a revised bibliography. Contains 105 pages of photographs and drawings. JQB NEW LAND MOLLUSKS FROM MADAGASCAR AND MEXICO by Fritz Haas, Curator Emeritus Chicago Natural History Museum Fieldiana—Zoology, vol. 44, no. 3, pp. 19-23, figs. 10-12. November 15, 1961. A short taxonomic paper describing a new genus and three new species of land snails, as follows: Malarina, n. gen. of the Cyclophoracea Malarina hova, n.sp. from Madagascar Bulimulus (Rhabdotus) fonsecanus, n. sp. from the Gulf of Fonseca, San Salvador (or Nicaragua) Polygyra (Erymodon) hertleini, n.sp. from Tenacatita Bay, Jalisco, Mexico. Each of these three species is illustrated with excellent black-and-white photographs of the type specimens. AGS QUEENSLAND AND GREAT BARRIER REEF SHELLS by O.H. Rippingale and D. F. McMichael The Jacaranda Press Pty., Ltd. Pp. 216 (each page 82 x 114 inches), 29 col- or plates (each plate 10 x Ts inches). 1961. $17.00 (also available is a limited number, deluxe edition signed by the authors, numbered, in special binding and slip case for $28.00). Mr. Rippingale is a talented water-colorist as well as being a conchologist of considerable repute, and Dr. McMichael is Curator of Shells at the Australian Museum in Sydney. The 29 color plates illustrate about 600 species. Shells are arranged in their classes and families, each is fully described with details of shape, color, size, and habitat in the text accompanying each plate. JQB Page 62 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 1 SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCA, PELECYPODA by Bernard C. Cotton Curator of Mollusks South Australian Museum Australian Government Printer, Mel- bourne. Pp. 363, 350 textfigs. 1961. 24s, 6d (about $5.00). This book replaces the preliminary work published in 1938 and long out of print. It in- cludes all references, lists of localities, and general information on all species. The spe- cies are fully described and figured so that with the help of keys, the 334 species may be readily determined. The figures are clear, and the keys to both genera and species are of great value to the student of other faunas, JQB VENUS: THE JAPANESE JOURNAL OF MALACOLOGY Vol. 21, No. 4. December 196}. "The shells and radulae in Berthelinia, a bivalved Sacoglossan genus" by Kikutar6 Baba. "Cytotaxonomy of the Euthyneuran gastro- pods" by Akihiko Inaba. "On the Family Triphoridae (Gastropoda) from Amami Islands (2)'’ by Sadao Kosuge. "Descriptions of fifteen new species of Japanese shells'' by Tadashige Habe. "Description of four new cancellariid spe- cies, with a list of the Japanese species of the Family Cancellariidae"’ by Tadashige Habe. "Biogeographical notes on Japanese Tere- bridae"’ by Katura Oyama. "On Mikadotrochus salmiana found off Ch6shi, East Japan'' by Tokio Shikama [Family Pleurotomariidae]. "Note on a second occurrence of Erosaria guttata in Japan'' by Tokio Shikama, "On the breeding of Cantharidus callichroa jessoensis (Schrenck)"' by Yoshio Kojima [Fam- ily Trochidae]. MK BRITISH SLUGS (Pulmonata: Testacellidae; Arionidae, Limacidae) by H. E. Quick Bulletin of the British Museum (Natu- ral History, Zoology), vol. 6, no. 3, pp. 105-226, pls. 1-2, figs. 1-19, 23 dis- tributional maps. London. March 1960. 45 shillings. An excellent, up-to-date, comprehensive work on the slugs of Great Britain, the first since J. W. Taylor's classic monograph of the land and freshwater mollusca of the British Isles, published 1902-07. For anyone interested in slugs as garden pests or otherwise, this work is a necessity. American students will need it as a reference because of the many British species that have been introduced into Califor- nia and elsewhere in the United States. The monochrome drawings of various species illus- trated in the plates are helpful. AGS Received Too Late for Review in This Issue; THE GENUS TUBUAIA PULMONATA, ACHATINELLIDAE by Yoshio Kondo Bulletin 224, Bernice P. Bishop Muse- um, Honolulu 17, Hawaii. 1962. $1.50. THE BATHYAL AND ABYSSAL XY LOPHAGA (PHOLADIDAE, BIVALVIA) by J¢rgen Knudsen Galathea Report, vol. 5. Danish Science Press, Ltd., Copenhagen, Denmark. 1961. 20 Danish Kroner. A Quarterly published by NORTHERN CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL CLUB Berkeley, California VOLUME 5 OcTOBER 1, 1962 NUMBER 2 CONTENTS The Drilling Habit of Capulus danieli (CRossE) (Mollusca : Gastropoda) (Plate 7; 5 Textfigures ) A102 GINA © Rion i err Re eure en SR Nem: Si hi Ra ae ae Ye Marine Pelecypoda from the North Alaskan Coast (1 Textfigure) ISUNIGUNDEBENUPSEMANN ( gamer NE jelies a.s° es we Rue a ee la” oi OF, Cypraea chinensis GMELIN, 1791 (Gastropoda) in Hawaii (Plates 8, 9) RAN ROR DM Ny CAPE ein aa en hese h tke oe 3 ia) wif ah teh) coterie ley Mupeaeee Mig 76! Aspects of Ctenidial Feeding in Immature Bivalves (2 Textfigures ) CHARTESP REN SDASEK es mime aren are rn iyenemn aes ol > la meen aes A ar ial eee A New Species of Mitra (Gastropoda) from Hawaii (Plates to, 11) Alien lion OV ACI amnion toes ee caiod Gregan (elses. woh aMiGN iT. sales Jz ec ues aye OO Hybrids between Cypraea tigris LINNAEUS, 1758 and Cypraea pantherina SOLANDER, 1786 (Mollusca : Gastropoda) (1 Textfigure ) PRAISE, Bhs SCTETOUDYB iy hye ey! Vegi Gia) acts fe Ua a ae yeaa ue MR aS Sa Preliminary Report on Time Elements involved in Hydrotropism in Helix aspersa (Gastropoda : Pulmonata) Following Dehydration (3 Textfigures ) HREDELIERZBERG cp ANNE LIERZBERG) 9. 6 ee ee ee es ee BF [Continued on Inside Front Cover | Subscriptions payable in advance to N. C. M. C. $ 4.50 per volume Domestic; $ 4.80 in the Americas; $ 5.00 all other Foreign Countries. $ 1.80 for single copies of current volume only. Send subscriptions to: Mrs. PHorBe Batcu, Treasurer, 1150 Brown Avenue, Lafayette, California. Address all other correspondence to: Dr. R. STOHLER, Editor, Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley 4, California. Second-Class Postage paid at Berkeley, California CONTENTS [ CONTINUED ] NOWES ‘SNEWS ©5003) Sa) es pete cea Go ag see ee The Types of Lamellaria sharonae WiLLETT, 1939 (Gastropoda). JEAN & CRAWFORD CATE Notes on Some Tropical West American Mollusks. EuGcENE Coan Cowrie Holotype Located. Crawrorp N. Cate INFORMATION DESK 93 Use of the Term “‘Hypotype.” R. Tucker Assorr Comments on a Paper by R. Tucker ABBOTT. Myra KEEN Disposition of Type Specimens. Rupoir STOHLER BOOKS, PERIODICALS & RAMP ES is nisin ea ee a 97 Note: The various taxa above species are indicated by the use of different type styles as shown by the following examples: ORDER, Suborder, DIVISION, Subdivision, SECTION, SUPERFAMILY, FamiLy, Subfamily, Genus, (Subgenus). Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 63 The Drilling Habit of Capulus danieli (Crosse) (Mollusca : Gastropoda) BY VIRGINIA ORR Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Philadelphia 3, Pennsylvania (Plate 7; 5 Textfigures) In 1858, Crosse described Pileopsis danieli, anew species from the littoral waters of New Caledonia. In later pages of the same journal, he called it Capulus danieli andcompared it with the well-known European Capulus ungaricus (Linnaeus). {Dall, 1889, p. 287, thought Capulus danieli was "almost certainly’ Patella calyptra Martyn, 1784. However, the name is not avail- able (Opinion 456, Int. Comm. Zool. Nomencla- ture) and the species came from the northwest coast of America. } Capulus danieli is smaller andhigher thanits cap-shaped European counter - part and its thin shell is a redder brown. The shining, white interior of the shell is usually flushed with rich reddish spots. The inherent sculpture is fine radial striae but the sedentary habit of much of its adult life induces the growth of gross, flexuous, radial ribs which corre- spond to those of its substrate, a common New Caledonian pecten, Comptopallium vexillum (Reeve, 1853). Capulus danieliis probablya protandric hermaphrodite like C. ungaricus. While on a Natural Science Foundation - Academy of Natural Sciences Expedition, De- cember andJanuary, 1960-61, Mr. and Mrs. George F. Kline and the author, with the able helpof Mr. Louis Devanbez of theSouth Pacific Commission, Noumea, dredged several exam- ples of this uncommon Capulus from shallow water near Noumea, New Caledonia. Additional specimens were generously given to the Acad- emy by Mr. and Mrs. André Lepelerie, of Noumea, who dredged the shells from the same areain April, 1959. Inevery case but one, Cap- ulus danieli had bored a hole through the valve and mantle of its living 'host'', Comptopallium vexillum. Data onthese specimens are sum- marized in Table l. Other members of the family Capulidae run © the gamut from independent, ciliary feeders (some Capulus) to true parasites (Thyca). A wide variety of feeding habits may be observed within a single species. Capulus ungaricus, for instance, may attach to a dead shell or stone and spend its sedentary life filtering food from water drawn in by its own efficient ctenidium. Or, it may attach to the anterior-half margin of Chlamys opercularis (Linnaeus) where it benefits from the strong inhalant current set up by the scallop's larger gills. Sharman (1956, pp. 446-449) saw individuals of C. ungaricus notch the edge of the pecten valve by removing a piece of shell with the radula. On four occa - sions the proboscis was extended over the notched edge of the valve to pick food particles from between the margins of the pecten's velum. This tendency toward antagonistic symbiosis is furthered by the shell-boring and food-piracy habits of C. danieli. The positions of drill-holes of Capulus dan- ieli and of presumed capulid scars on their pecten "hosts" are illustrated in textfigure l. ENeprenits OG OG Figure 1: Diagrams of positions of Capulus danieli (Crosse) and their drill-holes on Comptopallium vexillum (REEVE). Specimens A to C and H on left valves, D to G on right valves. Letters cor- respond to those in Table 1. (x 0.2) Page 64 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Table 1 (measurements in millimeters ) Capulus danieli (Crosse) Complopallium vexillum (REEVE) Specimen | Station Length Height Sex A K 511 23.5 11.5 © B K 511 18.8 9.5 fe) C K 511 20.7 scar only D K 511 18.1 10.2 9 E K 519 20.3 9.6 fc) E 31 13.8 5-9 fe) G BI 15-7 scar only H 31 7.9 3.6 fe I K 510 20.7 10.5 J K 554 20.9 11.2 K K 508 22.8 12.5 Length! Valve Hole Diam. Position 42.0 Left 1.6 Anterior 49.6 Left 1.9 Anterior 41.6 Left nie Anterior 41.2 Right 1.8 Anterior 38.6 Right 2.0 Anterior 32.2 Right 1.9 Anterior 40.5 Right ae Anterior 44.0 Left none? Posterior All collecting stations were near Noumea, New Caledonia. All collections were made by the Natural Science Foundation - Academy Expedition, except at station 31. Station 31: about 26 feet, weed, Anse Vata Bay. 4 April, 1959. A. & M. A. Lapelerie leg. Stations K 508, K 510, & K 511: 9 to 15 feet, sand and turtle grass. December, 1960 and January, 1961. Station K 519: 36 feet, sand, weeds, 5 miles ENE Dumbea Pass, off Noumea. 20 Dec., 1960. Anse Vata Bay. Station K 554: 20 feet, sand, weeds, Baie de L’Orphelinat. 1 . antero-posterior * healed * open Although either right or left valve may be pierced, the hole is anterior and dorsal, over or near the pecten's mouth. The location of these holes, which give access to the highest concentration of food within the pecten's mantle cavity, is too uniform to be the product of chance. An examination of the preserved soft parts of Capulus danieli and Comptopallium vexillum gives further clues to the nature of this symbi- osis. The gut of the capulids was filled with loosely-formed fecal pellets, containing pieces of algae, sand grains, and mucus—characterist tic of many ciliary feeders, including Compto- pallium vexillum. One would expect less solid matter in the feces of a true parasite feeding 14 January, 1961. 4 5 are “clean” area under Capulus, no signs of drilling upon fleshand fluids. Excepting the drilled hole through the mantle, the soft parts of four of the drilled pectens examined were intact and un- scarred. Therefore, on the basis of uniformity of drill hole positionand gut content of the Cap- ulus and the absence of damage to the pecten's soft parts, this appears to be a case of antago- nistic symbiosis, not true parasitism. The Capulus steals food from the labial palps and food- gathering tracts of the pecten. A presumption is made that the hole through the pecten valve is drilled. This seems rea- sonable in the light of Sharman's observations mentioned earlier and the beveled nature of the hole. Unfortunately, none of the specimens collected were in the process of drilling andthe Explanation of Plate 7 Capulus danieli (CRosse) and Comptopallium vexillum (REEVE) from Noumea, New Caledonia. Figure 1: Specimen ‘“‘B” in situ on left valve of pecten. Figure 3: Capulid scar and drill hole on left valve of pecten “B”. Figure 5: Side view of veliger from brood sac of Capulus danieli, Figure 6: Part of radula, Capulus danieli, specimen ““D” (x 160) on right valve of pecten. specimen “‘A” (x 170). Figure 2: Side view of specimen “B” (x 3). Figure 4: Specimen “D” in situ Tue VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 2 [Orr] Plate 7 Figure 2 Orr, photo Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 65 radulae of five specimens examined showed only slight wear of the first three rows of teeth. The radula of an actively drilling specimen would probably show extensive wear. The radula of specimen ''D'' is shown in Plate 7 and textfigure 5. This and the radulae of two other adult females had about 28 rows of hardened and about 8 rows of nascentteeth, That of the hermaphrodite specimen ’'H’' had 20 hardened rows and 8 rows of nascent teeth. In specimen ''H’' the plates of the median and lat— eral teeth were slightly narrower but otherwise resembled those of the females. Specimen "'H" is particularly interesting because it is the only adherent Capulus danieli in our material which had not drilled. It is the only specimen attached to the posterior half of the scallop's shell, where it could not have ben - efited from the inhalant currents. Specimen "H'' is, therefore, the only one of our New Cal- edonian capulids which was an independent cili- ary feeder. It is also the only one which did not have the anterior third of its shell clogged by a brood sac of developing eggs or veligers. Figure 2: Dorsal view of head of Capulus danieli (CROSSE), specimen H, showing atrophied verge v. (x 8.0) Yonge (1938) has shown that in the closely- related species Capulus ungaricus, food brought in by the inhalant current gathers in mucus- laden masses on the upper surface of the propo- dium, where it is picked up by the long, grooved proboscis and ingested. The efficiency of the current and food-gathering area must be im- paired by the brood sac, which in C. danieli is also attached to the upper surface of the propo- dium. In textfigure 4, the brood sac (bs) has been pushed down and to the left to show the capulid's head and proboscis (p). Inall five preserved females examined, the head and most of the proboscis were buried in a hollow of the sac. The tip of the proboscis was folded posteriorly along the snail's right margin. sharply from the position of the hermaphrodite capulid ''H"’ shown in textfigures 2 and 3. The This differs | Figure 3: Ventral view of Capulus danieli (Crosse), specimen H; p- grooved proboscis, f - foot, m- mantle. (x 4.0) position of the female's proboscis bent posteri- orly along the right side explains the peculiar position of the drill-hole, especially if the hole is drilled after egg-laying commences. The duration of the egg-laying and brooding period is not known. Females with relatively undeveloped eggs and those with well-developed veligers (Plate 7, Fig. 5) were collected both April 4, 1959 and late December, 1960. The veligers of specimens ''A”' and ''F”' had well- developed eyes and a velum which appeared to be bilobed, with lateralindentations oneach lobe not unlike the velum of Capulus ungaricus (Lebour, 1937). However, the method of our capulid veligers' preservation, within the brood sacand in 70% grain alcohol, precluded detailed study. It was not possible to determine whether Capulus danieli veligers are echinospira as are Capulus ungaricus. Side view of Capulus danieli (Crosse), specimen A; bs- brood sac, ms - mantle scar, other Figure 4: letters as in Figure 3. (x 1.2) Page 66 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Figure 5: Half-row of radular teeth. > NG Capulus dameli (CROSSE), specimen D (x 86.0) Textfigures 1 to 5 from preserved material. The effect of this food piracy upon the pec- ten is probably not seriously detrimental. Four of the largest undrilled and four drilled pectens collected the same time and place (Sta. K511) averaged 43.7 and 43.6 mm. in length (dorso- ventrally) respectively. This isan insignificant difference. Although we did not collect any capulids attached to dead pectens, one live pec- ten had healed a hole presumably drilled bya Capulus. The characteristic shell scar was lightly incrusted, indicating that the capulid had dropped off its "host'’ pecten days or even weeks before it was collected. A search of the literature revealed one account of shell-boring by a capulid. Garrard (1961, p.12) described Capulus sycophanta,a new species from Keppel Bay, Queensland, Australia, which closely resembles and is pos- sibly conspecific with C. danieli. Every ad- herent specimen of C. sycophanta examined by Garrard had bored a hole throu gh the shell of its "host'' scallop, Amusium balloti Bernardi. Garrard's illustrated specimen occupied a po- sition similar to our specimen ''F"' but nearer the ventral margin. It was over the food-gath- ering tract along the tips of the Amusium's gills. Schepman (1909, p. 119) reported a speci- men of ''Amalthea'' danieli affixed to the gastro- pod ''Gyrineum"' cuspidatum Rve. It was"... easily loosened leaving a scar.''but evidently had not drilled. There was no mention ofa brood sac. A. W. B. Powell, of the Auckland Museum, said the New Zealand species, Cap- ulus calcareus Suter, 1909, attaches tothe columella and canal of the buccinid Penion dila- tata (Quoy & Gaimard, 1833) but does not even etch out a shell scar, much less bore. It is frequently found on dead shells (written com- Neither of these "hosts" are cil — iary feeders. Althoughtwo Eastern Pacific capulids, Capulus californicus Dall, 1900 and Capulus sericeus Burch and Burch, 196lare commensal on pectens (Pecten diegensis Dall munication). and Pecten sericeus Hinds, respectively) neither species has drilled its host. One specimen of~ C. californicus in the Academy of Natural Sci- ences of Philadelphia collection and the figured specimen of C. sericeus are attached to the anterior-dorsal part of the pecten's valves where they probably benefit by the pectens' inhalant currents. The development of a drilling habit in the New Caledonian and Australian capulids, Cap - ulus danieli and C. sycophanta, presents an interesting problem. The advantage of a pre- concentrated food supply during the critical brooding periodis obvious. It is surprising, therefore, that the habit has not developed in more species. Possibly the duration of the brooding period in these species is compara- tively longer than in non-drilling species. How the Capulus locates its drilling site without test-drilling is particularly puzzling. Unfortu- nately, excepting C. ungaricus, the capulids are little-known as living animals. The genus is largely represented inmuseums by dead-col- lected, detached shells and overlooked among the abundant, superficially similar Hipponix and Sabia in the field. Literature Cited Burch, JohnQ., & Rose L, Burch 1961. A new Capulus from the Gulf of California. The Nautilus 75 (1): 19-20; pl. 2. Crosse, M. H. 1858. Diagnoses de coquilles nouvelles, ser. 2; 10: 81 & 161; pl. 3, fig. 2. Dall, William Healey 1889. Reports on the results of dredging, under the supervision of A. Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico (1877-78) and in the Caribbean Sea (1879-80), by the U. S, Coast Survey Steamer ''Blake''. Bull, Mus. Comp. Zool. 18: 492 pp., 31 pls. (p. 287) Rev. Zool., ’ 1900. A new species of Capulus from California. The Nautilus 13 (9): 100. Garrard, T. A. i 1961. Mollusca collected by M. V. ''Challenge"' off the East Coast of Australia. Journ. Malacol, Soc. Australia 5; 2-36; pl. 2. (p. 12) Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 67 Hemming, Francis (ed) 1957. Opinions and declarations, Nomenclature 15 (22): 396. Lebour, Marie V. 1937. The eggs and larvae of the British prosobranchs with special reference to those living in the plank- Int. Comm. Zool, ton, Jour, Mar. biol, Assoc. Un. Kingd. 22: 103; fig. 4. Martyn, T. 1784, Universal Conchologist, fig. 18 k. Marine Pelecypoda from Schepman, M. M. 1909. The prosobranchia of the Siboga Expedition. Siboga-Expeditie 43 (49b): 199. Sharman, Margaret 1956. Note on Capulus ungaricus L, Jour. Mar, biol. Assoc, Un. Kingd. 35: 445-449; figs. 1-3. Yonge, C. M. 1938. Evolution of ciliary feeding inthe Prosobranchia, with an account of feeding in Capulus ungaricus. Jour, Mar. Biol. Assoc. Un. Kingd. 22: 453-468. the North Alaskan Coast BY KUNIGUNDE HULSEMANN Department of Biology, University of Southern California, Los Angeles 7, California (1 Textfigure) Introduction The collection this study is based upon was obtained during a cruise of the LCM RED of the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey which in August 1953 travelled along the polar shore of Alaska from Barter Island (near the Alaskan-Canadian border) to Barrow, Alaska. During this cruise a scientific party including N. J. Wilimovsky, H. A. Fehlman, and Charles Horvath was able to occupy a number of hydrographic and collec- ting stations. Previous Work Our first knowledge of marine mollusks from the eastern arctic Alaskan area comes from material collected by the Canadian Arctic Expedition 1913-1918 at several stations along the northern Alaskancoast;alist of themollusks has been published by Dall (1919). The mater- ial under consideration is only the second from that area to reach the hands of scientists. Be- sides this fact it is believed that the specific value of the collections and their data is that they were gathered in shallow, nearshore waters which are unlikely to be visited by any large- scale oceanographic expedition (see Wilimovsky, 1953). The Area of Investigation The areainvestigated extends in length roughly 500 km. The general character of the sea floor as indicated by the samples is com- posed of sediments of various grain size with- out extensive regions of rocks or boulders (see also Mohr, Wilimovsky, & Dawson, 1957; Car- L952) The temperatures of the bottom water were negative (-0.8 to -1.35°C) at the (eastern) sta- Hons 2 to lil, positive (20 to 32°C) az wae (western) stations 12 to 18, which group was ta- ken in relatively shallower water. Possibly the positive temperatures indicate the presence of Bering Sea water. The decrease of the salinity reflects also the decrease of the water depth. In the adjacent Beaufort Sea, the currents are in a clockwise eddy. Close to shore, there ex- ists acounter eddy which is indicated bythe pattern of deposits at ends of islands. sola, The Stations All dredging stations are located relatively close to shore in shallow water (Fig. 1). The depths extend from 3.65 m. down to almost 23 m. (station 5). Page 68 THE VELIGER Figure 1: The Pelecypoda reported here are part of the samples which were taken with a small bio- logical dredge. The 15 stations are listed in Table 1( from Wilimovsky, 1953 ). Stations | 9,and 14 are shore stations, at which no mol- lusks have been collected, and are therefore omitted. The following details are added to the Original data listed in Table 1: Gravel was present in the samples of the stations 3, 4, 5, ©, iil, W2, 1S, 17, MB, Clay was fous! aile@ im station 3. The Species Collected In these 15 stations at least 12 species of pelecypods were collected. They have all been reported previously as inhabitants of arctic Table 1. Locality Dredging Stations of the LCM RED along the Arctic Coast of Alaska waters. The findings contribute to our knowl- edge of the species and their occurrence east- ward beyond Point Barrow. Table 2 is a list of the species collected. Also listed is their general distribution com- bined mainly from MacGinitie (1959), Soot- Ryen (1932), Hagg (1904), and Stuxberg (1882, 1887). Shells of the arctic species are subject to marked variation. Pelecypods particularly mentioned by MacGinitie as highly variable are Musculus, Astarte, and Liocyma; species of these genera are found in the present collection. Among the variables arecolor of the shell, tex- ture of the periostracum, the dimensions of the shell and their proportions. The Dredging Stations of the LCM RED Cruise Where Pelecypods Were Obtained Sediment type Tempera- ture °C? North of Arey Island Off Kangigivik Point Off Brownlow Point West of Flaxman Island South East Stockton Islands South of Cross Island North of Long Island Off Thetis Island East Harrison Bay Off Atigaru Point 15, miles East of Pitt Point North West of Pitt Point Smith Bay Sanigaruak Pass, Elson Lagoon Elson Lagoon, S. W. of Cooper Isld. ' originally in feet ? data only for the bottom water -1.18 -0.8 -1.3 sand sand ? sand sand and mud sand and mud gravel muddy clay sand; clay -0.9 -1.0 ~1.35 -0.8 -1.0 332 2.0 3.2 2.5 2.8 “2.5 clay; sand sand clay mud sandy clay clay sand; clay Vol. 5; No. 2 The color isaveryunreliable specific characteristic. It varies individually; one pre- dominant tone in all individuals throughout one sample indicates that it also depends on the im- mediate surrounding substrate. The collecting data confirm the live occur- rence of all the species collected in shallow water. Shells drilled by Natica or Polinices (from MacGinitie, 1959) were rather frequent. Nu- merous holes of this sort were found in Cyrto- daria kurriana and Yoldia arctica. Geographical Distribution As mentioned above all species were re- ported earlier as members of the arctic fauna. With the exception of Yoldia myalis, their dis- tribution is circumpolar; further, most of them occur also in subarctic or boreal areas. The findings of Yoldia myalis, the distribu- tion of which is considered to be discontinuous between the eastern andthe western north American coasts (Ockelmann, 1954), narrow THE VELIGER Page 69 the gap between Point Barrow and the Hudson Strait. Pandora glacialis has not been recorded previously from the western part of the arctic seas of North America (Soot-Ryen, 1932). Dall (1919) listed Pandora sp. (fragments) from off Collinson Point. The finding of three intact specimens of P. glacialis in the RED collection indicates that the range of the species also in- cludes the north Alaskan coast. It is interesting to note that there are dis- tinct differences fromsome of MacGinitie's fin- dings (1959) on the marine mollusks from the area west of Point Barrow. Striking is the dif- ferent number in which some species occur in the RED collection compared with thatof MacGinitie. The most abundant species in the RED collection is Yoldia arctica of which 424 intact specimens were counted plus an addition- allarge number of valves; MacGinitie found only one specimen. quite frequent in the RED material although the majority of the specimens are empty. striking contrast that the species was not found in the extensive collection of G. E. Mac(Ginitie from west of Point Barrow. Still, C. kurriana was recorded in the Chukchi Sea (after Ushakov, Cyrtodaria kurriana is Mie SiS} aia Table 2. The Pelecypods of the LGM RED Collection and ‘Their General Distribution eae cee 8 iS ws v 5 S 6 2 on Y g = S| 2 a te | Se eS as & cial ig CCR ave era ee s|Ken ieee “oval ie | eee | Bal Che cee [a/O|2 [Ala lela la lols |S | alale ja |2 iM Nucula tenuis + + ee 49) + ae ab SEY) Se 4+ ae a 4 16] 4 yee | ae Yoldia arctica +] + + de) eae hae) see ae | ae aed ar Star | ae Pa Yoldia myalis Et BU |} SuG | en) et te 4 | | | Musculus niger ae {har tof ae@ se | Se | ae | ae ae? ae + qe ise | ae |) ar Pandora glacialis |+ | + + | +5 d 410) 4 Ae || eft +) 454+ Lyonsia arenosa +] + + | +? Jef ok Se n0 Pate ae lt | +] + Astarte borealis +) 4 SL] SO te Pte en SET a le oe 444 fe | se Astarte montagui ap 4 fe, SO ee te EO ee Se Se 4 15 Liocyma fluctuosa |+ | + Se | SEO Sn Se St) ee ee ee | se re ta scenes Macoma calcarea \+ | + ee ee A re Weal edituaal See aires al ae Macoma moesta + {| + } +8] te] ae} ty op + dis) de ae es Cyrlodaria kurriana|-+ | + + ate aft l Mises! Je |} oe The superior numbers stand for localities which represent the southernmost finding of the particular species. Key to numbers: ! Japan; ? Kodiak Island; * Prince William Sound; * British Columbia; ® Strait of Juan de Fuca; ® Puget Sound; 7 Oregon; * Monterey Peninsula, California; * Coronados Islands, Mexico; 10 Massachusetts; |! Long Island, New York; Cape Hatteras, North Carolina; 13 Scotland; ‘4 Denmark; ' Bay of Biscay; * Mediterranean Sea. Page 70 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 1952) and onthe Chukchi Peninsula (Leche, 1883), and was mentioned in a few stations of the Canadian Arctic Expedition: at Port Clar- ence near Teller (Seward Peninsula), Alaska; at Spy Island off the north Alaskan coast; and other stations (Dall, 1919). MHiatella arctica, in turn, which was the most abundant and most nearly ubiquitous species in MacGinitie's col- lection, was lacking in the RED material. An- other species, that was rather frequent in the collections west of Point Barrow, is Nucula tenuis; only two damaged valves were in the RED collection. Acknowledgment I am very grateful to Dr. J. L. Mohr for the opportunity to carry out this investigation. It was supported by a contract between the Na- tional Science Foundation and the University of Southern California (G 9612). The use of the laboratory facilities of the Allan Hancock Foun- dation is also gratefully acknowledged. Systematic Section Nomenclature and taxonomy of the pelecy- pods are used as by MacGinitie (1959). NUCULIDAE Nucula tenuis (Montacu, 1808) Only 2 left valves and some fragments were taken at stations 8 and 11. The valve in station 11 is 10.7 mm. inlength; the height could not be measured exactly, since the umbo was broken away, but might have been about 8 mm. These specimens belong to the var. expansa Reeve. The color of the periostracum is olive, the growth lines are brown and prominent. Nucula tenuis var. expansa seems not to be rare in other places. In MacGinitie's collection (1959) it was one of the species occurring in num- bers. Dall (1919) did not list it from the area under investigation. This is the first record of the species on the northern Alaskan coast. The distribution is circumarctic and circumboreal. NucUuLANIDAE Yoldia arctica (GRAY, 1824) Yoldia arctica was the most abundant spe- cies in the collection; 424 intact specimens, 2 dead, 257 right, 205 left valves were counted. The species was present in every station, in greatest numbers in station 6 (179 living, 15 right, 13 left valves) and station 11 (96 living, 196 right, 151 left valves). In stations 7, 12, and 15 were only single valves. The two largest living specimens (of 75 measured) are 14.8 mm. inlength by 9.0mm. in height by 5.6 mm. in breadth and 13.5 mm. by 8.1 mm. by 4.3 mm.; the two smallest living specimens were 3.7 mm. in length by 2.6 mm. in height by 1.7 mm. in breadth and 3.9 mm. by 2.5mm. by 1.7 mm. The largest single shells were 17.3 mm. by 10.1 mm. and 14.5 mm. by 9.6 mm. The ratio height/length (H/ L) of 74 specimens varied from 0.57 to 0.74, with a peak in the range of 0.63 to 0.68. The ratio breadth/length (B/L) varied in 54 speci- mens from 0.32 to 0.48. In 16 specimens there were 13 to 16 anterior (f) and 10 to 13 posterior (b) hinge teeth the ratio f/b of which being 1.14 1) IBS Most of the specimens belong to the typical form and the var.siliqua Reeve with transitional forms. Some come very close to Yoldia col- linsoni(synon. Leda (Portlandia) collinsoni Dall, 1919), from off Collinson Point, arctic Alaskan coast. In these the ratios H/L and B/L corres- pond to the dimensions in the description of Dall, three specimens are even a little stouter, whereas the size of the shells is somewhat larger (10.0 mm. and more in length; Dall: 8.5 mm.). Theratio of the anterior to the posterior hinge teeth (f/b) of Yoldia collinsoni is, accord- ing to Dall's description, with 1.37 a little higher than in the RED specimens. Here are compared the proportions of the shells rather than the plain measurements, a method Ockel- mann (1954) used when revising some other arctic species of the genus. Between the shells of both, Y. arctica and Y.collinsoni, is a con- tinuous transition from elongate to stout forms. It is therefore proposed not to retain Y. collin- soni as a valid species. The color of the periostracum is highly variable in the specimens in the collection. All gradations of color from greyish brownand yel- lowish tan to olive black are found. All of the shells show marked growth cessation lines. Usually the living specimens in one station are quite uniform in color, also often in size and shape. This observation is true especially for Yoldia arctica and Liocyma fluctuosa. This fact points to an immediate strong relationship of the animals to the local living conditions. The finding in great numbers is in contrast to the one specimen found by MacGinitie. Many single shells are drilled. Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 71 Yoldia myalis (CouTHouy, 1838) Forty-nine intact specimens, 16 right and 20 left valves were found in stations 10, 11, 12, 16, and 18, whereof 25 living specimens and 11 right and 12 left valves came from station 10 alone. The largest specimen (of 25) measures 11.6 mm. in length by 7.1 mm. in height by 4.3 mm. in breadth. The smallest is 9.0 mm. by 5.7 mm. by 3.3 mm. The ratio H/L in 25 spec- imens is 0.54 to 0.68with a distinct maximum in the range of 0.57 to 0.64; B/L in 20 specimens is 0.33 (0.30) to 0.39 (0.41). In 5 specimens the anterior hinge teeth are 12 to 15, andthe pos- terior hinge teeth 10 to 12; the ratio tne in 5 specimens is 1.1 to 1.3. The proportion H/L Ockelmann (1954) gave for Yoldia myalis is 0.52 to 0.55, which means, that his specimens were more slender; however, the ratio from measurements of Couthouy (1838) is within the variation of the RED animals. The ratio f/b fits the numbers of Ockelmann. Ap- parently the specimens from the arctic Alaskan coast are considerably smaller than those found in other areas. The color varies from nearly ocher yellow to dark olive brown. As in Yoldia arctica all living specimens in one station are almost uni- formly colored and of similar size. Growth cessation lines are more distinct in the darker shells. The recent occurrence of Yoldia myalis was recorded only from the east and west coast of North America and not yet known between Point Barrow and Hudson Strdit, wherefore Ockel- mann suggested it should be considered discon- tinuous. The findings in this collection extend the known range for some 250 kilometers east- ward from Point Barrow. MyTILIDAE Musculus nger (GRAY, 1824) Only one intact juvenile specimen of 3 mm. length at station 6, one empty shell of 7.6 mm. length at station 3, anda few single shells (the longest one 10.5 mm.) and fragments were taken at stations 3, 6, and 16. At station 7 two tiny Musculus sp. of less than 1 mm. length have a light olive “color. The color of the empty shell is brownish olive becoming darker on the margin. The species is circumarctic and circum- boreal. PANDORIDAE Pandora glacialis Lnacu, 1819 Three intact specimens were taken at the stations 4, 8, 11, and five right and 4 left valves at station 3, 8, 11, eas TE) MW/ 54 saokaal 15. The largest living speci - in length by 10.0 mm. in height; the posterior dorsal margin from the umbo to the posterior end 10.5 mm. The larg- est single shell (left) is 21.0 mm. in length by 13.2 mm. in height; the posterior dorsal mar- gin 13.9 mm. Probably the specimens belong to the typical form. The shells of Pandora glacialis have ex- ceedingly thin margins. The younger valves are transparent. drilled. Some of the valves have been This species was not found in the collection of MacGinitie (1959). Dall (1919) recorded Pan- dora sp. from off Collinson Point. The three intact specimens in this collection prove the presence of the species in the western part of the arctic coast of North America for the first time. LYONSIIDAE Lyonsia arenosa (MOLLER, 1842) One empty pair of valves was collected at station 16; 20 rightand 20 left valves were pres- Gmie ara Suetnioms &, WO; Wil, Ne, Ne, Me, 7 The largest valve (left) measures 21.0 mm. in length by 12.5 mm. in height. This species was not in the collection of MacGinitie (1959), who found Lyonsia norvegica which, in turn, was not present in the RED material. Dall (1919) listed Lyonsia arenosa at two stations on the north Alaskan coast. It is cir- cumarctic and circumboreal. ASTARTIDAE Astarte borealis (SCHUMACHER, 1817) Occurring at all but two stations, 22 intact specimens, 18 empty valves, 13 right and 27 left valves plus additional fragments were dredged. The largest intact specimen is 26.5 in length by 17.1 mm. inheight by 7.3 mm. in breadth. The largest valves taken dead are 35.2 mm. by 28.8 mm. by 11.2 mm. and 34.9 mm. by 28.4 mm. by 9.1 mm. The larg- est single shell is 38.0 mm. by 29.2 mm. mm. Page 72 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 The shell of Astarte borealis shows great variation in the proportion of the length to the height, and the general shape. Most specimens represent the strongly compressed and elongate form (Figs. ld and le in Plate 4: Jensen, 1912; and Figs. 5 and 6, Plate 22: MacGinitie, 1959). The sculpture of the shell is rather smooth, or, more often, has distinct concentric folds around the umbones. Usually the transition from the folds to fine lines is abrupt. The thick peri- ostracum varies from dark brown to black; often il becomes lighter brown and thinner near the umbones. The umbones are often eroded. Some shells have, as MacGinitie also mentions, a rustlike deposit or concretion on the shell, es- pecially on the anterior end. Also a number of smaller shells of less than 8 mm. length was found. They are dis- tinctly thinner, and the periostracum is much lighter in color. Even some of these younger specimens have eroded umbones, A number of the dead shells was closed tightly as if alive, and some of them were filled with mud as mentioned by MacGinitie (1959). Astarte borealis is circumpolar and cir- cumboreal, Astarte montagu: (Dittwyn, 1816) Astarte montagui is the third most frequent species in the RED collection; 110 intact, 2 dead specimens, and 26 right and 24 left valves were found in eight stations. In stations 3 and 4 alone were 100 intact animals taken. The largest living specimen measures 19.0 mm. in length by 17.4mm. inheight by 6.0 mm. in breadth. Onlyvery few large shells were pres- ent; most are about 10 mm. long. Astarte montagui exhibits great variationin shape, sculpture, andcolor. Jensen (1912) separated the varieties of the species by the statistical method; between these exist all transitional forms. Most of the specimens in the collection can be assigned to the varieties IP MMe, QWOmlsy striata, fabula, and warhami. spaced concentric lines around the umbones vary in spacing and prominence. The color of the young shells is yellowish tan, lighter near the umbones, and of the larger living ones, chestnut brown. The larger dead ones lack the chestnut tint. Some have a black concretion near the dorsal margin. MacGinitie found Astarte montagui to be one of the most abundant species west of Point Barrow. Astarte montagui is here recorded for the first time from the arctic Alaskan coast east of Point Barrow. It is acircumarctic and circumboreal species. ‘TAPETIDAE Liocyma fluctuosa (GOULD, 1841) Liocyma fluctuosa was the second most frequent species in the RED collection; 206 intact, 11 dead specimens, 49 right and 36 left valves were counted. The species was present in all but one of the stations. The greatest num- ber of living specimens (85) came from station 3. The largest living shell is 16.0 mm. long by 12.2 mm. high; the smallest is 3.5 mm. long. The largest single shells are(2 left valves) 27.5 mm. in length by 18.6 mm. in height and 21.7 mm. by 16.0 mm; and (1 right valve) 25.5 mm. by 17.8 mm. These three large single shells have a relatively thick periostracum of yellow or brownish, respectively. They are shaped exactly like the Liocyma viridis Dall. MacGinitie (1959) considers five other spe- cies (Liocyma beckii, L. scammoni, L. viridis, L. aniwana, L. schefferi) as variants of L. fluctuosa. The many specimens of L. fluctuosa in the RED collection confirm her finding that the young specimens tend to be more trigonal than larger specimens. Here are by far more small than large specimens. The smallest shell is transparent (3.5 mm. in length). The color of the other living shells is ivory white with grey, yellow or greenish tint. The concentric sculpture is more or less evenly spaced. Inold asin young specimens the umbones are usually worn. Liocyma fluctuosa occurs in all arctic seas and is also circumboreal. TELLINIDAE Macoma calcarea (GMELIN, 1791) [in a number of other papers quoted as (CHEMNITZ, 1782); Neues System. Conchyl. Cabinet 6] Only one right and one left valve were found at stations 5 and 11. The one large (left) shell is 36.0 mm. in length by 23.6 mm. in height. Some fragments of a Macoma sp. were alsoat stations 6, 8, 10, 12. Vol. 5; No. 2 MacGinitie (1959) mentioned Macoma cal- carea as one of the three most abundant species in the collection west of Point Barrow occurring in extremely sticky mud. The bottom at the stations 5 and 11 contained also mud and clay. Macoma calcarea is found throughout the arctic; it is also circumboreal. Macoma moesta (DESHAYES, 1854) Three intact specimens, 2 right and 4 left valves were found in station 2, 3, 11, 12, 16. The largest living specimen is 19.2 mm. long by 13.6 mm. high. Usually the brittle shell of Macoma moesta is damagedand does not per- mit an exact measuring. The relatively thin periostracum extends onto the interior surface, Along the posterior end and the ventral margin there is a brownish concretion as men- tioned by MacGinitie (1959). Macoma moesta occurs throughout the arctic seas; it is also circumboreal. MYACIDAE Mya spec. The beak areas of three Mya sp. were found in stations 4, 7, and 12. They have been worn considerably. SAXICAVIDAE Cyrtodaria kurriana DUNKER, 1862 Rather frequent species in the RED collec- tion; 16 intact, 75 dead specimens, 32 right and 28 left valves were taken in stations 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 17, 18. The longest living shell is 22.0 mm., the longest dead shell is 29.3 mm., the longest single valve is 31.7 mm. in length. Many of the-dead shells are drilled. Cyrtodaria kurriana was not found in Mac- Ginitie's (1959) collection. This surprises since most of the shells in the RED collection came from stations 17 and 18 which are the closest to Point Barrow. The distribution is circum- polar although C. kurriana is not yet found in all arctic waters and not at every locality alive. MacGinitie found Hiatella arctica (Linnaeus) (also fam. Saxicavidae) to be the most abundant bivalve; not a single specimenwas present in the RED collection. THE VELIGER Page 73 Summary The collection on hand was dredged during a cruise of the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey LCM RED along the north Alaskan coast between Barter Island and Point Barrow. Twelve spe- cies of pelecypods were taken which have been known from arctic seas. .For four of them this is the first record in the area of investigation. Literature Cited Carsola, A. J. 1952. Marine geology of the Arctic Ocean and adjacent seas off Alaska and northwestern Canada. Doc- toral Dissert., Univ. Calif. Los Angeles. Dall, William Healey 1919, The mollusca of the Arctic coast of America collected by the Canadian Arctic Expedition west from Bathurst Inlet with an appended report ona collection of Pleistocene fossil mollusca, Report Canad, Arctic Expedition, 1913-18, vol. 8, pt. A. Mollusks: 3-29. Hagg, R. 1904, Mollusca und Brachiopoda gesammelt von der Schwedischen Zoologischen Polarexpedition nach Spitzbergen, dem nordéstlichen GrGnland und Jan Mayenim Jahre 1900, 1. Brachiopoda und Lamelli- branchiata. Ark, fér Zool, 2 (2): 1-66. Jensen, A, S. 1912, Lamellibranchiata, pt. 1, The Danish Ingolf Expedition 2 (5): 1-119. Leche, W. 1883, Ofversigt éfver de af Vega-expeditionen insam- lade arktiska hdsmollusker. 1, Lamellibranchiata. Vega-exped. Vetensk, Iakttagelser 3: 433-453, MacGinitie, Nettie 1959. Marine mollusca of Point Barrow, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 109: 59-208; pls. Mohr, John L., N. J. Wilimovsky & E. Y. Dawson 1957. An Arctic Alaskan kelp bed. Arctic 10: 45-52. Ockelmann, W. K. 1954, On the interrelationship and the zoogeography of northern species of Yoldia Méller, s. str. (Mol- lusca, Fam, Ledidae) with a new subspecies. Medd. Gr@gnland 107 (7): 32 pp. Soot-Ryen, Tron 1932, Pelecypoda with a discussion of possible migra- tions of Arctic pelecypods in tertiary times, Nor- wegian North Polar Exped. Maud, 1918-25, Sci, Re- sults 5 (12): 1-35. Stuxberg, A. 1882. Evertebratfaunen in Sibiriens Ishaf forelépende meddelanden. Vega-exped. Vetensk, lakttagelser 1; 677-812. 1887, Faunan pda och kring Novaja Semlja. ped, Vetensk, Iakttagelser 5: 1-239. PVs 1952. Chukotskoe morei i ego donnaia fauna (Chukchi Sea and its bottom fauna). Akad. Nauk USSR. Krainii Severo- Vostok Soiuza SSR (Extreme North East of the USSR) 2: 5-82. Wilimovsky, N. J. 1953. Cruise of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey LCM RED. Technical Report 3, Contract N6éonr- 25136 NR 307 204. Nat. Hist. Mus. Stanford Univ. 3 pp. Alaska. 1-27. Vega-ex- Ushakov, Page 74 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Cypraea chinensis GMELIN, 1791 (Gastropoda) in Hawaii BY CRAWFORD N. CATE Conchological Club of Southern California Los Angeles 7, California (Plates 8, 9) After a careful study of specimens of Cy- praea chinensis Gmelin, 1791 (synonym 2 (Cr variolaria Lamarck, 1810; C. cruenta Dillwyn, 1817), in various collections throughout the United States and of pertinent literature, with particular attention to the visible morphological variations in its several allopatric subspecies, I am convinced that a separable population of this species exists in the Hawaiian Islands, be- cause of the outstanding differences noted in this Polynesian race. Melvill & Standen (1915) were the first to recognize the divergence of the Hawaiian race from the typical species and they singled out their semipellucid specimen, giving it the name Cypraea variolaria amiges. Since they based their subspecies upon a single dead specimen from a doubtful locality, this name has subse- quently disappeared into synonymy through a lack of recognition of its existence. Cypraea chinensis is of rare enough occurrence in Ha- waii that until recently not enough live-taken specimens have been known to make such an identification possible. However, during the past few years several specimens have been collected in Hawaii, and it seems appropriate, with the additional information now available, to validate the early subspecies, to illustrate it (probably for the first time), and to discuss the distinguishing morphological characters and ecological environment that so clearly separate it from the other races of the species. Although they did not know the exact local- ity of their new subspecies, Melvill & Standen made an excellent inference that it was probably from the Hawaiian Archipelago. They based their conclusion upon the fact that the new form stood in thé same relationship to typical Cy- praea chinensis as did certain other Hawaiian forms to their respective typical species; to cite only one of their examples, such as C. hel- vola hawaiiensis does to C. helvola helvola. Their explanation referred mostly to a similar- ity in pellucidity and coloration, but a careful reading of their description of the subspecies makes it certain that the form they were de- scribing is indeed the form found today in Ha- wali. The authors of the new subspecies acknow- ledged the help of Mr. J. Kidson Taylor in call- ing to their attention that the shell they named Cypraea variolaria var. amiges was allied to C. chinensis. About a year later, Taylor (1916) noted enough differences in Japanese specimens to describe them as still another subspecies of C. chinensis, namely, C. variolaria (= C. chin- ensis) var. splendens. The description of Tay- lor's holotype could apply equally to that of C. c. amiges and tends to ally it with the Hawaiian race. I have seen Japanese specimens of both the amiges form and the chinensis s.s. form, leading me to the conclusion that Japan may be the area where the two subspecies overlap. Therefore, since the name amiges for this race has nearly a full year's priority and since the typical amiges form seems restricted to Hawaii, Taylor's C.c.splendens must go into the synon- ymy of C.c.amiges. Cypraea chinensis amiges (see Plate 9, Figs. la, lb, 2a, and 2b, Table 1) is a noticeably shorter, broader shell than C.c. chinensis (see Plate 9, Figs. 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b, Table 2), with its width almost invariably 70 percent as great as its length; Melvill & Standen used the term "broadened" to point out this important feature. The shell, however, is more than "normally Vol. 5; No. 2 shaped", as they expressed it. Its unusual breadth and produced marginal callus, reaching near to the highest point on the dorsum, give the shell a somewhat flat, squat appearance, whereas C.c.chinensis is a more cylindrically oblong shell, usually much less heavily cal- lused along its margins and of a lighter porcel- laneous texture. The marginal callus, covering a large area of the dorsal surface, is very thickly marked with large spots of a deep violet color; it covers at least half of the swollen base in the columellar area, and all of the base formed by the horizontally flattened lip. In the typical species a broadening of the right and left portions of the base is more noticeable. The white teeth, bold and strong on the lip (16 in number), short and very fine on the columella (18 in number) have brilliant orange-red inter- stices, while those of C.c. chinensis, bordering on a longer and straighter aperture, seem larger and less crowded. Also, Philippine spe- cimens appear to have more teeth. The colu- mellar teeth of C. c. amiges extend as strong concave ridges across the very broad, promi- nent white fossula. Irregularly rounded lacunae, of the same creamy color as the background of the shell, show through the straw-colored layer of the narrowed dorsum. Not having the dorsal surface area so narrowed by the marginal cal- lus, the straw-colored pattern of the typical C. chinensis covers a larger area; it is also more irregular and scattered. These features, plus the narrow, sharply recurved aperture consti- tute the greatest morphological changes evident THE VELIGER Page 75 in this Hawaiian subspecies. A character com- mon to all the races of C. chinensis is the faint mantle line traversing the right dorsum near its summit. It is interesting to note, however, that in the case of the East African C. c. violacea there are some instances where the mantle line is exceedingly faint or does not appear to exist at all. This would seem to be more of an ex- ception than a rule for this subspecies. As a result of the careful observations of Clifton S. Weaver, I am able to include here a detailed description of the animal of Cypraea chinensis amiges, from one of the specimens he collected in Kailua Bay. The mantle of the animal is blood-red, with darker, almost brownish spots spreading out over the sides, and white, frosty-appearing spots along the margins. The papillae are bumpy, stalk-like, and about 4 mm. in length. Numbering approximately 35 on either side, they are off-white in color, shading to a pale salmon. The eyestalks are a pale golden- yellow, with the siphon a paler orange-yellow, becoming white at its tip. The ventral surface of the foot is more or less white, ornamented with red-brown lines; the base of the foot is off- white, evenly tinted with red-brown. Cypraea chinensis amiges prefers living in a deep-water habitat, its present known benthic range in Hawaii being from 30 to 60 feet. The specimens taken in the shallower depths were collected at Waikiki and Makua, on the south Table 1 Measurements (in millimeters) and Collecting Data of Specimens of Cypraea chinensis amiges MELVILL & STANDEN, 1915, Used in this Study. Dentition Height | Lip Columella Length | Width Hypotype 1 Hypotype 2 Hypotype 3 Hypotype 4 Hypotype 5 Hypotype 6 Hypotype 7 ‘ under basalt boulder, 20 Jan. 1962. lava island, June 1957 ‘ under coral slab ? under lava rock, 13 Jan. 1962. 5 under lava rock Collecting Locality Depth, feet | Collector T. Richert C. S. Weaver Makua, Oahu Mokolea Rock, Kailua Bay, Oahu Mokolea Rock, Kailua Bay, Oahu Makua, Oahu Waikiki, Oahu Makua, Oahu Makua, Oahu 35 55 50 C. S. Weaver 60 35 35 35 | C. S. Weaver J. Lucas | R. Lee T. Richert ’ edge of underwater ® April 1958 Page 76 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Table 2 Measurements (in millimeters) and Dentition of Specimens of Cypraea chinensis chinensis GMELIN, 1791, Obtained from Moro Collectors and Used in this Study. Dentition — Lip Columella Locality Hypotype 1 18 Hypotype 2 18 Hypotype 3 17 Hypotype 4 : 18 Hypotype 5 d 19 Hypotype 6 : : 18 Hypotype 7 : 19 Hypotype 8 | 20 Hypotype 9 J | : 20 Hypotype 10 | : 19 Hypotype 11 A 21 Hypotypes 10 and 11 are illustrated on Plate 9 shore of Oahu, while two specimens were col- lected on the northeast shore of the island (with- in 100 yards of one another, and a day apart) in 55 to 60 feet of water-(Kailua Bay). The Waikiki specimen was taken from under a coral ledge. It is not known how the Makua specimens were taken, but this collecting area is noted for its dead coral heads and lava outcroppings, with portions of the bottom clear and barren except for an occasional sparse growth of eelgrass. (Underwater photographs taken by Roland Gray confirm this condition.) The substrate adjacent to the Mokulua Islands where the Kailua Bay specimens were taken consists’ of basalt and coral ledges and slabs. The ecology of some of the other races of Cypraea chinensis is quite different. For the most part they are reef-dwellers or are at least shallow water species and are far less rare than in Hawaii. In Mozambique and Zanzibar, for example, C. c. violacea is collected in such quantities that dealers have it in their shops by the boxful. At Siasi Island in the Sulu Archipel- yi) Lil 16 18 18 18 Siasi Island, Sulu Archipelago 20 ng 18 19 18 ago, C.c. chinensis is taken in reasonably plen- tiful numbers by native collectors in shallow water. In Hawaii, on the other hand, C.c. amiges is known from a total of only about 16 speci- mens, of which seven have been loaned to me for this study through the kindness of several Hawaiian collectors. The Hawaiian race (as C. cruenta Gmelin) is reported by Ostergaard (1928) in the Hawaiian Pleistocene as rare. Schilder (1938) lists the living range of Cy- praea chinensis chinensis Gmelin, 1791, as "N. E. Malaysia to Japan, Hawaii, Palmyra Is- land, New Caledonia, N. W. Australia and S. W. Java."' It is my belief that Hawaii should be ex- cluded from the range of the typical species, as the subspecies discussed in this paper can be differentiated and is an apparently isolated race, ecologically as well as morphologically. Fur- ther research will be required to determine to what extent its range goes beyond the immediate vicinity of Oahu. I note with interest that some of the typical morphological characters of C.c. amiges are sometimes (but not always) seen in Explanation of Plate 8 Cypraea chinensis amiges MELVILL. & STANDEN, 1915 Ventral and dorsal aspects of typical specimens. Figures 1a and 1b: Hypotype 3. Figures 2a and 2b: Hypotype 2. Figures 3a and 3b: Hypotype 4. (All figures x 1.5) THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 2 [C. Cate] Plate 8 Figure 1a Figure 2a Figure 3a Figure 1b Figure 2b Figure 3b Kodachromes by A. BLAKER THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. [CaTE] Plate 9 i) Figure 1 a Figure 1 b Figure 2 a Figure 2 b Ventral and dorsal aspects of typical Cypraea chinensis amiges MELVILL & STANDEN, 1915 Figures 1a, 1b: Hypotype 2 Figures 2a, 2b: Hypotype 3 These specimens collected at Mokolea Rock, Kailua Bay, Oahu; ex Weaver collection Figure 3 b ey Figure 4a maya Figure 4 b Ventral and dorsal aspects of typical Cypraea chinensis chinensis GMELIN, 1791 Figures 3a, 3b: Hypotype 11 Figures 4a, 4b: Hypotype 10 These specimens collected at Siasi, Sulu Archipelago; ex Cate collection Takeo Susuxt, photo. Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 77 specimens allegedly from Japan; it is therefore possible that the range may extend almost as far west as the Japanese Islands. The type locality of Cypraea chinensis amiges Melvill & Standen, 1915, is here desig- nated as Kailua Bay, Oahu, in the general area of Mokolea Rock (19° 38'N. Lat., 155°59'W, Long.). Both Cypraea amiges and C, splendens have been placed in the synonymy of C. chinensis chinensis by Schilder (1932), but I feel there are enough physical and ecological differences to be found in the Hawaiian specimens (and in some Japanese specimens) to separate them as an independent geographical race, surviving and maintaining themselves as such. It is the intention of this paper to restorea forgotten subspecies to its rightful place in the Hawaiian fauna. Due to its rarity in past years, one can readily understand why little has been said about it; however, the recent discoveries of this form by Hawaiian collectors have brought a heretofore obscure race out into the open. The diagnostic characters are clear. It should be mentioned that the color trans- parency furnished for the accompanying color plate was slightly overexposed, resulting in some loss of red tones. However, due to the careful work of Dr. and Mrs. G Dallas Hanna of the California Academy of Sciences (to whom I am indebted for the time spent in making this attractive plate) the fidelity of color tones and the sharpness of detail in the final work are re- markable; the plate is an exact reproduction of the original transparency, even to showing a few air bubbles which the photographer was un- able to discern while taking the photograph un- der water to minimize reflections. A freshly collected specimen of Cypraea chinensis amiges has a pinkish base rather than the beige-colored one shown here. Acknowledgment I wish to express my deep gratitude for the aid and fieldwork of my friend and co-worker Clifton S. Weaver of Honolulu, and my thanks to others, including Dr. T. Richert, Robert Lee, and James Lucas for the loan of their specimens used in this study. To my wife Jean Cate, as always, for the help given in many ways, I give my deepest appreciation. Literature Cited Melvill, James Cosmo, & Robert Standen 1915, Description of a new variety of Cypraea vario- laria Lamarck. Jour. Conch. 14 (11): 323. Ostergaard, Jens Mathias 1928, Fossil marine mollusks of Oahu. Mus, Bull, 51: 1-32. Schilder, Franz Alfred 1932. Fossilium catalogus, Berlin. Schilder, Franz Alfred, & Maria Schilder 1938/39,Prodrome of a monograph on living Cypraeidae. Proc. Mal. Soc, Lond., 23 (3): 119-231; 16 textfigs. Taylor, J. Kidson 1916. Some varietal forms in Cypraea. 15 (4): 122-123. B. P. Bishop Cypraeacea; pp. 1-276. Jour, Conch Page 78 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Aspects of Ctenidial Feeding in Immature Bivalves BY CHARLES R. STASEK Friday Harbor Laboratories, University of Washington, Seattle, and Stazione Zoologica, Naples, Italy (2 Textfigures) Introduction The margins of the two gills, or ctenidia, ‘of most adult bivalved mollusks are grooved. The grooves are ciliated and function in the transfer to the mouth of potential food particles that the ctenidia filtered from the so-called res- piratory water current. The suggestion has been made and accepted in the literature that the ctenidia of developing bivalves cannot func- tion in this way until the marginal food grooves make their appearance (Yonge, 1947; Allen, 1961). The acceptance of this suggestion as a "fact'’ is premature, for the Limited observa- tions related below have proved it to be untrue. Observations The adult ctenidia of Modiolaria laevigata Gray are similar in cross-section to those of Mytilus; that is, each is ''W''-shaped with a food groove along the margin of each ''V"', or demi- branch (see Atkins, 1937, p. 383). Of one spe- cimen of Modiolaria only 1.9 mm. greatest di- mension, 21 ctenidial filaments had formed on either side of the body. Of those on the right side, the 13 nearest the mouth consisted solely of descending and ascending filaments of the in- ner demibranch. The remaining 8 filaments bore rudiments of the descending arm of the outer demibranch (Fig. 1). Despite the facts that there was neither a food groove on the in- ner demibranch nor a "'complete'' outer demi- branch, ciliary currents along all free margins, including that of the unreflexed outer demi- branch, carried particles towards the mouth. In the young asin theadult thereis also a strong ciliary tract in the axis of the ctenidium between the demibranchs. If in Modiolaria the develop- ment of these earlier filaments is like that of Mytilus, the short papillae comprising the de- scending arm of the outer demibranch will con- tinue to grow downwards and then bend back up- .on themselves leading to the completed "'W''- shape of the adult ctenidium. Cross-sections of the right ctenidium of Venericardia ventricosa Gould (Carditidae) at three stages of development are shownin Figure 2. The inner demibranch develops before the outer, with orally directed tracts of cilia being present along its margin even in the absence of a food groove (Fig. 2A). The ctenidium passes through a stage, when the animal is about 3.1 mm. greatest dimension, in which the outer demibranch is represented by small reflexed filaments that seem to lack orally directed tracts along their margins (Fig. 2B); ciliary tracts lead particles over the margin of the outer demi- branch into the axis of the ctenidium where a strong tract persisting from younger. stages leads them towards the mouth. A shallow food grooveis present on the inner demibranch (MGI). The only available specimen in this size range died before the existence of orally directed Figure 1: Diagrammatic cross-section of the ctenidium of Modiolaria at an early stage of development. AT: area of attachment of ctenidium to body ID: inner demibranch OD: outer demibranch UC; unciliated abfrontal surface of outer demibranch e : strong orally directed currents o: weaker orally directed currents Arrows indicate direction of beat of frontal cilia Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 79 tracts along the edges of the reflexed segments could be ascertained, but such are probably present, At 4.9 mm. greatest dimension this species has well-developed food grooves on the inner demibranchs andweak, orally directed tracts on the ungrooved margins of the outer demibranchs (Fig. 2C). Approximately the upper half of the ascending filaments bears frontal ciliation beat- ing towards the reflexed edge. The proportion of the length of the reflexed portions of the outer filaments given to this type of frontal ciliation becomes somewhat larger as the organism grows, but the general arrangement is similar to that of adults of 18 mm. greatest dimension. Although Venericardia is eulamellibran- chiate when adult, interfilamentary junctions of the ctenidium seem to be entirely ciliary at very early stages. Conclusions The inner demibranchs of Modiolaria and Venericardia are functional, food- collecting or- gans before the outer demibranchs commence their development. It is probably characteris - tic of all bivalves that elements of the inner demibranchs appear before those of the outer (Rice, 1908; Creek, 1960). While the amount of water passing over their surfacesis no doubt small, the outer demibranchs from their first appearance seem to be food-collecting struc- Wn GS Hes Whit 224 1 WE Wy yp Wk A. Figure 2: Diagrammatic cross-sections of the ctenidium of Venericardia at three stages of development. MGI: marginal food groove Other abbreviations as in Figure 1 tures. The ctenidial axis will probably be found to be significant in leading particles to the mouth. Ata stage intermediate in development (Fig. 2B), a cross-section of the ctenidium of Venericardia bears some resemblance to that of adult Cardiidae (see Johnstone, 1900), al- though that family lacks the orally directed tracts along the reflexed margins of the ctenidia. The arrangement of the frontal ciliation of Venericardia ventricosa is unique among known bivalves. The division of frontal ciliation on the ascending lamellae of the outer demibranchs recalls that of the Unionidae (Atkins, 1937, p. 408), but that family lacks orally directedtracts on the margins of the outer demibranchs and of the reflexed margins of the inner ones. While there are structural and functional differences between the organs and methods of feeding of young and adult bivalves (see Allen, 1961), the general r6le of food collection prob- ably may be attributed to the ctenidia shortly after their first appearance, Their function can- not be deduced from form alone. Acknowledgment The above observations were made while the author was at the Friday Harbor Laborator- ies of the University of Washington where fin- ancial support was received from the Office of Naval Research. Literature Cited Allen, J. A. 1961, né). Atkins, D. 1937. On the ciliary mechanisms and interrelation- ships of lamellibranchs. Part III, Quart. Jour. micro, Sci. 79; 375-421, Creek, G. A, 1960. The development of the lamellibranch Cardium The development of Pandora inaequivalvis (Lin- Jour. Embryol, Morphol, 9: 252-268. edule L. Proc, zool, Soc. Lond, 135: 243-260, Johnstone, J, 1900, On the Cardium and life-history of the common cockle. Trans, Liverpool biol. Soc. 14: 178-216. Rice, E, L. 1908. Gill development of Mytilus. 61-77. Yonge, C. M. 1947, The pallial organsin the aspidobranch Gastropo- da and their evolution throughout the Mollusca, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., B, 232: 443-518. Biol. Bull, 14; Page 80 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 A New Species of Mitra (Gastropoda) from Hawaii BY JEAN M. CATE Conchological Club of Southern California Los Angeles 7, California ‘(Plates 10, 11) In January 1962 I published in this journal (The Veliger, Vol. 4, No. 3, pp. 140-149) a paper concerning 13 species of Mitra from Hawaii that had been described by Pilsbry in 1920. At that time Mitra langfordi Pilsbry was placed in the synonymy of M. peasei Dohrn, 1860, that spe- cies having proved to be identical with Pilsbry's holotype. During the ensuing months I have re- ceived inquiries from several collectors in Ha- waii, saying in effect ''What has become of the species we used to call Mitra langfordi?" It de- veloped that they had erroneously applied the name M. langfordi to a species actually quite different from M. peasei, though with certain superficial morphological similarities. Pils- bry's inadequate illustration was an unreliable guide, and his description could have applied almost equally to either form. As M. peasei was widely recognized under its correct name in Island collections, the collectors quite un- derstandably assumed that the remaining simi- lar species must, therefore, be M. langfordi. A long and careful search through all per- tinent literature and many large collections shed no light on the identity of the unknown species. Only one figure seemed to offer a re- mote possibility in any of the classic works on Mitridae-W— Sowerby's (1874) figure of Mitra sanguinolenta Lamarck, 1811, somewhat re- sembled the Hawaiian shell, Mitra sanguino- lenta is an almost forgotten species described from a single specimen of unknown locality, dis- counted by most subsequent authors as probably nonexistent or a synonym of some other spe- cies. Notwithstanding the discouraging remarks of Tryon (1882), Reeve (1845), Sowerby (1874), and a few others, on the very slight hope that this might be the same species Lamarck had described, I made inquiries in Paris; these were soon answered with an excellent photo- graph of the holotype of M. sanguinolenta (see Plate 11, Fig. 2). I should like to express my gratitude to M. Paul-Henri Fischer of the Jour- nal de Conchyliologie for directing my letter of inquiry into the right hands, and to M. J. Gail- lard of the Muséum National d'Histoire Natu- relle (Paris) for providing the photograph, which establishes without doubt that M. sanguinolenta Lamarck is not the same species that had been mistakenly identified by Hawaiian collectors as M. langfordi. In April 1962 I had occasion to visit three of the large museum collections on our Atlantic Coast and noted each lot seen that resembled the unknown species; in all the collections of the three museums I was able to find only four lots which I believe to be this species: one lot in the Pease Collection at the Museum of Comparative Zoology (Harvard) labeled ''Mitra carnicolor Reeve: Honolulu", and three lots in the United States National Museum (Washington, D.C.) la- beled ''Mitra clathrus emersoni Pilsbry". The four lots were all collected in Hawaii. As far as I could ascertain, the American Museum of Natural History (New York) has no specimens resembling this form. A personal letter from Miss Virginia Orr (May 1962) establishes that there are likewise no specimens in the collec- tion of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia similar to the sample I sent for comparison. I have not seen it in the West Coast collections of the California Academy of Sciences, Stanford University, nor the Los Angeles County Museum. The infrequent occur- rence in these large collections not only con- firms its rarity but also suggests the possibility of its being an undescribed species and one that may be endemic to Hawaii. Further data for the above and other specimens are included in Table 1. ; Tue VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 2 [J.Cate] Plate 10 Kodachromes by Takeo Susukt Mitra lang fordiana J. CATE, spec. nov. Figure 1: Dorsal Aspect of Paratype 1 Figure 2: Ventral Aspect of Holotype Lae slict lca vc Toate ony We, rNe Che Ny iene Sy oiricr iu niewtatenes Hoang Ph ai. 8 uate ny , Peri se Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 81 Table 1 Mitra lang fordiana J. Cate, spec. nov. Data on specimens used in this study. (Measurements in millimeters; depths in feet) In the collection of: Length| Diam. Collector & Date Location B. P Bishop Museum 215317 Calif. Acad. Sci. Paleo. Type Coll. 12407 Holotype Paratype 1 Paratype 2 Paratype 3 Paratype 4 Paratype 5, Paratype 6 Paratype 7 Paratype 8 Paratype 9 Paratype 10 Paratype 11 Paratype 12 Paratype 13 Paratype 14 Paratype 15, Paratype 16 Paratype 17 Mr. and Mrs. A. M. Harrison juvenile ” fanned in sand All of the foregoing left the collectors' questions still unanswered, but after carefully going over all the available information, I have concluded that the shell is a new species, prob- ably endemic to Hawaii. Through the generosity of Elizabeth Harrison, Clifton Weaver, E. R. Cross, Ditlev Thaanum, and John Duarte, I have had the opportunity of studying several specimens of this rare species, and I wish to thank these enthusiastic collectors for their help. Together with the museum specimens mentioned above, I have now seen approximate- ly 37 specimens, a large number indeed for so uncommon a species, Because I deeply regret that the earlier name honoring D. B. Langford had to be placed in synonymy, and further because collectors in Hawaii have so long associated his name with this particular species (even though incorrect- ly), it seems fitting to re-establish Langford's name among the Hawaiian Mitridae by using it for this species in a form differing from Pils- bry's original orthography only enough to make the name taxonomically available. It is under- stood that the name Mitra langfordi now has no . standing in molluscan nomenclature. I take pleasure, therefore, in describing this newly recognized Hawaiian mitrid as: Pokai Bay, Waianae, Oahu Dredged, in coral rubble and sand, Waianae, Oahu 21 May, 1961 24 June, 1961 E. Harrison 21 May, 1961 a Harrison 45 to 50 21 May, le Harrison 11 June, 1961 May, 1961 * 3 |Betay Harrison 3 Pele I Expedition 17 April, 1959 * fanned out of sand 2 to 3 feet in depth Mitra lang fordiana J. CATE, spec. nov. Shell spindle-shaped, spire longer than aperture; sutures impressed. Protoconch mam- millated, homeostrophic, consisting of one or two smooth dark-red whorls (see Plate 11, Fig. 4). Teleoconch of about seven convex whorls, spirally ornamented with regularly spaced pus- tulose cords, about four or five rows on each upper whorl, 10 or 12 on the last whorl. Space between spiral cords finely grooved with about three parallel ridges and interspaces, of which the central ridge is sometimes slightly more prominent. Shell longitudinally very finely stri- ate, the single striae intersecting all spiral sculpture, creating a beaded effect on the larger spiral cords and forming cancellate sculpture in the interspaces (see Plate 11, Figs. 1, 3, 4). Aperture straight; labrum in adult speci- mens fairly thick, smooth within, ridged without by termination of the spiral cords. Columella straight, with two strong oblique adapical folds and from two to three weaker anterior folds. Peristome entire; siphonal fasciole weakly pro- duced, shell very slightly umbilicate. Basic color of shell beige (Maerz & Paul Dictionary of Color, 2nd Edition, 1950; PI. 10, Page 82 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Table 2 Mitra lang fordiana J. CATE, spec. nov. Data on specimens, other than the type series, used in this study. (Measurements in millimeters; depths in feet [*] or fathoms [7] ) Specimen Location Hypotype 1 Hypotype 2 Hypotype 3 Hypotype 4 Hvpotype 5 Hypotype 6 In the collection of: Length} Diam. Collector & Date L. Calves 25 to 30* unknown _ Bye Ted Dranga, 1927 W. H. Pease ~ D. Thaanum, 1923 Thaanum & Langford 1935 Pele I Expedition summer, 1959 U. S.N. M. 611285 U.S.N. M. 337978 U.S. N. M. 617617 M. C. Z. (Harvard) D. Thaanum Old Koloa Landing, Kauai Hanokowai, Maui + Pearl and Hermes Reef Honolulu Pearl and Hermes Reef off Waikiki, Oahu not measured 20 to 30 Hypotype 7 Hypotype 8 Hypotype 9 Hypotype 10 C. S. Weaver d : a Sand Island, 257 Oahu Mr. and Mrs. A. M. Harrison Waikiki, Oahu a Harrison, 13 Mar ’59 45* Haliewa, Oahu ? off Ala Wai, Oahu off Barber’s Pt., Oahu in silt and small rubble May - June, under large coral heads 1961 J. M. Cate Q. Pa Koloa Landing, Kauai \ John Duarte 1 sand, rubble under coral head 10 August, 1961 R. M. Gray, June, ’56 P. Clover 26 June, 1960 March, 1962 E. R. Cross Hypotype 12/ > E. R. Cross Hypotype 13 Hypotype 14 Hypotype 15 Hypotype 16 Hypotype 17 Hypotype 18 J. M. Ostergaard J. M. Cate Brown’s Camp, Oahu sand Oahu; ex L. E. Berry coll. Hypotype 11 | a) Hypotype 19 Kekala Reef, Kauai, under unknown coral heads ' juvenile ” fanned in sand 3 decollate 2D); irregularly mottled and banded with dark brick-red (M & P, Pl. 6, 9K, Havana Rose); spiral cords basically brick-red, pustules on the spiral cords mostly white as if red color is rubbed off on their summits. Aperture soft yellow-beige (M & P, Pl. 10, 3E, Leghorn). Columella and folds in young specimens bright rose-pink (M & P, Pl. 5, 41, Rose petal) where color band of last whorl is exposed before final coating of inductura is laid down. The type locality of Mitra langfordiana is Pokai Bay, Waianae, western Oahu, Hawaii (21° 27'N. Latitude, 158° 12'W. Longitude). At the present time M. langfordiana appears to be a species endemic to the Hawaiian Islands, having been collected from Maui in the south to Pearl and Hermes Reef in the north, a range of ap- * in sand, inside reef at very low tide proximately 20 degrees of longitude and about 7 degrees of latitude, or roughly 1,150 nautical miles. I know of no specimens collected on the island of Hawaii. The holotype will be deposited in the Ber- nice P. Bishop Museum, Honolulu, Hawaii, where it will bear the catalogue number 215 317. This specimen and Paratype 1, No. 12 407 in the California Academy of Sciences Paleontology Type Collection were very kindly donated by Mrs. Elizabeth Harrison for use as museum specimens. Mitra langfordiana differs from M. peasei Dohrn, 1860, in the following ways: it is a coars- er, heavier, more obese species with heavily pustulose spiral sculpture, M. peasei having similar spiral ridges also intersected by fine Explanation of Plate 11 Figures 1 and 3: Typical specimens of Mitra lang fordiana J. CaTE, spec. nov. (approx. x 4) Figure 2: Holotype of Mitra sanguinolenta LAMARCK, 1811 (copyright Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle) Figure 4: Enlarged photograph showing detail of sculpture and protoconch of Mitra lang fordiana (approx. x 7.5) THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 2 [J. Cate] Plate 11 Figure 2 Figure 4 figs. 1, 3, 4, TAKEO Susux1, photo — fig. 2, © Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle ) { 7 = 7 ~| fl = 7 ha - ' \ has Vol. 5; No. 2 axial striae but without pustules. Mitra lang- fordiana is marked with dark red-brown bands, while M. peasei is buff with slender brown cords and no large color bands. The aperture is creamy yellow in M, langfordiana, white in M. peasei; the columellar folds in M. langford- iana are coarser, and less evenly graduated from large to small than those in M. peasei. Mitra langfordiana is probably more simi- lar to M. papilio (Link, 1807) (syn. M. sphaeru- lata Martyn) than to M. peasei, though differing widely from this species in ornament and col- oration. Their similarities are chiefly in their general proportions and coarse ornamentation, M. peasei being of a slim, delicate appearance while M. papilio and M,. langfordiana share a strong, robust form. Acknowledgment I should like to express once again my gratitude to all who helped me with the prob- lems relating to this study; in addition to those already named, without whom it could not have been attempted, I will mention the curators of the various museums where I was privileged to THE VELIGER Page 83 visit in person; Miss Virginia Orr who so promptly furnished the information I needed from ANSP; Dr. Rudolf Stohler who generously translated German literature dealing with Mitra sanguinolenta; and as always, Crawford Cate whose patience and understanding provided a helpful environment in which to work. Literature Cited Cate, Jean M, 1962. Revision of some Hawaiian mitrid species, Veliger 4 (3): 140-149; pls. 33-35, Lamarck, J.-B. P. 1811, Suite de la détermination des espéces de mollus- ques testacés; genre Volute et Mitre. Annal. Mus. Hist. Natur. Paris 17: 54-80 & 195-222 (Mitra). Pilsbry, Henry Augustus 1920, Marine mollusks of Hawaii, Sci. Philadelphia, 72: 309-318, pl. Reeve, Lovell Augustus 1844-1845. Conchologia Iconica. genus Mitra. pls. 1-39. Sowerby, George Brettingham 1874, Thesaurus conchyliorum, Vol. 4, Monograph of the genus Mitra: 1-46; pls. 1-28, Tryon, George W., Jr. 1882, Manual of conchology, 4(Mitridae): 106-200; pls. 32-58. Philadelphia. The Proc. Acad. Nat. 12, Monograph of the Hybrids between Cypraea tagris LinNAEUS, 1758 and Cypraea pantherina Sotanver, 1786 (Mollusca : Gastropoda) BY FRANZ A. SCHILDER University of Halle (Saale), German Democratic Republic Cypraea tigris Linnaeus, 1758, and C, pan- therina Solander, 1786, have been classified as distinct species by all authors; there are many distinctive characters which have been dis- cussed by Schilder & Schilder in 1939 (p. 185). Cypraea tigris lives in the Indo-Pacific Ocean from the coast of East Africa to Polynesia, whereas C, pantherina is restricted to the Red Sea. Recently we have received from Mr. W. L. Lander, Aden, a series of cowries collected by | himself at Aden last year. The series includes both Cypraea tigris and C. pantherina with typ- ical features as well as several intermediate specimens with mixed or intermediate charac- ters: these shells cannot be determined exactly as C. tigris nor as C. pantherina, and they should be regarded as hybrids, we think. Simi- lar intermediates (and true C. pantherina) have been collected, several decades ago, by Major Yerbury also at Aden; they are preserved now in the British Museum (see Schilder & Schilder, 1939, p. 185). A further intermediate shell ap- proaching C. tigris has been collected on the opposite shore of the Gulf of Aden at Jibuti; it is preserved among the duplicates in the Jous- seaume Collection (Museum of Paris). Page 84 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 The pale dwarf shells, however, which we have named Cypraea pantherina catulus in 1924 (p. 192) should be classified as C. pantherina according to the present paper, as the holotype only shows some characters recalling C. tigris a little. This variety undoubtedly comes from Aden too, as the holotype and the paratype have been collected by Steindachner and have been given to the author by the late curator of the Museum of Vienna, R. Sturany, in 1920; later on, we have seen three very similar shells also . aid to come from Aden: two in the Sullioti Col- lection, Genoa (one of which is now in the writ- er's collection), and one collected by Yerbury (see above). In the present paper we have treated 30 Cy- praea tigris from the Western Indian Ocean be- tween Kenya (leg. R. S. Benton), Mozambique (leg. Peters), and the Seychelles (leg. Winck- worth), 34 C. pantherina from the Red Sea be- tween Suez and Assab (various collectors), and 30 specimens from the Gulf of Aden, viz. 29 from Aden (leg. Lander, Yerbury) and one from Jibuti (leg. Jousseaume). We have classified the following four most essential characters: 1, The relative breadth of the shell, i. e., the maximum breadth expressed in percent of the length. There is a distinct correlation between this character and the swelling of margins and base: narrow shells exhibit steep margins and flat bases, whereas in broad shells both margins and base are convex. Besides, there is a distinct cor- relation between the length and the average relative breadth, so that in both species small specimens are usually broader than large ones. The common limit separating most specimens of the broader Cypraea ti- gris and the slender C. pantherina is about the relative breadth ''B"' (in percent) in shells of the length ''L"' (in mm.) as follows: i 45° 50 55/760) 165) 70) 75 7780)785) 90 95100 B 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 Therefore, the corrected relative breadth of each shell can be expressed by a positive or negative figure, indicating the difference between the real relative breadth and the limit between the two species as indicated above. 2. The relative closeness of the columellar teeth expressed by the letters ''k'' to ''w"’ as explained by Schilder in 1958. The cor- responding figures indicating the relative number of columellar teeth in shells of 25 mm. (Schilder & Schilder, 1938, p. 124) have been added in the table below. 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 oO -2 -4. -6 -8 The upper half of our diagram shows the correlation between these two characters in 30 Cypraea tigris (left below) and 34 C. pantherina (right above) from the Indian Ocean and from the Red Sea, respectively: there is a distinct gap between the two spe- cies. The lower half of the diagram shows the variability of the shells coming from the Gulf of Aden: there is a continuous zone from typical C, tigris to typical C. pan- therina, the centres of which seem to be slightly displaced towards the common lim- it (the crosses indicate specimens believed to be real hybrids). Additionally, we have examined two more characters evidently independent from the two characters just discussed: 3. The posterior extremity of the inner lip, varying from very blunt to acuminately pro- duced and curved to the left. 4. The size and the color of the lateral spots bordering the base, which vary from large and dark brown to small and pure orange. In each of these four characters we have distinguished six classes: class 2 and 5 :‘indi- cate typical Cypraea tigris and C. pantherina, respectively; class 3 and 4 designate interme- diate degrees; and class 1 and 6 designate ex- treme characters. The meaning of the figures is as follows: Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Posterior Extremity Corrected Rela- Class tive Breadth Columellar Teeth ] +14 to+ 9 | k - 1 (14-15) 2 srt) to) Gp & m-n_ (16) 3 + 4 to + 1 o -p (17-18) 4 Oto = 2 q-r_ (19) 5 - 3 to- 5 s - t (20-21) 6 - 6 to - 8 u - w (22-24) The following list contains the 94 speci- mens just examined personally, with four fig- ures indicating the classes of the four characters arranged as in this table; in each group the spe- cimens have been enumerated according to the sum of the four figures. Cypraea tigris from East Africa Kenya Mozambique 1211 1212 1221 1232 1221 3142 1222 1222 1321 1321 2123 2132 2132 2213 2222 (spf 2231 3122 2142 Zaze2 2331 2332 s232 3332 3343 Seychelles 2222 2232 2233 2332 2342 Page 85 Lateral Spots Very blunt Rather blunt Rather acuminate, but straight Acuminate, slightly impressed on the left Distinctly bent to the left Extremely produced and bent Aden Gulf (X= Lander 2122 2221 2231 2133 2322 2233 X3343 53355 X3533 X 2454 X 4443 3554 4445 4455 4455 4455 5455 5456 5565 Very large, dark Large, dark Large, partially paler Smaller, brown only Small, brownish and orange mixed Small, orange only hybrids) Yerbury x 3242 X 3443 xX 3345 5455 5455 6555 6555 cat. Jibuti X 3432 Cc. t, catulus_ 5346 typ. 6365 6556 Cypraea pantherina from Red Sea 4354 4454 4455 4554 5445 5445 5454 5455 5455 5455 5455 5455 Page 86 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 5545 5546 6545 6556 5554 5546 5655 6565 5554 5645 6555 6655 5554 5645 6555 6665 4655 6446 5456 6455 5465 6455 We can plot these figures by pairs: TYPICAL REGIONS ADEN GULF 4 5 6 2 5 3 6 5 4 3 2 1 Posterior Extremity One will observe. that the figures accumu- late in the lower left quarter (Cypraea tigris) and in the upper right quarter (C. pantherina), if we consider the East African and the Red Sea specimens only (the two left tables: the species are separated by the vertical line between class 3 and 4 regarding the breadth and the spots); in the Aden shells (the two right tables), however, there is a uniform band across the table. This fact may be shown both by considering the two characters first indicated (breadth and denti- tion: the two upper tables) as well as by com- paring the two last-named ones (lateral spots and posterior extremity: the two lower tables). The sum of the four figures designating the four characters of each shell indicates the gen- eral tendency of the specimen to approach typi- cal Cypraea tigris (4 x 2 = 8) or C. pantherina (4 x 5 = 20); sums which are outside these lim- its 8 to 20 indicate specimens with exaggerated specific characters, while sums between 8 and 20 indicate shells intermediate in a more or less distinct way. The following table contains the sums obtained from 30 East African C. ti- gris (T), 34 C. pantherina from the Red Sea (P), 2 4 5 and 30 shells from the Gulf of Aden, separated into true C. tigris (t), true C. pantherina (p), and intermediate shells thought to be hybrids (h): SUM ap P t Pp h 5 1 = - : - 6 3 - - - - 7 4 - 2 = : 8 10 - 1 = - 9 4 - 2 = - 10 5 - 1 = - 11 2 - - = 1 12 - - = 1 13 - - = 1 14 - - - - 3 15 - - - = 3 16 2 1 3 2 ss Ny - 1 - 2 - 18 - 5 - 4 - 19 - 9 - 3 - 20 - 11 - 2 - 21 - 3 - 3 - 22 - 3 - 1 - 23 - 1 - - - Vol. 5; No. 2 This table confirms that the fauna of Aden contains both species and real intermediates. Note: Mr. Lander found true Cypraea ti- gris at Tarshyne Point only, and the hybrids seem to be restricted to the same area, where- as typical C. pantherina have been collected also in remote areas of the Aden region: the material is still too scanty, but it seems to point to the local genetic influence of C. tigris. The dwarf C. pantherina catulus may live ina very restricted place not yet detected by Mr. Lander. Summary Cypraea tigris Linnaeus, 1758, and C. pan- therina Solander, 1786, are well separable if THE VELIGER Page 87 they come from regions where only one species lives; in the Gulf of Aden, however, where both species occur in the same place, one can ob- serve intermediate shells of various degrees which should be interpreted as hybrids. Literature Cited Schilder, Franz Alfred 1924, Systematischer Index der rezenten Cypraeidae. Arch. Naturgesch, 90 A 4: 179-214, ’ 1958, Die Bezeichnung der Zahndichte der Cypraeacea. Arch, Molluskenkunde 87 (1-3): 77-80, Schilder, Franz Alfred, & Maria Schilder 1938. Prodrome of amonograph on living Cypraeidae, Proc. Mal, Soc. Lond., 23 (3): 119-231; 16 textfigs. Preliminary Report on Time Elements involved in Hydrotropism in Helix aspersa (Gastropoda : Pulmonata) Following Dehydration BY FRED HERZBERG Department of Anatomy, Medical School, University of California, Los Angeles 24, California AND ANNE HERZBERG 5818 Jumilla Avenue, Woodland Hills, California (3 Textfigures) It has long been known that certain terres- trial animals tend to accumulate eitherin dryor wet areas. The terrestrial snail Helix aspersa is of the first type. Under dry conditions this animal will go into a state of dormancy, which may be changed to a state of activity upon mois - tening the animal or upon the introduction of water to its immediate area (Tryon, 1882). One adaptive mechanism in some animals is a behavioral tendency to select a region of optimum humidity. In arthropods there is an optimal humidity for various species, and such functions as reproductive rate, rate of individual development, proportion of individuals maturing are increased under optimal humidity conditions (Ludwig, 1945). African migratory locusts pre- fer dry air to wet air (Kennedy, 1937) and a similar preferenceis found in the mealworm beetle (Gunn and Pielow, 1940). Cockroaches have a mixed reaction to a humidity gradient, , but they become more hygropositive when des- sicated (Gunn and Cosway, 1938). The waod Page 88 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 louse is active in dry air and becomes almost motionless in nearly saturated air (Gunn, 1937), and Ptinus tectus Boie shows increased loco- motor activity with an increase in humidity (Bentley, 1944). Ina study of terrestrial iso- pods it was observed that the animals congre- gated in moist areas due to a decreasein activ- ity and an increase in turning (Waloff, 1941). Preferences for water - saturated soil and for moist but air-filled soil were observed in some species of earthworms (Roots, 1956). One spe- c -s of wireworm will migrate from dry to wet soil (Lees, 1943a) and will avoid dry air (Lees, 1943b). A review of the reactions of insects to humidity changes was presented by Dethier and Chadwick (1948). The following experiments were designed te furnish numerical data concerning hydrotrop- ism in the terrestrial snail Helix aspersa after the animals had been experimentally dehydrated. Materials & Methods Three groups of animals were used. Group I consisted of 130 specimens of Helix aspersa placed ina box 275 cm. high, 55 cm. long and 40 cm. wide. The top was covered by aluminum screening. The bottom of the box contained about 5 cm. of dry soil, onwhich food was placed as required. No water was supplied to these animals, nor was the soil moistened at any time. The animals were kept as above from May 12, 1960 to June 9, 1960 by which time all animals had sealed themselves off on the wooden sides of the box. On June 9, 1960 a round dish with a diam- eter of 17 cm. and a depth of 4 cm. was filled with water to half its height and placed in the center of the wooden box. A comparable dish without water was placed in the box as a con- trol. It was the purpose of this experiment to determine how long it would take the snails to cease estivating and reach the water. The box and dishes were observed several times each day and night. Snails found at the water dish were marked with blue nail polish on the apex of the spire, thus permitting identification of those snails which had reached the dish. In this man- ner it was possible to avoid counting the same animal more than once and to permit a count of the total number of animals which reached the water dish during the experimental period. Group II consisted of 50 snails which were kept dry ina large glass jar until they went into a state of dormancy. The spires of 25 were marked with red nail polishand 25 with blue nail polish and they were then placed in a wooden box 45 cm. by 45 cm., with aheightof 4cm, ex- clusive of 4 cm. of soil in the bottom of the box. A wooden divider, reaching from the bottom of the box to the aluminum screening covering the top of the box, was placed in its exact center in a manner which would divide the box into halves. A gap of 73cm. was left at one end of the divider, giving the snails access from one side of the box to the other through this opening. One side of the box was left entirely dry and the other half was kept constantly wet. Ad- equate amounts of food were supplied equally to both sides. The animals with red markings were placed on the dry side in the corner far- thest from the passageway between the dry and wet sides; the animals with blue markings were placed on the wet side of the box in the compar - able corner. The animals were observed daily and the numbers of red and blue marked snails found on the two sides were recorded. This ex- periment lasted from May 29, 1960 to June 14, 1960, at which date some animals accidentally escaped from the box. Group III consisted of 50 animals housed and treated exactly as were the animals in Group II. The only difference between this group and Group II is that after most of the animals had gone over to thewet side, the formerly dry side was madewet and the original wet side was per- mitted to dry out. This experiment ran from June 15, 1960 to July 4, 1960. Results Group I. 24 hours were required before the first animal ceased being dormant and reached the water dish. Thus the water dish placed in the box at 9 P.M. on June 9, 1960 was reached by the first snail at 9:30 P.M. on June 10. From that time onasuccessively larger number of snails ceased estivating each day and reached the water dish. Figure 1 shows the day by day increment overa period of 35 days. Most of this activity took place during the hours of darkness. The dry control dish did not attract any animals. It was found that approximately The container in which the Group I animals were housed was too small to permit valid ob- servations concerning the effects of distance from water on the time required to arouse the animals. Within the limits of the spaceused we observed no differences in time of arousal in animals closer or farther from the water dish. Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 89 Number of Number of Snails Snails 66 45 60 54 “3 a 4 35 42 36 30 30 24 75 18 20 12. 6 15 fa) 10 13 16 19 92 25 28 1 4 7 10 13 July Graph showing the day by day increment in the numbers of animals ceasing estivation and becoming active in the presence of a dish of water (Group 1) June Figure 1: Group II. It was observed that the animals from both sides tended to travel back and forth from one side to the other. On the whole, how- ever, the tendency was for all animals, regard- less of the side on which they were originally placed, to concentrate on the wet side. The largest number of animals concentrated on each side during each day of the experiment is shown graphically in Figure 2. The initial tendency to move from the dry side to the wet side was ob- served ten hours after the beginning of the ex- periment. Group III. It took ten days for 49 of the 50 animals to concentrate on the wet side. When the wet side was permitted to become dry and the original dry side was made wet it took 9 days for 49 animals to congregate on the new wet side. The largest number of animals concen- trated oneach side during each day of the exper- iment is shown graphically in Figure 3. In this group, as in Group II, the tendency to move from the dry side to the wet side was observed within less than 12 hours after the experiment started, Discussion It has long been known that Helix aspersa will seek moist areas in preference to dry ones when a choice is available. The mechanism by 10 20g ge we eA Bae Be tO. ore May June Figure 2: Solid line: number of snails migrating from the dry soil to the wet soil. Broken line: number of snails remaining on the dry side at any given time (Group 2) which this is done is not apparent from these data, but the time intervals involved in ceasing estivation and reaching water are clear. This animal is able to detect moisture from the in- duced dormant state and will reach the moisture in a short period of time. The behavior of the animal may be experimentally varied by sub- jecting it toalternate wet and dry environments, and the time required for the beginning of activ- ity and its subsequent continuationmay be meas - ured. The results of these experiments suggest other likely procedures designed to furnish ad- ditional data on hydrotropism in Helix aspersa. The effects of relative humidity on the arousal of dormant snails could shed light on the mech- anism of arousal. The manner of finding water after arousal could be studied asa possible sep- arate physiologic process. The effect of dis- tance from water on the arousal process will be studied by us in an effort to determine whether a critical distance exists beyond which the pres- ence of water fails to arouse the animals, and to observe any differences existing in arousal time in animals placed at various distances from water within the probable critical distance. Page 90 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Number of Snails 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 Hey NG) 2 a), Bar June 23) 25,270 29) 10 13 July Figure 3: Solid line on the left: number of snails migrating from dry to wet soil. Solid line on the right: number of snails migrating when wet and dry soils were reversed. Broken lines: number of snails on the dry side at any given time (Group 3) Summary Three experiments are described in which specimens of Helix aspersa indicated their abil- ity to awaken from an induced dormant state when moisture became available to them. The animals reached moisture within a day after being exposed to its presence. Animals givena choice between wet and dry soil congregated in the moist area within ten days. When the positions of wet and dry soil were reversed the animals moved to the new wet soil from the new dry soil within nine days. ABSTRACT Two hundred and thirty specimens of Helix aspersa were subjected to three experimental procedures for the purpose of studying their a- bility to react to the presence of moisture dur- ing their dormant state. Itwas found that it took One day for the first dormant snails to reach water after which time successively larger num- bers reached it daily. The first snails left dry soil and reached wet soil in twelve hours or less and virtually all animals in the two groups stud- ied reached wet soil over a period of ten days. When the dry and wet soils were reversed the now non-dormant snails reached the new wet soil in nine days. Literature Cited Bentley, E. W. 1944, The biology and behavior of Ptinus tectus Boie (Coleoptera, Ptinidae), a pest of stored products. V. Humidity reactions. Jour. Exp. Biol. 20: 152 to 158. Dethier, V., & L. Chadwick 1948. Chemoreception in insects. Physiol. Rev. 28: 220-254. Gunn, D. L. 1937. The humidity reactions of the wood louse, Por- cellio scaber (Latreille), Jour. Exp. Bio. 14: 178-185. Gunn, D. L., & C, A. Cosway 1938. The temperature and humidity relations of the cockroach. V. Humidity preference. Jour. Exp. Biol. 15; 555-563. Gunn, D. L., & D. P. Pielow 1940. The humidity behavior of the mealworm beetle, Tenebrio molitor L. I. The reaction to differences of humidity. Jour. Exp. Biol. 17: 286-294, Kennedy, J. S. 1937. The humidity reactions of the African migra- tory locust, Locusta migratoria migratorioides R, and F., gregarious phase. Jour. Exp. Biol. 14; 187-197. Lees, A. A. 1943a. On the behavior of the wireworms of the genus Agriotes Esch. (Coleoptera, Elateridae). I. Reac- tions to humidity. Jour. Exp. Biol. 20; 43-53. , 1943b. On the behavior of the wireworms of the genus Agriotes Esch. (Coleoptera, Elateridae). Il. Reac- tions to moisture. Jour. Exp. Biol. 20: 54-60. Ludwig, D. 1945, Theeffects of atmospheric humidity uponanimal life. Physiol. Zool. 18: 103-135. Prosser, C. L. 1950. Comparative Animal Physiology. W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia. ix+ 888 pp., 312 textfigs. Roots, B. 1956. The water relations of earthworms. II. Resist- ance to dessication and immersion, and behavior when submerged and allowed a choice of environ- ment. Jour. Exp. Biol. 33: 29-44. Tryon, George W., Jr. 1882. Structural and systematic conchology; an intro- duction to the study of the mollusca, Vol. I. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, Pa. Waloff, N. 1941. restrial isopods. The mechanisms of humidity reactions of ter- Jour. Exp. Biol. 18: 115-135. Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 91 Notes & News The Types of Lamellaria sharonae WiLLETT, 1939 (Gastropoda) BY JEAN & CRAWFORD CATE Conchologica! Club of Southern California Tos Angeles 7, California While going through a large assortment of shells that has been in storage at our home for several years (mostly from the collection of Rubie E. Sharon), we recently came across an important series of West Coast shells, long overlooked because it had never been unwrapped. The shells were in a homemade Riker mount containing three glass-topped pill boxes, each of these holding a pair or more of the probable paratypes of Lamellaria sharonae Willett, 1939. A glance through the dusty glass revealed a pen- cilled notation on the bottom of the Riker mount itself: 'Nautilus of April 1939, page 123. lla- maria sharonii" [sic]. Checking this reference we found that the types are in the Los Angeles County Museum (one of these was in alcohol at that time), and ''paratypes are in the collections of Mrs. Sharon, and Mr. and Mrs. E, P. Chace,"! As we purchased Mrs. Sharon's entire collec- tion of shells in 1956, it is probable that these are the above-mentioned paratypes. We have deposited in museums all eight of the specimens we found, but in so doing we kept two sets intact (with two specimens and four specimens, respectively) rather than disperse all of the shells among eight different reposi- tories, because some of them are subadult spe- cimens. To the best of our knowledge, the entire known series of type specimens of Lamellaria sharonae Willett, 1939, is listed here, together with the location of each set: Los Angeles County Museum: Holotype LAM 1059 2 Paratypes LAM 1124 LAM 1125 San Diego Natural History Museum (ex Chace Goll.) 2 Paratypes 42'596 United States National Museum: 4 Paratypes 638'944 California Academy of Sciences: 2 Paratypes 12'406 Santa Barbara Museum of Natural History (re- places paratype lost by fire in 1962): 1 Paratype 03'606 Stanford University Paleontological Type Col- lection: 1 Paratype 9'514 According to Willett's original description in The Nautilus (1939), the Sharon specimens were collected in Anaheim Bay; the Chace spe- cimens he designated as paratypes are from Newport Bay. Willett's spelling (''sharoni'') was emended by Burch (1946) to the correct form as used here, because the species was named for Mrs. Sharon. Literature Cited Burch, John Q. 1946, Minutes of the Conchol, Club South. Calif. no. ls. fea Uo Willett, George 1939. Description of a new mollusk from California, The Nautilus 52 (4): 123-124; pl. 9, figs. 1, la, 1b. 1963 Meeting Dates of the American Malacological Union Pacific Division The 16th annual conference of the Ameri- can Malacological Union, Pacific Division, will once again be held on the beautiful campus of the University of California at Santa Barbara (Goleta). The dates will be June 26, 27, 28, and 29, 1963. Be sure to reserve these dates well in advance, as you will not want to miss this meeting! Well-known collectors from overseas are planning to attend and will share some of their experiences with us. Further details regarding reservations and program will be announced later. Crawford N. Cate, Chairman ARIMO Wi = b> Page g2 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Notes on Some Tropical West American Mollusks BY EUGENE COAN Conchological Club of Southern California Los Angeles 7, California The following are specimens with which I have recently worked and which constitute new records to be reported. All were collected dur- ing my trip to Mazatldn in December, 1961, ex- cept for Gastrochaena ecuadoriensis. 1, Clathurella rava (Hinds, 1843); one speci- men. Rubble beach on the north end of Ma- zatl4n. Previously known from Nicaragua to Costa Rica. 2. Nassarius limacinus (Dall, 1917); one spe- cimen. Material deposited on the ocean side of the northern portion of the Mazatlan breakwater. Not taken since its descrip- tion. 3. Aesopus xenicus Pilsbry & Lowe, 1932; two specimens. Mazatl4n, with Nassarius li- macinus. Previously known from Acapulco. 4, Mitromorpha filosa Carpenter, 1865; one specimen. Mazatlan, with Nassarius lima- cinus. Gale Sphon and Faye Howard col- lected three living specimens on Venado Island, Mazatlan, in the same month. Dall (1921) reports it from the ''Gulf of Califor- nia'' in Bulletin 112. 5. Semelina sp. cf. S, subquadrata (Carpen- ter, 1857); many valves, Mazatlan, with Nassarius limacinus and others, from dredgings that had been dumped on the south shore of Mazatldn Harbor. This seems to be the S. subquadrata of Olsson (1961). It is not certain whether these specimens are the ''? Montacuta subquadrata'"! described by Carpenter (1857). Keen (1958) reports that Hertlein and Strong have identified a My- sella subquadrata as being what Carpenter meant. Type specimens will have to be studied before the discrepancy can be cleared up. Carpenter's description seems to fit Semelina. 6, Petricola (Rupellaria) exarata (Carpenter, 1857); 10 complete specimens. Nestling in rocks just south of the buildings of Altata. Carpenter's description was based upon an evidently immature specimen, and the form seems not to have been taken Since. 7. Gastrochaena sp. cf. G. rugulosa Sowerby, 1834; many perfect specimens, which seem to be this form, were collected at Altata, with Petricola exarata. One specimen was collected boring in Vitularia salebrosa in Bocochibampo Bay, Guaymas. This extends the range from the Galapagos Islands. Spe- cimens in the Stanford collection extend the range to Scammon's Lagoon. Shells iden- tified as Spengleria truncata (Sowerby, 1834) by collectors may also be this species. 8. Gastrochaena ecuadoriensis Olsson, 1961; one perfect specimen, out of a valve of Anadara multicostata beached near Guay- mas. Collected in March, 1961, by Joseph Magruder. This extends the range from Ecuador. Acknowledgment The identifications of the first three spe- cies were made with the assistance of Dr. S. S. Berry; Dr. Myra Keen identified the next four species listed; Dr. Leo Hertlein identified the last. I wish to express my gratitude to the per- sons named. Literature Cited Carpenter, Philip Pearsall y 1855/57. Catalogue of the Reigen collection of Mazat- lan mollusca in the British Museum, xvit552 pp. Warrington. Dall, William Healey 1921. Summary of the marine shellbearing mollusks of thenorthwest coast of America, from San Diego, California, to the Polar Sea, mostly contained in the collection of the United States National Museum, with illustrations of hitherto unfigured species. . U. S. Nat. Mus, Bull. 112; pp, 1-217; pls. 1-22. Keen, A. Myra 1958. Sea shells of tropical west America; marine mollusks from Lower California to Colombia. Stanford, Calif., _Stanford Univ, Press; xi + 624 pp. ; illus. Olsson, Axel A. 1961, Mollusks of the tropical eastern Pacific, par- ticularly from the southernhalf of the Panamic Pa- cific faunal province (Panama to Peru), Part I, Panamic-Pacific pelecypoda, Paleont. Res. Inst. Ithaca, N. Y.; pp. 1-574; pls. 1-86. Vol. 5; No. 2 WE VEEIGER Page 94 New Officers of the American Malacological Union Pacific Division At the business session of the American Malacological Union, Pacific Division, meeting for its 15th convention at Asilomar on June 30, 1962, the following persons were elected to serve during the 16th convention: Crawford N. Cate, Chairman (Los Angeles) Dr. A. Myra Keen, Vice-Chairman (Stan- ford University) Ruth Chace French, Secretary (Lomita) Fay Henry Wolfson, Treasurer (San Diego) Cowrie Holotype Located BY CRAWFORD N. CATE Conchological Club of Southern California Los Angeles 7, California Miss J. Hope Macpherson has very kindly pointed out the whereabouts of the holotype of the subspecies named Cypraea venusta bakeri Gatliff, 1916, mentioned in my recent paper (July, 1962) as unknown. According to Miss Macpherson this specimen is Number F616 in the collection of the National Museum of Victoria in Melbourne, Australia, where she is Curator of Molluscs. Iam grateful for the opportunity to add this bit of information to the other facts known about this rare cowrie. The Editor’s Face is RED! The Editor apologizes. A glaring error was permitted to pass by, unnoticed for the time! In the title of Mr. Lance's first article in our July issue, it should, of course, read: from the Northeastern Pacific. The same correction should be made in the title given on the inside portion of the table of contents. Information Desk Use of the Term ‘“‘Hypotype”’ BY R. TUCKER ABBOTT Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia {Editor's Note: The following article was sent in by Dr. R. Tucker Abbott. As is customary with all papers received for publication in the Veliger, it was submitted to members of the Editorial Board for appraisal and comment. The members of the Editorial Board either didnot agree with Dr. Abbott's paper inits entirety or with large portions of it, Consequently, the paper was returned together with the written comments by one member, in order that he might modify such portions as seemed open to criticism; in par- ticular, it was suggested that he should indicate that this represented his personal opinion, Dr. Abbott resubmitted the paper unaltered, indicating that he did not think it de- sirable - in his words - to ''belabor such a short and not overly important article with numerous phrases of 'in the opinion of this author'.. etc,'' We are, therefore, publish- ing his paper exactly as originally submitted. Needless to say, we cannot agree with Dr. Abbott in all points but he certainly has the right to be heard. — Dr, Abbott's article will be followed by the comments Dr. Keen had made and which she has kindly consented for us to include here. } The use of the term "hypotype"' by the editor of and by many authors writing for The Veliger is not the customary one used among practicing taxonomists, andis therefore in need of clarifi- cation. Contrary to Stohler's understanding (1962, p. 217), primary types include neotypes and lectotypes, but not hypotypes. The latter are secondary types (Frizzell, 1933, p. 664). The use of the term "hypotype'' as a partial substi- tute for ''paratype'' or complete substitute for the term ''paratype allotype"' is neither war- ranted nor correct. Most definitions, including the original by Schuchert (1897), and subsequent ones by authors of books on procedures in taxonomy (Schenk & McMasters, 1936, and Keen & Miller's 1956 edition; Mayr, Linsley, & Usinger, 1953; Friz- zell, 1953, p. 152; Int. Code Zool. Nomen., 1961, p.75 and p.79, recomm.73D) state, or imply, that ''paratypes'' include all of the type-series, other than the holotype {see also Editor's Com- ment at the end of this article}. That some specimens examined and used by the describer came from localities other than that of the holo- type or the type locality has never limited or changed the definition of a ''paratype'' in the minds of these authors or the International Commission. Page 94 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 The relative value of paratypes from the type locality as contrasted with those from dif- ferent localities is not as significant as one might suppose, for ''mixtures'' of species among paratypes can occur among any sampling, re- gardless of where or when it was collected. Nevertheless, this fine distinction was recog- nized and given names by Silvestri in 1929. The terms are clumsy and have been abandoned by most workers (''paratype allotype''—a paratype from a different locality than the holotype; paratype omotype''-»a paratype from the same locality as the holotype). In practice, one need only read the locality data on a label or in the text- or figure-reference of a paratype to de- termine to which category it belongs. The term "hypotype" introduced by Schu- chert (1897, p. 637) is what some paleontologists once called the ''Supplementiar-type"', ''supple- mentary type", or Cossmann's ''Plesiotype". This was a specimen subsequently described or figured in a later publication which extended or corrected the knowledge of a previously defined species. For example, if the holotype was a fossil fragment or a poorly preserved speci- men, a second, better, and subsequently- collected and -illustrated specimen was termed and designated the "hypotype"', a sort of 'im- proved'' holotype. In practice, this term lost its usefulness, for any specimen subsequently fig- ured or better described became a hypotype. Thus, hundreds of specimens of species origin- ally described by Linnaeus became so-called hypotypes. For one example of this practice, see Hertlein & Emerson, 1953, p. 362. In due course, some workers used ''hypotype" in lieu of "a figured specimen". A genus was illustrated and a hypotype of it established by Durham (1944, p. 192, Sepia? sp., hypotype no. 35501, Mus. Paleo., Univ. Calif.) when the intent was merely to indicate that the specimen of an unidentifiable fragment was being illustrated in his paper. A still different use of the term "hypotype"' was introduced into the literature in 1959 by Stohler in describing his Macrarene coronaden- sis. It was applied to specimens in the type- series, but this was an incorrect usage of Schuchert's term. The terms "hypotype'' and "homeotype" are largely obsolete and. have little use. If the use of the term "hypotype’' continues as a partial substitute for ''paratype'', one will have to coin a new term to distinguish a 'hypo- type that was part of the type-series'' and a "hypotype that was published upon in a paper appearing after the original description''. In the event that a holotype was lost or destroyed, only a 'hypotype'' from the original type-series could be chosen as a lectotype, while a "hypotype'' of the customary understanding would have to be made a neotype. The most useful terms for species types which have survived and are recommended by most experts are: holotype, paratype, syntype, lectotype, neotype, and topotype. The other 230-odd type-terms usually can be expressed in plain English. Literature Cited Durham, J. Wyatt 1944, Megafaunal zones of the Oligocene of northwest- ern Washington, Bull, Dept. Geol. Sci., Univ. Calif. 27 (5): 101-212; pls, 13-18, Frizzell, Don L. 1933, Terminology of types. Amer. Midland Nat. 14 (6): 637-668. A Hertlein, Leo G., & William K. Emerson 1953. Mollusks from Clipperton Island (Eastern Paci- fic) with the description of anew species of gastro- pod, Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist. 11 (13): 345-364; pls. 26-27. J Mayr, E., E. Gordon Linsley & Robert L, Usinger 953% Methods and principles of systematic zoology. McGraw-Hill, New York, ix + 328 pp. Schenk, Edward T., & John H. McMasters 1956. Procedure in taxonomy. Stanford Univ. Press, vii + 119. Third ed, enlarged by A. Myra Keen and S. W. Muller. Schuchert, C. 1897. What is a type in natural history? s.) 5: 636-640. Silvestri, F. 1929. Transactions 4th International Congress Entom, Ithaca, August 1928; p. 693. Stohler, Rudolf 1959. Twonew species of west North American marine gastropods. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., 4th ser. 29: 423-44; figs. 1-10. ===>) = 1962. Holotype - Paratype - Syntype - Hypotype. Veliger 4 (4): 217-218. Science (n. The {Editor's Comment: The new Code governs the naming of species and certain other taxa in the interests of stability and universality. The Code does not attempt to regulate the thinking of investigators; in fact, much emphasis is laid in the introduction to the new "International Code" that the opinions and decisions of the individual workers should re- main unhampered and uninfluenced by the Code, except in the matters strictly pertaining to the naming of taxa. Dr. Abbott refers above to Article 73, recommendation D, In the language of the Code a recommendation is just that; it is not mandatory. However, Article 72(b)is binding. It reads as follows: "Article 72. General provisions. - (b) Type-se- ries, -- The type-series of a species consists of all the specimens on which its author bases the species, except any that he refers to as variants, or doubtfully associates with the nominal species, or expressly excludes from it. '' This article seems clearly to authorize an investigator to use in his original description material from any source, For reasons discussed in our paper (Stohler, 1959), we had Vol. 5; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 95 chosen not to include as paratypes certain specimens; yet we felt the need to distinguish those other specimens ina special way. We are aware that curators of certain muse- ums to whom we distributed our hypotypes have entered them as paratypes. This is, of course, their prerogative, as long as the original label, supplied with the specimen, remains with it, The reasons for setting apart the hypotypes, as used in the paper mentioned, were more fully elaborated in the other paper to which Dr, Abbott takes exception (Stohler, 1962). It is only one of the threeuses of the term 'hypotype' to which Dr. Abbott objects, but it is the one in which we are directly involved. } COMMENTS ON A PAPER Bye AR AL, Zee BYOMEAE by Myra Keen {This commentary by Dr. Keen was made by her as a member of the Editorial Board and is published with her permission.} The terms ''primary'"' and ''secondary'' were used in Schenk & McMasters' work to classify type terms by function, purely as a matter of convenience for students. This publication was not official and certainly did not preémpt the use of the two words for other ways of grouping. In The Veliger paper of Stohler (Vol. 4, No. 4, p. 217), the grouping of type terms is in a tem- poral sense: primary, first; secondary, later. I cannot see that Dr. Stohler is in error if he chooses to do this. His critic may think he is, but this is a different matter. Most of the sen- tences in the first paragraph of his paper should be prefaced with "I think"' or "I believe'', for they all (or nearly all) express personal opinion that is not necessarily based upon objective evi- dence. It is true that the term '"hypotype'' was Originally proposed in a rather restricted sense. This does not mean that in practice its use may not be broadened. I suspect that I have been one of the prime culprits in so doing, for it is the conviction at Stanford that type categories should be as few as possible. Our printed labels carry Only the headings: holotype, paratype, syntype, neotype, lectotype, and hypotype. Any specimens that do not qualify for one of the first five categories must of necessity fall into the sixth. This is a purely practical consideration, aside from theory. As to the objection to a restricted usage of "paratype". It is a logical corollary of the newer trend in zoology, regarding types as mere population samples. The type series should represent a single population as nearly as the author of the species can recognize it. If he ‘confident of his identification. includes material from unknown or distant lo- calities, he increases the risk of creating a composite species that will later have to be re- fined. From this viewpoint, it would seem more discreet to restrict the type series to that popu- lation at the type locality and to designate other material as supplementary or as extending the concept of the species — in other words, as hypotypes, even though the author may feel The new Inter- national Code makes no provision at all for the category of hypotype, and paratypes are rele- gated to a Recommendation, in which authors are advised to label them as such after select- ing the holotype. To me this means that we are free to derive, pragmatically, procedures that will insure a maximum of clarity and a mini- mum of later revisionary work. It would seem to be safer to err in the direction of under- inclusion than of over-inclusion in the type se- ries and to consider that specimens separated from each other, either in time or space, by an appreciable gap are not members of a single population, even though they may be a part of a species unit. The Disposition of Type Specimens BY RUDOLF STOHLER Department of Zoology University of California, Berkeley 4, California Any holotype, being the name bearer of a Species or subspecies, should be regarded as public property since it should be available to all qualified workers who need to refer to it. This availability should never be limited, as it would be if the type specimen were to remain in private hands. Logically, then, the holotype specimen should be deposited with some recog- nized public museum that is prepared to care for such materia! on a permanent and continu- ing basis. Paratype specimens, especially if relative- ly numerous, might be distributed to a number of widely scattered public museums. This would have the advantage that workers in distant Page 96 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 places would have relatively easy access toa typical representative of a given taxon. How- ever, in view of the trend toward considering species units on a population level rather than on a single specimen level, it can be argued that it would be much more advisable to keep the entire group of specimens, upon which the new taxon is based, together. This argument receives added support from the possibility that the original population might have been com- posed of two or more sibling species and to as- c stain this possibility the entire population would be needed; if the specimens were widely distributed, the task becomes almost hopeless, for the re-assembling of the group in one place may not be feasible. However, if the author desires to distribute his specimens, he certainly has the right to do so. In that case he should consider not only the distribution of the specimens but also the loca- tion of the workers in the same or closely re- lated field. Further, some paratypes should be placed in public museums that are fairly close to the type locality, so that local collectors might compare their own specimens with a type specimen for positive identification. But the author should not feel obliged to give paratype specimens to private individuals, especially if they have not made arrangements for ultimate placement of their collection in some properly qualified public repository. It was pointed out in an earlier article of this series that para- types may become of utmost importance if the holotype specimen, for one reason or another, is lost or destroyed. One of the paratypes then will be chosen to become the lectotype. If all paratypes are in private collections, it will be difficult, if not impossible, to select a lecto- type, especially if no records have been kept of the whereabouts of the paratypes or of the fate of the private collections containing them. Too often, private collections become lost or hope- lessly scattered after the death of the original owner. The importance of the ready availability of the holotype is so great that no journal should accept a manuscript in which a new taxon is de- scribed unless definite and binding provisions have been made to deposit at least the holotype with a recognized public museum. At the same time the museum number assigned to the holo- type should be included in the publication, as this will materially facilitate locating the holo- type if it ever becomes necessary. The policy of The Veliger has been from its beginning to make these conditions, and we are gratified to see other reputable journals gradually adopting the same policy. Another point to consider is the most ap- propriate time for the type material to be turned over to the repository. A serious problem may arise in those cases where curators have adopt- ed the policy of assigning museum numbers only upon receipt of a specimen. This has some ad- vantages for the museum but has dangers inher- ent for the author of a new taxon. We consider it unwise to relinquish the type material before the description of the new taxon is actually pub- lished, yet itis very important that the museum number of the types of the new taxon be re- corded at the time of its original publication (so that future workers would have that information without delay). If a specimen is transmitted to a repository before publication, there is the danger that a visitor to the collection may un- wittingly make a nomen nudum of the name; it is possible that he might, in good faith, report in some club publication that he had seen the type of taxon ''A'', In most cases, unfortunate- ly, there is a considerable lapse of time be- tween the acceptance of a manuscript and its appearance in print. Even a cautious curator might forget that the specimen in his care re- presents an as yet unpublished taxon. Since the human element cannot ever be ruled out, we strongly favor withholding the type specimens — and even the use of the name in correspondence —until publication is complete. The acceptance of type material, however, implies also the acceptance of certain obliga- tions by the repository. Since the holotype may be regarded as public property—that is to say, available for inspection to any and all interested and duly qualified workers—the museum must be prepared to do several things. First and foremost must be the assurance that the speci- men will be properly preserved in such a fashion that its natural colors are protected as much as possible; that the specimen itself be kept free from attacks by pests of any sort; that speci- mens preserved in liquids be kept from drying out. The second condition must be that the mu- seum is prepared to accommodate visiting workers so that they can study the type material in every way that may be necessary. And thirdly, the repository should be in a position to supply promptly detailed information about the type specimens in its care; photographs should be made available, if requested. Of course, it is only fair that the museum supplying such in- formation be reimbursed for its own costs and that its rights in its photographs or other illus- trative material be protected. However, if a museum refuses to cooperate with workers making reasonable requests, no further dona- tions of type material should be made to such Vol. 5; No. 2 an institution. If the lack of cooperation is due to poor housekeeping on the part of the cura- torial staff, that is, if the type specimens have become lost or so badly misplaced as not to be ~ readily available, it is obvious that one of the fundamental requirements for a type repository is not being met. If a museum decides ona re- organization of its collections, information on type material should still be made available, since the fact of past poor housekeeping at a particular institution should not be permitted to hold up or delay current research work. Such a museum runs the risk of alienating donors who may remove it from the list of recipients until it again is in a position to render those services to be justifiedly expected from it. There is a tremendous task ahead for the staffs of many type repositories. In recent years several lists and books have been pub- lished in which the exact whereabouts of type specimens is listed; many of these lists, such as the one by Dr. K.V. W. Palmer on the Car- penter types, not only fully illustrate the type specimens but also contain important critical revisions of the species for which the types are present. Such lists are of utmost importance and it is to be hoped that eventually all existing type specimens will be reported. The minimal information to be supplied should include the place where the specimen is kept, its museum number, its state of preservation, the exact spelling of the name given by the original au- thor. Additional information might include the usual measurements for that kind of animal, made with accurate modern measuring instru- ments and given in metric units; it might in- clude a complete synonymy for the particular taxon, but at least the name under which the taxon is known at the present time; and cer- tainly not least desirable would be adequate il- lustrations of the type specimens. A Holiday Present for Your Shell Collector Friend or Your Shell Correspondent? The Ideal Gift A Subscription to THE VELIGER ee tl l l fl f 0 l el THE VELIGER Page 97 Books, Periodicals, Pamphlets THE GENUS TUBUAIA (PULMONATA, ACHATINELLIDAE) by Yoshio Kondo Bernice P, Bishop Museum Bull, 224, pp. 1-49, figs. 1-14, February 16, 1962. This is a continuation of the work initiated by Cooke & Kondo's 1960 ''Revision of Tornatel- linidae and Achatinellidae'', previously reviewed in The Veliger (Vol. 4, No. 2, pp. 116-117), in which Tubuaia was proposed as a new genus of achatinellids. This present paper deals with 18 species of the genus of which 10 species, 11 Material is based mainly upon shells collected by the Mangarevan Expedition of 1934, Distribution of these land snails is limited only to certain Pa- cific Islands, including the Cook, Society, and subspecies, and one variety are new. Austral groups, and Rapa, Mangareva, Pitcairn, and Henderson. An outlier species is found on the Kermadec Islands. The work is typical of Kondo's thorough work and the illustrations are his own excellent drawings. The evolution and zoogeography of the group are interestingly dis - cussed, along with possible methods of distri- bution. AGS MARINE MOLLUSCS OF VICTORIA by J. Hope Macpherson and C.J. Gabriel Melbourne University Press, 475 pp., 500 illust., cloth bound. 1962. Sold in the United States by Cambridge Univer- sity Press; price will be about $12.-. Detailed descriptions and illustrations cover all of the common species of Victorian shells, together with their range and distribu- tion. Their points of difference are stated simply, and any feature of special interest is discussed, so identification is made easy. A systematic list of the remaining species is given with their authors and recorded Victorian locale ities. There is a definition of each family and of the principal genera, including the author of the genus and type species. All scientific names Page 98 are given with dates and a comprehensive bib- liography. A very good glossary explains the technical terms used in the scientific descrip- tions. This is of value not only to the layman but to the advanced student, because authors differ in their terminology. The index is ade- quate. This is important; we have too many books that contain valuable information but with an index so poor that the reader cannot find it. This is a scholarly book and highly recom- mended. JQB HOW TO KNOW THE EASTERN LAND SNAILS by John B. Burch Pictured Key Nature Series (H. E. Jaques, Ed.); 214 pp., 519 figs. in text; Wm. C. Brown Company, Publishers, 135 South Locust St., Dubuque, Iowa. 1962 (Recd. June). $2.50. This newest addition to ''The Pictured Key Nature Series'' which was started in 1947 is a most welcome addition to conchological litera- ture. Basically, it is a manual for identification of species east of the Continental Divide in the form of a carefully constructed key that expert and amateur alike will find relatively easy to use. Of special importance is the fact that each species is illustrated with drawings made by the author in most instances, many of the smaller snails being enlarged to show salient charac- ters of shape and sculpture, An added feature is the careful explanation of the terminology used in the key by means of applicable draw- ings. The first few sections describe the snails and their basic morphology, the systematics of the Mollusca in general, with emphasis on the gastropods, the various molluscan provinces in the United States, habits of snails and slugs, and their economic importance. There is a well se- lected list of references. Following these sec- tions is a pictured-key to land snail families that the interested beginner will need to use as a first step in identifying species, which are keyed to their respective families. This paper- backed guide closes with a systematic list of the eastern United States land snails, including page and figure references, and an excellent ''Index and Pictured Glossary". THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 Burch, who is a Research Associate in the Mollusk Division, Museum of Zoology, Univer- sity of Michigan, is to be highly complimented for a thorough and painstaking technical piece of work that will serve for a long time as a use- ful guide to eastern land snails. His classifica- tion follows Pilsbry's monumental work on the "Tjand Mollusca of North America (North of Mexico) 1939-1948", which is expensive and too bulky to carry in the field. Burch's Pictured- Key happily is both handy and inexpensive. This reviewer has already used the Key several times on species generally difficult to identify and has found that it works. The only seeming flaw observed is the appearance of the polygy- rid species Mesodon roemeri (Pfeiffer) in three different positions in the Key (pp. 163, 170, 172). Species of the Succineidae, or ''amber snails", are covered by generic examples only, because present taxonomic difficulties prevent proper identification of the 20 or more eastern United States species. A few of the species illustra- tions, notably of the Helicidae, are not up to the high standards set by the great majority. This guide paves the way for a similar one covering species west of the Continental Divide, which has long been a desideratum for West Coast conchologists. AGS NEW AND LITTLE-KNOWN SPECIES OF SOUTH AND CENTRAL AMERICAN LAND SNAILS (BULIMULIDAE) by Juan José Parodiz Proceedings, U. S. National Museum, vol. 113, no. 3462, pp. 429-456, pls. 1- 2. 1962. (Recd. July) A relatively short but important taxonomic paper on a large land snail family, based upon an examination of about 1,000 species in the National Museum collection. A total of 46 spe- cies or subspecies are discussed, including eight described as new. Dr. Parodiz, Curator of Invertebrates, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa., is working on a neéded reclassification of the Bulimulidae to be published in a more ex- tensive paper which will be welcomed by stu- dents of this interesting group of land snails. AGS Vol. 5; No. 2 REPORTS OF THE LUND UNIVERSITY CHILE EXPEDITION 1948-1949. 35. PELECYPODA by Tron Soot-Ryen lands Universitets Arsskrift N. F. Avd. 2, Bd. 55, Nr. 56 (Kungl. Fysiografiska Sallskapets Handlingar. N. F. Bd. 70, Nr. 6), pp. 1-86, pls. 1-4, figs. 1-6 in text 959) This contribution to the knowledge of Chile- an mollusks contains the results of a study of the Pelecypoda (67 marine and two freshwater species) collected on the Lund University Chile Expedition. These were assembled from 118 collecting stations, from shore to 470 meters, but mostly not exceeding 50 meters. Combined with the species of .this expedition are earlier records of pelecypods from Chile, making a to- tal of 167 species arranged in 46 families. Of the total number, 80 species are endemic; 35 occur in the Atlantic; and 56, about a third of the total fauna, range to the north of Chile to Peru or further. There are 95 genera, none en- demic, 53 of which are represented by only one species. A remarkably large number of species of Nucula (22) have been reported from Chile; but Soot-Ryen pointed out that some of these are synonyms and some incorrectly identified. The Magellanic region has the highest num- ber of species, 96 (57.5 percent) of the total fauna, also the highest percentage of Prionodes- macea (38 of 52 or 73 percent), and Anomalo- desmacea (11 of 13 or 85 percent). The Teleo- desmacea occur in greatest number in northern Chile (56 of 102 or 55 percent). The antiboreal region is divided by Soot- Ryen into the Magellanic and a minor Chonos zone which extends north to Chiloe Island. Thirty-three species are endemic to the Magel- lanic fauna, and the same number occur in the western Atlantic. Between Chiloe Island and Valparaiso, the Magellanic zone gives way toa temperate subzone. Just north of Valparaiso this temperate zone is replaced by a warm tem- perate zone characterized by 34 species, 11 of which are endemic. Soot-Ryen, from his studies, concluded that the affinities of the species of the Magellanic fauna with those of the Antarctic are negligible. However, the genera of the Chilean pelecypod fauna, other than those of wide distribution, THE VELIGER Page 99 show close relationship with those of the east- ern and western Americas and the Antarctic, although some point toward faunal relationship with the subantarctic islands, Australia, New Zealand, and South Africa. Twenty-one species are illustrated on four plates. Nine species described as new in 1957 (Astarte, No. 16), illustrated in the present pa- per are: Malletiella soror (pl. 1, figs. 4-5), Philobrya brattstroemi (pl. 1, fig. 6), Lyonsia elegantula (pl. 1, fig. 10), Kingiella chilenica (pl. 2, figs. 13-15), Cyamiocardium dahli (pl. 2, fig. 16), Neolepton hupei (pl. 2, fig. 18, textfig. 3), Lasaea helenae (pl. 2, fig. 21), Mysella sculpta (textfig. 5), and Chione (Nioche) keenae (pl. 3, figs. 24-25). Additional species, not pre- viously illustrated, include Chlamys amandi Hertlein and Lasaea petitiana Recluz. This very useful paper, in addition to the systematic discussion, contains zoogeographi- cal remarks, a summary in English and in the Spanish language, and an alphabetical list of genera and subgenera. LGH TROCHUS OBTUSA CONFUSION by J. Hope Macpherson Curator of Molluscs, National Museum of Victoria Memoirs of the National Museum, Mel- bourne, No. 25. May 1, 1962. In this brief but very thorough paper, Miss Macpherson proposes the name Chrysostoma ob- tusa (Dillwyn, 1817) for Trochus obtusus Dill- wyn, 1817. Also, for the preoccupied Murex es- pinosus Macpherson, 1959, she proposes the substitute name Murex tweedianus Macpherson, 1962. RS SHELLS OF NEW ZEALAND by A. W. B. Powell Whitcombe & Tombs, Ltd., New Zea- land. August 1962. About $2.80 (price in the United States probably $4. - ppd.). The 1957 edition contained 202 pages, 530 illustrations of species, and a complete check- Page 100 list to that date of all of the living mollusks of New Zealand. The 1962 revised version in- cludes marine, freshwater, and land mollusks. An important feature of this later edition is that it contains references to the literature with dates of all species. This is a scholarly work and recommended to all serious students. JQB COMMON SEASHORE LIFE OF THE PACIFIC NORTHWEST by Lynwood Smith Vinson Brown, editor; Naturegraph Company (Healdsburg, California). Vol. 2, Naturegraph Ocean Guidebooks; 66 pp., soft cover, illustrated. 1962. This is a companion to Volume 1 of the Na- turegraph Ocean Guidebooks ''Common Seashore Life of Southern California", by Joel Hedgpeth and Sam Hinton, reviewed in the July 1, 1962, issue of The Veliger. Volume 2 covers the common elements of marine life to be found from Mendocino County, California, to British Columbia and Vancouver Island. Like its pred- ecessor it contains much useful and interesting information and many drawings, with 11 photos in color; but unlike it, unfortunately, Volume 2 fails to measure up in many respects to the ex- cellent standards setin Volume 1. In particu- lar, the drawings of marine species are ama- teurish; in some instances they are so unlike the actual animal or shell that they cannot help but contribute to confusion rather than to en- lightenment. It is to be regretted that the sea- shore life of the Pacific Northwest, which is rich and varied, could not have had better treat- ment in a much-needed guidebook. AGS THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE MALACOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON Vol. 35, Part 1, April 1962. E. P. Hodgkin: Patelloida profunda (Des- hayes) from Mauritius. J. H. Mclean: Feeding -Behaviour of the chiton Placiphorella. MK BIOLOGICAL PECULIARITIES OF THE FAR EASTERN MOLLUSK SCHIZOPLAX BRANDTII (MIDDENDORFF) by O. G. Kussakin Zoological Institute USSR Academy of Sciences (Leningrad) Zoological Journal, Academy of Scien- ces of the USSR, tom. 39, no. 8, pp. 1145-1150, figs. 1-2, 1960. [In Russian with a brief English abstract. ] AGS SOME PRINCIPLES OF DISTRIBUTION OF THE FAUNA AND FLORA OF DESSICATION ZONES IN THE SOUTH KURILE ISLANDS by O. G. Kussakin Zoological Institute USSR Academy of Sciences (Leningrad) Research in the Far Eastern Seas of the USSR, 7, pp. 312-343, figs. 1-3, tables 1-5, 1961. [In Russian; no English sum- mary; deals with intertidal zonation.] AGS Some Back Numbers of THE VELIGER % are still available, sold in complete volumes only © @ Vol. 3: $3.75, Vol. 4: $5.-, plus handling charge of -.25 g a 5 ERR RHC KOKO OHEKOHREKOHRRROHRERK BERBER OURO © THE VELIGER is open to original papers pertaining to any problem concerned with mollusks. This is meant to make facilities available for publication of original articles from a wide field of endeavor. Papers dealing with anatomical, cytological, distributional, ecological, histological, morphological, phys- iological, taxonomic, etc., aspects of marine, freshwater or terrestrial mollusks from any region, will be considered. Even topics only indi- rectly concerned with mollusks may be acceptable. In the unlikely event that space considerations make limitations necessary, papers dealing with mollusks from the Pacific region will be given priority. However, in this case the term “Pacific region” is to be most liberally interpreted. It is the editorial policy to preserve the individualistic writing style of the author; therefore any editorial changes in a manuscript will be sub- mitted to the author for his approval, before going to press. Short articles containing descriptions of new species or lesser taxa will be given preferential treatment in the speed of publication provided that arrangements have been made by the author for depositing the holotype with a recognized public Museum. Museum numbers of the type specimens must be included in the manuscript. Type localities must be defined as accurately as possible, with geographical longitudes and latitudes added. Short original papers, not exceeding 500 words, will be published in the column “NOTES & NEWS”; in this column will also appear notices of meetings of the American Malacological Union, as well as news items which are deemed of interest to our subscribers in general. Articles on “METHODS & TECHNIQUES” will be considered for publication in another column, provided that the information is complete and tech- niques and methods are capable of duplication by anyone carefully fol- lowing the description given. Such articles should be mainly original and deal with collecting, preparing, maintaining, studying, photo- graphing, etc., of mollusks or other invertebrates. A third column, en- titled “INFORMATION DESK,” will contain articles dealing with any problem pertaining to collecting, identifying, etc., in short, problems encountered by our readers. In contrast to other contributions, articles in this column do not necessarily contain new and original materials. Questions to the editor, which can be answered in this column, are in- vited. The column “BOOKS, PERIODICALS, PAMPHLETS?” will attempt to bring reviews of new publications to the attention of our readers. Also, new timely articles may be listed by title only, if this is deemed expedient. Manuscripts should be typed in final form on a high grade white paper, 8!” by 11”, double spaced and accompanied by a carbon copy. EDITORIAL BOARD Dr. Donatp P. Assort, Associate Professor of Biology Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University Dr. J. Wyatt Duruaw, Professor of Paleontology University of California, Berkeley Dr. E. W. Facer, Associate Professor of Biology Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California, La Jolla Dr. Capet HAnp, Associate Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley Dr. G. DaLLas Hanna, Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Joet W. Hepcpetu, Professor of Zoology Director of the Pacific Marine Station, Dillon Beach Dr. Leo G. HERTLEIN, Associate Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Myra Keen, Associate Professor of Paleontology and Curator of Concholog y Stanford University Dr. FRANK PITELKA, Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley Mr. ALLyn G. Smitu, Associate Curator, Department of Invertebrate Zoology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Ravpu I. Situ, Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley EDITOR Dr. RupoLF STOHLER, Associate Research Koologist University of California, Berkeley ale VELIGER A Quarterly published by NORTHERN CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL CLUB Berkeley, California VOLUME 5 JANUARY I, 1963 NUMBER 3 CONTENTS Rediscovery of Terebra formosa DESHAYES, 1857 (Plates 12, 13) BRU CER@AMP BET Lami ujnre merriment 2 ste in er ie nomad eS aie len Pe eee Gh. POT A Poison-Secreting Nudibranch (Mollusca : Opisthobranhia) ERE OLANNES iy ie ro) onia el sao vemelDereueireh rs Weber pionai nuk. mela veo ah ace ak es FOP Statistical Studies on Cowrie Radulae (2 Textfigyres ) Franz ALFRED SCHILDER & MARIA SCHILDER ......... . . . 106 The California Land Snails Helminthoglypta reediana WiLLETT and Helminthoglypta similans Hanna & SmitH with Comments on their Relationships (Gastropoda: Pulmonata) PATA Gat MULIeIed Geet ea ee nen Guim icen) ota aah (ak Ley GMM Neate FAL ek CAM aT Notes on the Opisthobranchs of the West Coast of North America. II. The Order Cephalaspidea from San Diego to Vancouver Island NOSNEES STEINBERG aim a ayy fie kell Polisi 3 ole Way Bin MoM esses Fe seta ets oo LTA) Studies on Mollusk Populations V. — Tegula rugosa (A. ADAMS, 1853) (4 Textfigures ) NUD OLEESTOHEE RG wisn ae ata es Teed ce dn ae is hy eon eh vig al Wael te Si oa he oe OTF IN @ ABE SE SRNIEN NS neo men ea Selita gg) ie eM ee les se le) on EDD BOOKS WEERIODICAES, PAMPHIEEMS 9.) 20s ce 5 Og Subscriptions payable in advance to N. C. M. C. $ 4.50 per volume Domestic; $ 4.80 in the Americas; $ 5.00 all other Foreign Countries. _. §$ 1.80 for single copies of current volume only. Ged. subscriptions to: Mrs. PHorse BAucu, Treasurer, 1150 Brown Avenue, Lafayette, California. Address all other correshondence to: Dr. R. STOHLER, Editor, Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley 4, California. Second- Class Postage paid at Berkeley, California Note: The various taxa above species are indicated by the use of different type styles as ‘shown by the following examples: ORDER, Suborder, DIVISION, Subdivision, SECTION, SUPERFAMILY, Famity, Subfamily, Genus, (Subgenus). 7O508E2701 Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 101 Rediscovery of Terebra formosa Desuayes, 1857 BY BRUCE CAMPBELL Contribution from the “Sea of Cortez Marine Research Center’, South Gate, California (Plates 12, 13) As a result of the recent paper, ''Large Species of Terebra (Mollusca) from the Eastern Pacific" (Hanna & Hertlein, 1961), additional in- formation has been brought to light regarding Terebra formosa Deshayes, 1857. The paper dealt with the five species of Panamic Terebra, in the strict sense, one of which was described as new, and offered appropriate synonymy in each case. Under the citations of T. lingualis Hinds, 1844, T. formosa was described from a single specimen with the locality of Panama, and since the original description it appears that no additional specimens have been re- ported. A single specimen in the collection of the Los Angeles County Museum, labeled T. formosa, was examined and found to be a fairly typical T. lingualis. A similar specimen in the Stanford University Collection, identified as T. formosa, also proved to be T. lingualis. The original illustration of Terebra for- mosa reveals a shell with an acute apical angle and with the color pattern on the bodywhor] con- sisting of three rows of square chestnut spots. Due to the fact that the spotting is somewhat variable in this group and that slightly worn specimens of T. lingualis can be similar in characteristics with the original illustration of T. formosa, it was assigned to this species. What the illustration of T. formosa does show that is inconsistent with the morphe of T. lin- gualis is a wide subsutural collar that occupies more than half of each whorl on the anterior one-half of the shell. I am indebted to Mr. Eugene Bergeron, director of Marine Biological Research Asso- ciates, Balboa, Canal Zone. Several months after publication of the Terebra paper (Hanna & Hertlein, 1961), five specimens of a Terebra were received by airmail from Mr. Bergeron (three specimens to the California Academy of Sciences and two to myself). They had been tentatively identified by Mr. Bergeron as T. formosa, and indeed this appeared to be correct as they matched both original figure and de- scription exceptionally well. Three specimens that were collected at Mazatlan, Sinaloa, Mexi- co, in 1961 and labeled T. cf. formosa also proved to be typical T. formosa and extended the range 2,000 miles northwest. My purpose is to retrieve from synonymy Terebra formosa Deshayes and restore it as a valid Eastern Pacific species of Terebra. Specimens of Terebra available for study included those at the California Academy of Sciences; also made available to me were the specimens of Terebra in the collection at Stan- forn University through the courtesy of Dr. Myra Keen, those in the collection of John and Rose Burch, and those in the Los Angeles County Museum through the courtesy of Mr. George Kanakoff. Acknowledgement is made to Mr. Eugene Bergeron for his generosity in supplying mate- rial that is the basis of this paper, and appreci- ation is given Mr. R. D. Burch for the loan of four Terebra formosa and to Kenneth Boss for the negatives of the "Type" of T. formosa. Family TEREBRIDAE H & A Adams Genus Terebra Bruguiére Key to the species of Terebra (Modified from Hanna & Hertlein) 1. A subsutural spiral groove present on all WROD Tome ci ice | te cola ie Rey eee eegee eZ A subsutural spiral groove present only on whorls on posterior half of shell . . 3 2. Color markings a series of conspicuous stripes; apical angle 18° . T. strigata Color markings of four spiral rows of square spots on bodywhorl; apical angle 19° , . T. ornata Page 102 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 3. A subsutural collar less than half the width of whorl. E : : F hee A subsutural colle eeente than half the width of whorl; apical angle 15° ; 5 T. formosa 4. Apical angele: 18° to 21%; later whorls tumid . T. dumbauldi to 12° later whorls slender Fe series na 5) T. lingualis T. robusta Apical angle 8° 5. Apical angle acute, 8° Apical angle broader, 12° Terebra (Terebra) formosa DESHAYES, 1857 (Pl. 12, Figs. 5, 8 to 13; Pl. 13, Figs. 3 to 6) Original Description Ter. testa subulato-turrild, solidd, albd, maculis quadratis rufo-castanets biseriatim pictd, quarum supertoribus multo minoribus, anfractibus planula- tis, indivisis, oblique longitudinaliter corrugato-plicatis, plicis bisercatim granatis, anfractu ultimo et penultimo convexioribus, plicis evanidis; aper- turd subangustd, columella crassa, contorto-recuruda. English Translation Shell subulately turreted, solid, white, painted with two rows of square reddish-chestnut spots, of which the upper ones are much the smaller, whorls flat, undivided, obliquely longitudinally wrinkle- plaited, plaits marked by two rows of grains, last and penultimate whorls more convex, the plaits faded away; aperture rather narrow, columella thick. twistedly recurved. (Reeve) Type Specimen Museum Cumingeanus, British Museum (Natural History). [Plate 13, Fig. 3] Length 71 mm., diameter of last whorl, 13 mm. Type Locality & Range "Hab. la mer de Panama." The southern limit of the range appears to be Panama. Three specimens from Mazatlan, Sinaloa, Mexico, extend the range 2,000 miles northwest. Explanation of Plate 12 Figure 1: 79 mm, body whorl diameter 16 mm. __‘ Figure 2: Terebra lingualis Hinps. Hypotype 131. Far Fan, Canal Zone; E. Bergeron, coll., July, 1961. Length Terebra ornata GRAY. Hypotype 4 '. 5 miles south of Puerto Penasco, Sonora, Mexico, dredged in 20 to 26 meters: B. Campbell, D. Shasky, A. Martin, September, 1959. Length 88 mm, b. whorl diameter 19 mm (The Veliger, 3 (4): 112, 1961). Figure 3: Terebra robusta Hinps. Hypotype 241. Diving in 3 to 5 m near San Carlos Bay, Guaymas, Mexico. B. Campbell, coll., December, 1957. L. 88 mm, b. w. diam. 18 mm. ama, E. Bergeron, coll., Figure 4: Figure 6: October, 1961. L. 109 mm, b. w. diam. 31 mm. 14.5 mm. diam. 16 mm. meter 20 mm. Figure 9: Figure 10: Figure 11: Terebra robusta. Hypotype 147. Venado Island, Republic of Pan- 1960. L. 102 mm, body w. diameter 22 mm. Hypotype 221. Kobbe Beach, Canal Zone; E. Bergeron, coll., Terebra dumbauldi HaNNA & Hertvein. Hypotype 161. Intertidally, Kobbe Beach; Bergeron, coll., Figure 7: Fan; Bergeron, coll., July, 1961. L. 100 mm, b. w. diam. 29 mm. Beach just south of Mazatlan, Sinaloa, Mexico. F. Chevalie, coll., Terebra formosa. Hypotype 201. Kobbe Beach; Bergeron, coll., Figure 5: Terebra formosa DESHAYES. 1958. Length 108 mm, b. w. diameter 22 mm. Terebra strigata SowersBy. Hypotype 15'. Far Figure 8: Terebra formosa. Hypotype 17". November, 1961. L. 63 mm, b. w. diam. 1958. L. 85 mm, b. w. Tevebra formosa. Hypotype 211. Same data as for Figure 9. L. g2 mm, b. w. dia- Terebra formosa. Same specimen as in Figure 5. Hypotype 23 '. Same data as for Figure 9. L. 104 mm, b. w. diam. 21 mm. Figure 12: Figure 13: Terebra formosa. Terebra formosa. Hypotype 229%. Littoral; the Causeway, Fort Amador, Canal Zone; W. B. Mackley, coll., 1 ex Bruce Campbell Collection; ? ex Gale Sphon Collection; 1962. L. 97 mm, b. w. diam. 17 mm. 3 ex R. D. Burch Collection. Explanation of Plate 13 Figure 1: ing Collection (Twila Bratcher, photo.) Figure 2: Terebra lingualis Hinps. Photograph of the Type in the British Museum (Natural History). ex Cum- Terebra robusta Hinps. British Museum (Natural History) ex Cuming Collection (Twila Bratcher, photo.) Photograph of the Type in the Figure 3: Terebra formosa Desnayes. Photograph of the single Type located in the “Museum Cumingianus’, British Museum (Natural History) (Kenneth Boss, photo.) Type locality: Panama. Length 71 mm, body whorl diameter 13 mm. Figure 4: as Figure 13 of Plate 12. ‘Figure 6: Terebra formosa. Same shell as Figure 8 of Plate 12. Figure 5: Terebra formosa. Same shell Terebra formosa. Same shell as Figure 12 of Plate 12. (Figures 4, 5 and 6, Bruce Campbell, photo.) [B. CAMPBELL] Plate 12 THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 3 13 12 10 Kodachromes by Bruce CAMPBELL SSI see = Wise oe emer rel els a) oe penetiona THE VELIGER, Vol. 5, No. 3 [CampBeLL]| Plate 13 Figure 6 Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 103 Specimens Examined Three specimens CAS 37664 from Kobbe Beach, Canal Zone; Eugene Bergeron collector, 1958. Five specimens (Campbell Collection) from Kobbe Beach, Canal Zone; Eugene Bergeron collector, 1958. Three specimens (Campbell Collection) from the beach just south of Mazatlan Harbor, Sinaloa, Mexico; Sr. Francisco Chevalie collec- tor, 1961. One specimen (R. D. Burch Collection, no. 274) littoral; at Ferry, Fort Amador, Canal Zone; W. B. Mackley collector, May 1962. One Panama specimen (W. J. Eyerdam Collection); Bay, Canal Zone. One specimen (W. J. Eyerdam Collection); Corinto, Nicaragua; W. J. Eyerdam collector, May 11, 1939. Discussion Terebra formosa Deshayes was described from Panama on the basis of a single specimen of which Reeve remarks, "It is not in the best condition.'' Subsequent workers considered it possibly a young variety of either T. robusta (TRYON) or T. lingualis (REEVE), and it is true that all three species have three rows of spots on the bodywhorl and appear similar. Typical- ly, the coloration of T. robusta consists of very irregular brown dots or blotches, roughly ar- ranged in an axial manner, but there is consid- erable variation from specimen to specimen. Terebra lingualis displays flame-like reddish- brown axial stripes on some part of the shell and again variation is the rule. Terebra for- mosa seems to be more consistent. A row of small square chestnut spots that are smaller than the intervening area is present just anteri- or to the sutural groove; a row of larger square spots is present just posterior to this groove; and a third row is seen anteriorly on the body- whorl. Although it is difficult to see any re- markable differences between T, robusta and T. lingualis in the early sculpture on the posterior half of the shells, the sculpture on T. formosa appears distinctly different. The subsutural nodes become oblique and narrower on an in- creasingly widening subsutural band. The axial ribs also take on this oblique nature. The most obvious difference, and probably the most reli- able one, is the presence on the anterior half of the shell of a subsutural band more than one- half and up to three-fourths the width of the whorl. Both T. lingualis and T. robusta have bands considerably less than half the width which are separated from the remainder of the whorl by a small groove or line. The apical angle seems consistently different for each species and offers a simple method for separa- tion. The narrow T. lingualis has an apical angle of approximately 8° rather than 12° as in T. robusta. Terebra formosa is more tumid with an apical angle of 15°; a small shell from Mazatlan matches Deshayes' original figure and the photograph of the ''Type" very well. I am not aware of any publication past or present where photographs of the ''Types" of the large Eastern Pacific Terebra are avail- able. Because of this, the validity of several species was open to speculation. In addition to the formosa-lingualis problem, some workers considered T. lingualis and T. robusta as con- specific. Photographs of the ''Types" in the British Museum of Ie lingualis Hinds, T. ro- busta Hinds, and T. formosa Deshayes (Plate 13, Figs. 1-3) are offered in hope that the confusion will be ended. The first seven figures of the color plate are typical representatives of the six species of Eastern Pacific Terebra s.s.; the remaining six figures are T. formosa Des- hayes. Literature Cited CAMPBELL, BRUCE 1961. Range extension for Terebra ornata Gray, 1834. The Veliger 3 (4): 112. DesuayeEs, G. P. 1857. Description d’espéces nouvelles du genre Terebra. Journ. Conchy]. 6 (ser. 2; vol. 2): 65; pl. 3, fig. 6. 1859. tion of new species. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1859: 307. A general review of the genus Terebrva, and a descrip- Hanna, G Dattas, & Leo G. HERTLEIN 1961. Large species of Terebra (Mollusca) from the Eastern Pacific. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. 4th ser.; 30 (3): 67-80; pls. 6-7. Hinps, RicHARD BRINSLEY 1844. Descriptions of new shells, collected during the voyage of the Sulphur, and in Mr. Cuming’s late visit to the Philip- pines. (On new species of Terebra.) Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1843: 149-153. KEEN, A. MyRA 1958. Sea shells of tropical west America; marine mollusks from Lower California to Colombia. Stanford Univ. Press, xi + 624 pp.; illus. Stanford, Calif. RerEve, LovELL AUGUSTUS 1860. Conchologia iconica: or, illustrations of the shells of molluscous animals. London. Vol. 12, Terebra; spec. 49, pl. 12, fig. 49. TOMLIN, JOHN READ LE BROCKTON 1944. 107. Deshayes’s review of Terebra. Journ. Conchol. 22 (5): Page 104 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 A Poison-Secreting Nudibranch (Mollusca : Opisthobranchia) BY R. E. JOHANNES Department of Zoology, University of Hawaii, Honolulu 14, Hawaii Thompson (1960) has reviewed defense mechanisms in opisthobranchs. He pointed out that while some secrete an acid when disturbed and others possess cnidosacs, many species possess neither weapon yet are seldom eaten by fish. The present report concerns a possible third defense mechanism. Tests with the nudi- branch, Phyllidia varicosa Lamarck, 1801 (syn. P. trilineata Cuvier, 1804), indicate that when disturbed it secretes a profuse mucus contain- ing a poison. METHODS AND OBSERVATIONS This study arose from the observation that a slipper lobster, Scyllarides squammosus (H. M. Edwards, 1837), and a homarid lobster, Eno- plometopus occidentalis (Randall, 1839), died within an hour after a specimen of Phyllidia va- ricosa, dripping a light-grey mucus, was intro- duced into a 15-gallon aquarium with them. The work was performed using the mucus from four mature specimens of this nudibranch 9, 10, 12, and 13 cm. long. The mucus was collected in a beaker by gently squeezing the nudibranchs, an action which stimulated the flow of about five ml. of the mucus within a few seconds. Three other species of crustaceans, Peri- climenes spec., Lembos intermedius Schellen- berg, 1938, and Tisbe reticulata Bocquet, 1951, and a poecilid fish, Mollinesia latipinna Le Sueur, 1821, invariably died within one-half to five hours after being placed in seawater con- taining approximately 2 percent of the mucus. Lack of any response to being prodded with a dissecting needle was used as the criterion of death for all species. No animal ever recov- ered after being returned to fresh seawater at this stage. Three or more individuals of each of the above species were also held under the same conditions minus the mucus. There were no deaths among these controls. Table 1 Effect of Mucus of Phyllidia varicosa LAMARCK, 1801 on Various Animals Approximate body length (mm) | Lembos intermedius (amphipod) Tisbe reticulata (copepod) Periclimenes spec. (decapod) Mollinesia latipinna (teleost) Scyllarides squammosus (decapod) Enoplometopus occidentalis (decapod) Placobranchus ianthobapsus (nudibranch) Metapograpsus messor (decapod) Death of all animals within VY to 5 hours No apparent effect after 24 hours Number of controls Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 105 ee ete ema rea Pe TR Oe pn SI lee Single specimens of a crab, Metapograpsus messor (Forskal, 1775) and a nudibranch, Pla - cobranchus ianthobapsus Gould, 1852, showed no apparent ill effects after 48 hours' exposure to twice the concentration of mucus used on the other species. The distress symptoms in the various sus- ceptible species were varied and prevent much generalization. In mice and the walking crus- taceans loss of control of the legs was one of the first symptoms noted. A test with pHydrion pH paper showed the pH of the secretion to be approximately 7. The mucus had a strong, unusual smell. The de- scriptions of the smell given to the writer by several individuals were so varied and some- times contradictory that no further description is attempted. The secretion had no apparent taste. Groups of Periclimenes spec. and Lembos intermedius were used as bio-indicators in in- vestigating the stability of the poison. Several of one or the other of these species were placed in 2 percent mucus-seawater which had been exposed to one of the treatments described be- low in order to determine if the poison had been inactivated. Either all the animals were dead within five hours or none died within ten hours. In the latter case the poison was considered in- activated. Control flasks were run in all cases. In tightly stoppered flasks at room temper- ature the seawater-mucus mixture remained toxic for at least six days. However, the mix- ture lost its toxicity in less than three days in open flasks, suggesting that the poison is vola- tile. Subsequent tests supported this hypothe- sis. Mucus-containing seawater lost its toxicity within ten minutes when nitrogen, helium, or air was bubbled through it vigorously from an airstone. In seawater the poison was not inactivated by exposure to temperatures as high as 95°C. for approximately one minute. The poison could be filtered out of seawater using an HA Milli- pore filter (0.45 pore diameter). The poison appeared to be trapped in rather than on the fil- ter. Whole filters used to filter the mixture, then placed in flasks of seawater containing test animals, were not toxic. If the filters were finely shredded before they were introduced, they proved toxic. Discussion When disturbed, Phyllidia varicosa se- cretes in its mucus a substance which is toxic to a variety of animals. Apart from the prob- lem of the chemical nature of this poison, an interesting question arises from this observa- tion: is the poison of P. varicosa an isolated phenomenon among opisthobranchs or a third general defense mechanism? Certainly, some presently unexplained factor is operative in protecting the many soft-bodied opisthobranchs possessing neither cnidosacs nor acid secre- tions from predation. Risbec (1928) states that a voluminous, strong-smelling mucus emitted by the animal when disturbed is characteristic of most Phylli- diads. If this strong smell is associated with the poison as it appears to be (whenever the poi- son was inactivated the smell disappeared), it would indicate that the poison is not restricted to Phyllidia varicosa but prevalent within the family Phyllidiadae. With regard to opisthobranchs in general, Thompson (1960) points out the widespread oc- currence of skin glands (apart from mucus and acid glands) only be explained satisfactorily as defensive."' The possibility that these glands secrete poi- sons and that poison secretion is not an unusual means of defense among opisthobranchs might be examined. "whose position and function can Literature Cited RIsBEC, JEAN 1928. Contribution a l'étude des nudibranches Néo-Cale- doniens. Faun. Colon. Frang. 2 (1): 1-328; pls. 1-16. THompson, T. E. 1960. Defensive adaptations in opisthobranchs. Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc. Un. Kingd. 39: 123-134. Page 106 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 Statistical Studies on Cowrie Radulae BY FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER & MARIA SCHILDER University of Halle (Saale), German Democratic Republic (2 Textfigures) In these last two years, Mr. R. S. Benton and Mr. W. O. Cernohorsky have sent us sev- eral thousand cowries from various localities of Kenya and Fiji, respectively. All these shells contained the complete animals, dried or still soft by being packed in cotton wool wet by spir- its, so that we could ascertain the sex of each animal by presence or absence of a penis, and preserve the radula mostly in its entire length. This rich material seems to be suitable to elucidate the correlation between the following characters: L ~The length of the shell, measured by a ver- nier caliper in tenths of a millimeter. g Female sex of the animal. Male sex of the animal. r The number of rows composing the com- plete radula, the terminal ''nascentes"'in- cluded. m The maximum breadth of the median tooth of the radula, expressed in thousandths of a millimeter: the figures represent the mean of five medians measured in each specimen. dr The total length of the radula, expressed in tenths of a millimeter; it has been calcu- lated by multiplying the number of rows (r) by the average distance (d) between the ba- sal edges of two adjacent medians; d has been stated by measuring the length of the area occupied by 30 to 40 rows in various parts of the radula, in thousandths of a millimeter. The mathematical significance of differ- ences (Schilder, 1961b) has been marked as fol- lows: : P>0.01 * iP) << (0),(0))1 **x P< 0.001 No difference Difference certain Difference strictly proved HISTORICAL REVIEW In previous papers we have shown, though by far scantier material, the following relations among specimens of the same species: 1. The average L of ois mostly smaller than that of 9 (Schilder, 1962b). 2. r does not depend on L, whereas m and dr are correlated to L (Schilder, 1960). Therefore, we have been enabled to estab- lish the following indices: pI = mele = number of rows, ex- pressed in dozens (10=114 to 126 rows). mil = 2000) mse = relative breadth of the median. dr/L = 100 dr:6L #£«=relative length of the radula. The constants mentioned in these formulae . have been chosen so that the average index of all cowries becomes 10 in every character; therefore, indices exceeding 10 indicate rela- tively numerous rows, broad medians, and long radulae, while indices smaller than 10 indicate less numerous rows, narrower medians, and shorter radulae than would be expected from the sum of all cowry species (Schilder, 1960). We have shown that in Monetaria r/12 of 9 is larger than that of o, while m/L of 9 is smaller than that of o (Schilder, 1961S), and dr/L is rather similar in both sexes (Schilder, 1962a): the females have more numerous rows than the males, but smaller teeth, so that the length of the radula ribbon becomes nearly equal. The figures indicating the average indices are often quite similar in allied species, while they distinctly differ in species placed in dif- ferent genera or even subfamilies conchologi- cally (Schilder, 1941), so that they may confirm Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 107 ————— eee or correct the taxonomy (Schilder, 1960, 196lc, 1962b). RECENT RESEARCH The present paper is an attempt to confirm or to emend these former results by extending the investigations to larger series of specimens of still more species. The correlation between the length of the shell (L), and the number of rows of the radula (r), the breadth of its median (m), and the length of the ribbon (dr) may be shown once more by 66 male specimens of Lyncina lynx Linnaeus, 1758, collected by R. S. Benton within an area of about 63 meters at Shimoni on the southern border of Kenya, from March 1961 to April 1962. In Fig. 1, r indicates the number of rows, L and dr have been expressed in millimeters, m in hundredths of a millimeter; the results clearly are similar to those observed in Monetaria, mentioned above. L= 30 32 34. 36 38 40 42 44 © CLeececeee® © 5 %P © oe o> ee." see? eo~e ce .- ye ee ee @ &e@ afibee Figure 1: See Text for Explanation The correlation between Land m may also be illustrated by Fig.2, which shows the mean of 15 species examined in large numbers. The letters indicate the means of females, the arrow-heads those of males: = Luria isabella Linnaeus, 1758 = Mauritia eglantina Duclos, 1833 = Lyncina lynx Linnaeus, 1758 = L. vitellus Linnaeus, 1758 = L. carneola Linnaeus, 1758 = L. titan spec. nov. = Monetaria annulus Linnaeus, 1758 = M. moneta Linnaeus, 1758 = Erosaria helvola Linnaeus, 1758 = E. erosa Linnaeus, 1758 = E. lamarckii Gray, 1825 = Erronea errones Linnaeus, 1758 = E. caurica Linnaeus, 1758 = Palmadusta fimbriata Gmelin, 1791 = Bistolida teres Gmelin, 1791 dope rerrmtoaanow These means are distinctly arranged along the ines =e indicating the index m/L = 10, but Luria isabella exhibits an exceptionally large median. The arrows seem to point in va- rious directions, but they show that the shells (L) of males are smaller than or equal to those of females, but never larger, whereas the rela- tive size of medians of males mostly exceeds those of females, though there may be some- times no difference (as in Lyncina carneola) or even an exceeding of males by females (L. isa- bella,, L. vitellus). As all cowry species examined hitherto ex- hibit such a distinct correlation between L, m, and dr, but evidently the independence of r (Schilder, 1960; 196la, c; and Fig. 1), the use of the indices explained above seems to be justi- fied; therefore, we shall restrict our further research to these indices only. The range of variation of the indices r/12, m/L, and dr/L may be illustrated by Table 1: it contains the variation of the specimens of each sex in several selected species. The signifi- cance of the differences between the means of 9 and o& has been indicated by asterisks as ex- plained above. The average deviation (2) of all species enumerated in Table 2 is in r/12 = 1.23, m/L = 1.29, dr/L = 1.45, varying from 0.8 to 2.7, 0.5 to 2.3, and 0.6 to 2.7, respectively. Table 2 indicates the mean indices r/12, m/L, and dr/L in each sex of 15 frequent spe- cies (represented in Fig.2). These indices, which have been reduced to one decimal, are preceded by the number of examined specimens (in parentheses). In each index, the columns Page 108 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 L=12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 82 34 Figure 2: See Text for Explanation Table 1 Range of Variation of Three Indices in Some Cowrie Species Index BW oe Wo Boulk oe hk Bw | 1 | ty | Ta oe | 14 | 15 | Mean Difference Number of Rows (1/72) Luria isabella g = |= 4 7 13 Coa 5 I 2 10.88 ) ss oH = By | 18} | WO 21 8 9 I I 2 9.97 Monetaria annulus | 9 = I 2 6 21 20 | 22 5 = 10.94. ) g Tes eae elem 25 ass Ars ley alt ae alae le 9-47 | Erosaria erosa 2 —- |- ATG 22 17 5 Pie alt 10.12 ) oy = |= g | 21 25 O}= |= t= p= 9.55 Relative Breadth of Median (m/L) Mauritia eglantina| 9° = a | A |) 083 3 = —-/-f- ]/-y- 7-22 ) + oS I 2 9g |16 | 12 4 = (=> } = f= |S 7:93 Erronea caurica 2 = 1 13°38 8 I I toi fee 7.98 ) oi = = I 4 6 6 8 8 7 6 2 11.29 | Lyncina carneola ? = = 2 3 5 41 46 | 12 9 r | — 10.71 ) cof = = = == || bY0) 53 29 5 Bo oe = 10.25 | Lyncina titan 9 = == 2 |29 | 23 7 — |-=~ {[- |-|]- 8.57 es a = = oR Poe os 4 =P ep eee = — 8.14 Lyneina lynx g = saat ie A eS ae a RC | SLL SRT WS a Nl Se 9-93 ) (Kenya) DW Ay Se a Mee eel Sua meals vee alle ain lf ee 2 9.83 id. co) = =| Liane 6 — f= [— |— |= 8.96 ye (Fiji) oH = = | ee CR iy! 3 —- |/- |- |- [- 9.06 Relative Length of the Radula (dr/L) Lyncina vitellus 9 — |}- |- {[- I 6 12 6 | 3 1 }|—- |- 10.24 ) 4 c So ogee [tara are eran gaa 8 WAG) Neds Aas 10.35 .|Erosaria helvola 9 = | = 1 2 9 | 24 24 9 5 Teel se 9.60 ye ou = = I 1 4 115 14 12 5 I = = 9.91 |Erosaria lamarckit | 9? I 2 2 4 7 6 I Se ae ee 7.57 ys oy = 2 3 7 8 6 21— 1/—4- ]- 8.68 Erronea errones 9 i p= 3 9 4 1 2 — |/- |- J- [- 7-30 ) as rot a = a 2 2 4 oa 2 2 = = = 9.33 (see text for explanation) Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 109 for females and males are separated by the sign of the sex in which the index is larger and by the degree of significance of the difference be- tween the sexes (see above). At the bottom, we have added three species, the numerous speci- mens of which came from two different regions: in each, the third line indicates the significance of local or racial differences in each sex (in each column the respective index is larger in the named region, with the indicated signifi- cance). The East African and the Pacific specimens of Lyncina lynx and Monetaria moneta signifi- cantly differ in m/L and dr/L of both sexes, while r/12 is instead identical; in Erosaria ero- sa, however, such a significant difference exists in r/12 of males only. Besides, we see from Table 2 that in several species the sexes differ most significantly in all indices of the radula (Luria isabella, M. annulus, M. moneta, E. ero- sa, and Erronea caurica), while other species differ in one index or in the other, or even in none (L. lynx and Bistolida teres); the signifi- cance of sexual differences in the radula seems to be scattered as a specific character only, as hardly any relation to the affinity of species can be observed. On the other hand, the magnitude of the indices seems to be rather similar in many allied species, as well as the sex exhibit- ing the larger indices even if their differences cannot be proved as mathematically significant. This fact may be reinforced by Table 3, which contains 50 species arranged according to Schilder (1941). The three figures indicate the mean indices r/12, m/L, and dr/L, calculated from all exam- ined specimens including those whose sex is unknown. The added signs 9 or o& indicate the sex in which the index is larger, with **, *, or ° designating the degree of significance of the sexual difference. The absence of these signs points to a scarcity of specimens of known sex, which precludes stating them with satisfactory accuracy. Table 2 Luria isabella Mauritia eglantina Lyncina lynx Lyncina vitellus Lyncina carneola Lyneina titan Monetaria annulus Monetaria moneta Erosaria helvola Efosaria erosa Erosaria lamarckit Erronea errones Erronea caurica Palmadusta fimbriata Bistolida teres Lyneina lynx Monetaria moneta Erosaria erosa Mean Indices for Both Sexes in Fifteen Species of Cowries Indopacific Fiji Indopacific Indopacific Kenya Kenya Indopacific Indopacific Indopacific Indopacific Port Reitz Pacific Kenya Kenya Indopacific Kenya : Fiji Kenya Pacific Kenya : Pacific Kenya Pacific Kenya : Pacific (14) 10.4]9 ° Pacific ° (68) 10.0 (36) 11.4 (105) 16.3 (26) 19.0 | (95) 18.0 (58) 19.4 (51) 9.5 (107) 8.5 (53) 8.7 (65) 9.6 (28) 10.5 (12) 8.0 (38) 8.3 (14) 7-3 (10) 7.3 (89) 16.2 (16) 16.6 Fiji* (86) 8.5 (21) 8.6 Pacific ° (46) 9.3 (1g) 10.1 Pacific ** (28) ed (18) 10.1 (100) 9.9 (26) 9.0 Kenya ** (197) 8.0 (47) 9-3 Pacific ** (61) 7.5 (20) 7.1 Kenya* (see text for explanation) (71) 13.7 (46) 7.9 ° \(113) 9.7 @* | (31) 9.0 9**/(110) 10.3 9**| (Jo) 8.1 f**! (65) 11.4 &**|(164) 9.6 o**! (74) 10.2 o**| (81) 8.8 v* | (40) 8.0 a* | (24) 10.8 o**| (48) 11.3 F**| (16) 13.4 9°} (18) 9.9 9° (96) 9.8 ere (17) 9.1 , Kenya** (129) 9.4 (35) 10.3 Pacific * (56) 9.0 (25) 8.5 Kenya° o** o'** oi ** o'** (59) 14.1 (34) 10.2 Pacific ** Ce (14) 7-4 Kenya° (68) 12.2 (36) 10.4 9° \(105) 9.0 a? | (26) 10.3 2° | (95) 11.9 9° | (58) 10.3 o'**| (52) 10.2 (107) 8.5 (53) 9-9 (65) 8.6 (28) 8.7 (12) 9.3 (38) 8.8 (14) 9.4 (10) 5.7 (89) 9.1 (16) 8.2 Kenya ** (86) 8.2 (21) 9.9 Pacific ** (46) 8.7 (19) 8.5 Kenya° ~ Page 110 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 Table 3 Three Indices for Fifty Species of Cowries Cypraeinae: Luria isabella L. tessellata Mauritia arabica M. eglantina M. scurra M. histrio M. maculifera M. mauritiana Talparia talpa Cypraea tigris Lyneina lynx L. vitellus L. carneola L. titan Nariinae: Monetaria annulus M. moneta Erosaria boivinii . helvola . caputserpentis . erosa . nebrites . miliaris eburnea . lamarckir . lurdus by by by By ty ty ty ty Staphylaea staphylaea S. limacina Nuclearia nucleus Cypraeovulinae: Notocypraea piperita N. bicolor Umbilia hesitata Erronea xanthodon E. errones E. cylindrica E. caurica E. felina Palmadusta punctata P. clandestina P. artuffeli P. lentiginosa P. gracilis P. japonica P. fimbriata Bistolida quadrimaculata B. teres B. kieneri B. hirundo B. stolida Ovatipsa chinensis Cribraria cribraria ° ay * * 40 * * oy * * Q BDSOnryr OPM ©O~ DOOM OM Q, * * e (see text for explanation) Table 3 shows the following interesting facts which may be easily recognized by plot- ting the indices against the taxonomical arrange- ment of species: r/12 ranges from 6 to 19: it is large (nu- merous rows) in A (maximum in Ae), medium in B (small in Be only), and small in C (except in Cg); the means are 16, 10, and 8. m/L ranges from 6 to 15: it is smaller (median tooth narrow) in A (but large in Aa) than in B (large in Bc) and in C (small in Cg); the means are 8,9, and 10. dr/L ranges from 4 to 13 (the radula is + to % as long as the shell, index = 8 indicates 3 the shell): it is large (radula ribbon long) in A (ex- cept in Ac), medium in B, and small in C; the means are 11, 8, and 6. Therefore, there is a gradual decrease in r/12 and dr/L from A (the primitive Cypraeinae) over B(Nariinae) to C (the highly developed Cy- praeovulinae), so that the radula generally be- comes shorter and composed of less numerous rows;.on the other hand, the median seems to become gradually larger during the evolution of the family Cypraeidae. There is, however, a great overlapping in the species of these groups, and there are some genera aberrant in some respects, especially Aa, Ac, Be (while Bd is typical Nariinae), and Cg. The sexual differences in the indices are far less distinct, as in many groups there are species exhibiting an index larger in females, mixed with those exhibiting the same index smaller in this Generally, the females surpass the males in r/12 only (in 68 percent of sex. Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 111 r/12, the index in females is larger than in males), while in m/L (43 percent) and dr/L (36 percent) the females less frequently exceed. With regard to r/12, the females exceed chiefly in B and in A (except in Ad and Ae); but in no species of B do the females seem to exceed in m/Li nor in dr/L. Summary The indices r/12, m/L, and dr/L, indicat- ing the number of rows of the radula, the size of its median, and the length of the radula rib- bon (the last two characters related to the length of the shell), seem to represent an accessory argument for the taxonomical arrangement of cowry species and genera. Acknowledgment We are very much indebted to Mr. Ronald S. Benton, formerly at Mombasa, Kenya, and to Mr. Walter O. Cernohorsky, at Vatukoula, Fiji, for their admirably unselfish support of our studies by indefatigably collecting large series of cowries at restricted localities, and by pre- serving them so that the animals can be well examined after being in transit for eight to ten weeks to Germany. Mrs. Edith Kilian, Zool- ogical Institute of the University of Halle, Ger- many, has carefully prepared several thousand radulae for microscopical research. ADDITIONAL NOTE In the present paper we have included also Lyncina titan which we are about to establish in another paper (Archiv ftir Molluskenkunde, Vol. 91, pp. 4-6, December 1962). Lyncina titan dif- fers from L. carneola (Linnaeus, 1758) chiefly by its enormous size, which is about twice as large and leaves a distinct gap in range of vari- ation between the two sibling species; the limit in size slightly differs in sexes and in popula- tions, but it is always striking. There are also accessory differences, especially in the radula: in L. titan r/12 is larger, but m/L and dr/L are smaller than in L. carneola; all differences are significant in both sexes. We must call L. titan a distinct species, as it lives in some places of East Africa (but not in all places!) together with L. carneola without breeding indeterminable in- termediates: it looks like a polyploid species. The East African L. titan must not be confound- ed with the Polynesian L. leviathan Schilder & Schilder, 1937. The holotype of L. titan has been collected by R.S. Benton in Shimoni (East) at the Southern border of Kenya, 28 August 1961 (coll. Schilder 13208): its formula is 67(57)32: OT ¢ Literature Cited SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED 1941. Verwandtschaft und Verbreitung der Cypraeacea. Arch. Molluskenkunde 73 (2-3): 57-120. 1961 a. Beziehungen zwischen Geschlecht, Radula und Schale bei den Porzellanschnecken. Verh. Deutsch. Zool. Gesell. (Bonn/Rhein): 395-398; 2 textfigs. SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED, & MARIA SCHILDER 1960. Geschlecht, Radula und Schale der Porzellanschnek- ken. Naturwissenschaften 47 (13): 309-310; 1 texthg. Soc. 1961 b. Sexual differences in cowries. Proc. Malacol. London 34 (4): 207-209. 1961 c. Zur Kenntnis der Cypraeidae: 3. Lange und Reihen- zahl der Radula. Arch. Molluskenkunde 90 (1-3): 33-42; 2 textfigs. 1962 a. Zur Kenntnis der Cypraeidae: 4. Geschlechtsunter- schiede bei Monetaria moneta. Arch. Molluskenkunde 91 (1-3): 99-103. Scuicper, Marta, & FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER 1962 b. Sex and size. The Cowry 1 (4): 50-52. Page 112 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 The California Land Snails Helminthoglypia reediana Ww.etTrT and Helminthoglypta similans Hanna & Snir with Comments on their Relationships (Gastropoda BY Pulmonata) ALLYN G. SMITH Associate Curator, Department of Invertebrate Zoology, California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco 18, California The suggestion has been made by Pilsbry and others that Helminthoglypta reediana Wil- lett, 1932, and H. similans Hanna & Smith, 1937, may be conspecific. There are good reasons for this supposition; first, because of the simi- larity in the descriptions of the shells, and second, because the range of H. similans may overlap the area of the type locality of H. re- ediana. In order to provide some information on this problem the paratypes of Helminthoglypta reediana were borrowed for study several years ago from the Los Angeles County Muse- um through the courtesy of the late George Wil- lett for the purpose of making a comparison with paratypes of H. similans in the collection of the California Academy of Sciences. Unfor- tunately, it was not possible to compare the holotypes of the two species, but some basis for such a comparison is found in the published figures. The inability to compare them directly is not a serious lack, however, as the holotype of H. similans is a representative specimen, the characters of which are found also in the paratypes. It is assumed that the same is true for the paratypes of H. reediana; at least the description agrees generally with the charac- ters exhibited by the more adult shells in the paratype lot. The paratypes of Helminthoglypta reediana, eight in number, are all good though immature specimens that show significant sculptural characters plainly. The three largest are ap- parently close to maturity though they lack the reflected and slightly thickened peristome. of adult shells. The nuclear whorls of H. reediana and of H. similans have about the same type of sculpture. In this respect both species are like H. carpenteri (Newcomb, 1861), which is found in the same general area. The early post- nuclear whorls of all three species also are not greatly different. In H. reediana and H. simi- lans they show anastomosing lines of growth that give the surface of the shells a dull matte appearance; and both species have round or elongate papillations, not particularly closely set but arranged in a descendingly spiral direc- tion. Better preserved shells of both species exhibit areas of microscopic, wavy-lined sculp- ture visible only under a magnification of about 40X. However, in H. reediana the papillations are generally more pronounced than in H. simi- lans, but this difference, in itself alone, is hardly enough reason to separate the two spe- cies subspecifically, and certainly not enough for specific separation. The most striking difference between the two species occurs in the sculpture and general texture of the bodywhorl. The three largest paratypes of Helminthoglypta reediana show a most unusual sudden change in the sculptural characters of the bodywhorl from those that precede it. On each of these three shells, after the final resting (estivating) stage before the snail becomes adult, the newly formed whorl is smooth and shiny, especially on the base. The papillations disappear, and their place is taken by incised spiral lines. Lines of growth no longer coalesce in an irregular manner but be- come generally continuous over the entire whorl. On these three shells this change takes Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 113 place at 4%, 54, and 53 whorls, respectively; the other five paratypes are apparently too im- mature to show this change. It is not possible to say whether this sudden sculptural change is true also on the holotype either from the de- scription or the published figure, but it should be easy to determine from a close examination of the holotype itself. In general shape Helminthoglypta reediana and H. similans are close, as Willett has pointed out. The incised spirals on the bodywhorl of H. reediana in the adult stage are not as strongly marked as in most good specimens of H. carpenteri, although some lots of the latter species in the collection of the California Acad- emy of Sciences from the northern end of its range show a weakening of these lines. Spiral markings on H. similans, if present at all, are still less of a sculptural feature. There is, however, one sure method of determining the relationship of H. reediana to the other two spe- cies. If the mantle of the living animal is of a uniformly gray or brownish-gray color without other markings, its relationship is close to H. carpenteri; but if the mantle is densely blotched with black, it is closer to H. similans. Unfor- tunately, none of the paratypes of H. reediana affords a clue to this relationship. To deter- mine the point new material must be collected alive, which need not be adult. The differences between Helminthoglypta reediana and H. similans, as indicated by slightly larger size, a somewhat wider umbili- cus, and the greater number of whorls of the former, together with the sculptural differences in the bodywhorl of the two species, seem suf- ficient to warrant leaving them as separate spe- cies. No advantage can be seen to accrue by merging them without more and better evidence based upon additional specimens of H. reediana from the type locality in Lowe Canyon, southern Monterey County, which "lies between Ranchita and Vineyard Canyon road, which runs from San Miguel to Parkfield". Until such evidence is at hand, the true relationships to other species must remain opento a certain amount of specu- lation. As Helmunthoglypta reediana is reported to have been collected in the ''vicinity of Paso Robles", which is in the northern end of San Luis Obispo County, it seems pertinent to com- ment on a set of dead and broken ''bones", in- cluding seven fairly good immature shells collected in this area and now in the writer's collection (AGS No. 5509). This lot is a curious assemblage of papillated and striated shells, all of the best juveniles being papillate although one of these shows the peculiar break in sculpture found in H. reediana. Some of the adult shells are definitely not this species, however, and seem closer to H. carpenteri, although one or two of the better immature specimens show ev- idence that the snail had the black-maculated mantle of H. similans. In general, the shells are of the size of H, similans but are noticeably more globose with a small umbilicus, as in both this species and H. carpenteri. This lot was collected by E. E. Hand in 1931 in the ''second canyon back of Thompson's Auto Camp, Paso Robles, California". Collecting in this area is difficult, as snails are hard to find, especially living adults in good condition. The probabili- ties are that one would most likely find them under live-oak deadfalls or similar cover in the hills to the west of the Salinas River. Literature Cited Hanna, G Dattas, & ALLYN G. SMITH 1937. Some notes on an old race of California land snail with descriptions of three new forms. Nautilus 51 (1): 10-17; pl. 1. Pitspry, HENRY AuGusTus 1939. | Land mollusca of North America (north of Mexico). Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila, Monogr. No. 3; 1 (1): 184-187; figs. 92-94. WILLETT, GEORGE 1932. A new Helminthoglypta trom Monterey county, Cali- fornia. Nautilus 45 (4): 134-135; pl. 11, figs. 8-10. Page 114 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 Notes on the Opisthobranchs of the West Coast of North America II. The Order Cephalaspidea from San Diego to Vancouver Island BY JOAN E. STEINBERG 850 38th Avenue, San Francisco 21, California In attempting to prepare a key to the spe- cies of the Order Cephalaspidea recorded from San Diego, California, to Vancouver Island, British Columbia, I have become increasingly aware that a key to these species, as they are now known, is not feasible at this time. How- ever, it is possible to present a statement con- cerning the systematic problems existing in the Order Cephalaspidea, as it is Known on this coast. I hope that such a statement, together with a species list, will stimulate the additional research necessary to resolve some, if not all, of these problems. Aithough a number of cephalaspideans have been described from the area under considera- tion, virtually nothing is known of the anatomy of the animals. Many species are quite small and have been obtained alive only by dredging. The systematic arrangement which is presently in use by conchologists on the west coast is ar- tificial in that it depends too heavily upon shell characters (e.g., see: Keen & Pearson, 1952; Burch, 1945a, 1945b; Keen, 1958). The shells of some species offer so few characters for posi- tive identification that, without knowledge of the external and internal anatomy of the animals themselves, it is impossible to establish their systematic position at the familial or the sub- ordinal level. Pilsbry (1895, 1896) was aware of this problem, and his keys to the families of the order, based upon the characteristics of the radula and the development of the parapodia, was a major step toward providing some ra- tional system of classification for this group. Since then, the cephalaspideans have received much attention in Europe where they are well known (e.g., see: Pruvot-Fol, 1954). Without knowledge of the soft parts of the animals, it is impossible to relate the system- atic position of most of our cephalaspideans to those in other parts of the world. For that matter, until more information is obtained, the relationships between the species already de- scribed will be doubtful. Burch (1945a, 1945b) gives a good account of the problems involved in working with west coast species, and, al- though Oldroyd (1927) may be outdated for other groups of mollusks, hér account of the cephal- aspideans is still useful. Keen & Pearson's key (1952) is excellent for determining the generic position of the shells of this group as they are now known, and, as many species range from Southern California southward, Keen's later treatment of the group for tropical west Ameri- ca (1958) is also helpful. The Order Cephalaspidea is divided into three suborders. The shell is external in the Suborders Bullacea and Scaphandracea; howev- er, parapodia (upwardly directed lateral exten- sions of the foot) are present in the Suborder Scaphandracea but absent in the Suborder Bulla- cea. The shell is internal in the Suborder Phil- inacea. It is in the Suborders Bullacea and Scaphandracea that most of the systematic problems exist. For the placement of the fam- ilies and genera discussed below, the reader is referred to the list of species at the end of this paper. The Genus Microglyphis Dall, 1902, is usu- ally placed in the Family Acteonidae (Suborder Bullacea). Acteonids possess an operculum, but Dall in his original description states that Microglyphis is inoperculate. The shells of Mi- Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 115 ee ee ee el ee croglyphis are markedly similar to those of members of the Family Ringiculidae, a family whichis closely allied to the Family Acteonidae. I have tentatively placed this genus in the Fam- ily Ringiculidae in the list at the end of the pa- per. The Family Acteocinidae has been used, in the area under consideration, as a catch-all for species whose shells bear some resemblance to one another. It is usually composed of the following genera: Acteocina Gray, 1827; Coleo- physis Fischer, 1883; Retusa Brown, 1827; Vol- vulella Newton, 1891; and Sulcoretusa Burch, 1945. Keen (1958) also includes Cylichna Lov- én, 1846, and Cylichnella Gabb, 1873. However, when the entire organism is considered, Acte- ocina, Cylichna, and Cylichnella are genera usually assigned to the Family Scaphandridae, and a species of Retusa, R. trunculata (Brugu- i@re, 1772), is the type of the Family Retusidae, the Family Scaphandridae being included in the Suborder Scaphandracea and the Family Retusi- dae in the Suborder Bullacea. Pruvot-Fol (1954) synonymizes Volvulella with Volvula A. Adams, 1850, and includes the latter genus in the Fam- ily Bullidae (Suborder Bullacea). Although the concept of what actually constitutes the Family Acteocinidae on our coast appears to be some- what obscure, I have retained the family in the. list, including in it, however, only the species assigned to Acteocina by previous workers and the following species of ''Retusa"’. Sulcoretusa is a name proposed for the preoccupied Sulcularia Dall, 1921, which was originally used as a ''section"' of the genus Re- tusa but was subsequently raised to generic rank (see Burch, 1945a). Two species, Retusa xystrum Dall, 1919, and R. (Sulcularia) monter- eyensis Smith & Gordon, 1948, must be consid- ered here. If they are correctly placed in the Family Acteocinidae, then a change must be made in their generic placement. I have re- tained both species in the Family Acteocinidae in the list only for convenience, as I have no evidence to suggest that they would be better placed elsewhere at this time. It may be that the genus Retusa (Suborder Bullacea) is not re- presented on our coast by any of the presently known species of cephalaspideans. Coleophysis was also used by Dallas a "section'' of Retusa for R. harpa Dall, 1871, but Burch (1945a) gives it full generic standing and includes Acteocina carinata Carpenter, 1857, in this genus. I have retained A. carinata in the genus Acteocira in the list. According to Jefferson Gonor (University of Washington; written communication, June 1961), Retusa harpa belongs to the Suborder Scaphandracea and appears to be similar to species in the genus Acteocina. I have retained this species in the Family Acteocinidae as ''Re- tusa'' harpa. Further work needs to be done before this species may be assigned to a genus in the Suborder Scaphandracea. The genus Cylichna is correctly included by Burch (1945a) in the Family Scaphandridae, and he considers the Californian species of Cylich- nella to be more correctly placed in Cylichna. I have placed all of the species of Cylichnella in Cylichna on Burch's authority. Gonor (written communication, June 1961) suggests that the two are probably synonyms. However, Burch (loc. cit.) also lists Diaphana Brown, 1827, in the Family Scaphandridae. A species of Diaphana, D. minuta Brown, 1827, is the type upon which the Family Diaphanidae is based. This family belongs to the Suborder Bullacea. I have included Broctonia Iredale, 1915, re- presented in California by B. polystrigma (Dall, 1908), in the Family Scaphandridae only because Dall, in his original description, states that the shell resembles Cylichna. It may, however, belong to an entirely different family or even a different suborder. The names Acteocina and Volvulella have been rejected by Marcus (1955) and Pruvot-Fol (1954), respectively, as being invalid for Re- cent genera because they have fossil forms as type species. Marcus gives an excellent dis- cussion of the reasons for using the name Tornatina A. Adams, 1859, in preference to Ac- teocina. I agree with Marcus that it is not ad- visable to base a Recent genus upon a fossil form in cases where the anatomy of the animal is the primary means of identification; howev- er, in order not to confuse the literature with name changes which may subsequently prove to be incorrect, I have retained the names Acteo- cina and Volvulella in the list. Haminoea Turton & Kingston, 1830, is er- roneously placed by our conchologists in the Family Akeridae (also spelled Aceridae). It actually belongs to the Family Atyidae. This family is included in the Suborder Scaphandra- cea. Keen & Pearson (1952) place our Atys in the Family Scaphandridae so there may be some doubt as to which family our species of Atys may belong. I have included them in the Family Page 116 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. A Atyidae. RETUSIDAE Because of the confusion which exists in determining the exact placement of many mem- bers of the Suborders Scaphandracea and Bulla- cea and because the relationships between most of the species known On our coast have not been worked out satisfactorily, I have not attempted a thorough investigation of the individual spe- cies listed below. Until our species are more fully known, such an investigation would be both time consuming and relatively futile. The works which have been cited above, including those containing original descriptions of spe- cies, are included in the bibliography. In addi- tion, the reader is referred to the works of Dall (1921) and Grant & Gale (1931). Acknowledgment I am deeply grateful to Mr. Jefferson Gon- or, Department of Zoology, University of Wash- ington, for reading the manuscript and for his helpful criticism. I would also like to thank Dr. Leo Hertlein and Mr. Allyn G. Smith of the California Academy of Sciences for their com- ments. List of Species in the Order CEPHALASPIDEA (San Diego to Vancouver Island) CEPHALASPIDEA Bullacea ACTEONIDAE Acteon painei DALL, 1903 Acteon punctocaelatus (CARPENTER, 1864) Acteon traski STEARNS, 1898 RINGICULIDAE Microglyphis breviculus DALL, 1902 Microglyphis estuarinus DALL, 1908 BULLIDAE Bulla gouldiana (Pivssry, 1893) Bulla quoyana (DALL, 1919) Volvulella californica DALL, 1919 Volvulella cooperi DALL, 1919 Volvulella cylindrica (CARPENTER, 1863) Volvulella tenuissima WILLETT, 1944 No known species within the range under consideration are definitely assignable to this family. DIAPHANIDAE Diaphana californica DALL, 1919 Scaphandracea SCAPHANDRIDAE Broctonia polystrigma (DALL, 1908) Cylichna alba (Brown, 1827) Cylichna attonsa (CARPENTER, 1865) Cylichna diegensis (DALL, 1919) ACTEOCINIDAE Acteocina carinata CARPENTER, 1857 Acteocina culcitella (GouLD, 1852) Acteocina eximia (Bairp, 1863) Acteocina inculta (GouLD, 1856) Acteocina infrequens (C. B. ADAMS, 1852) Acteocina intermedia WILLETT, 1928 Acteocina magdalenensis DALL, 1919 Acteocina oldroydt DALL, 1925 Acteocina planata DALL, 1919 Acteocina smirna Dau, 1919 “Retusa” harpa Dat, 1871 “Retusa” montereyensis SMITH & GorDON, 1948 “Retusa” xystrum DALL, 1919 ATYIDAE Atys casta CARPENTER , 1864 Atys nonscripta (A. ADAMS, 1850) Haminoea olgae DaALL, 1919 Haminoea vesicula GouLp, 1855 Haminoea virescens (SOWERBY, 1833) Philinacea PHILINIDAE Philine alba Matrox, 1958 Philine bakeri DAL, 1919 Philine californica WILLETT, 1944 Philine polaris Aurivi.uius, 1885 GASTROPTERIDAE Gastropteron cinereum DALL, 1925 Gastropteron pacificum BERGH, 1893 AGLAJIDAE Aglaja adellae DAL, 1894 Aglaja diomedea (BERGH, 1894) Aglaja nana STEINBERG & JONES, 1960 Aglaja ocelligera (BERGH, 1894) Aglaja purpurea (BeRGH, 1894) Chelidonura phocae Marcus, 1961 Navanax inermis (Cooper, 1862) Vol. 5; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 117 Literature Cited Burcu, JOHN Q. 1945 a. Minutes of the Conchological Club of Southern Cali- fornia, No. 47: 1-42; pl. 2. 1945 b. Minutes of the Conchological Club of Southern Cali- fornia, No. 48: 1-27. DALL, WILLIAM HEALEY 1921. | Summary of the marine shellbearing mollusks of the northwest coast of America, from San Diego, California, to the Polar Sea, mostly contained in the collection of the United States National Museum, with illustrations of hitherto un- figured species U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 112: 1-217; pls. 1-22. Grant, Ucyssss S., 1V, & Hoyt RopNEy GALE 1931. | Catalogue of the marine Pliocene and Pleistocene mol- lusca of California and adjacent regions. Mem. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist. 1; 1-1036; pls. 1-32; 15 texthgs. KEEN, A. Myra 1958. Sea shells of tropical west America; marine mollusks from Lower California to Colombia. Stanford Univ. Press, xi + 624 pp.; illus. Stanford, Calif. KEEN, A. Myra, & JouNn C, PEARSON 1952. Illustrated key to West North American gastropod genera. 39 pp.; illust. Stanford Univ. Press, Stanford, Calif. Marcus, ERNST 1955. Opisthobranchia from Brazil. Bol. Fac. Fil. Univ. Sao Paulo, Zoologia 20: 89-262; pls. 1-30. Ovproyp, IpA SHEPARD 1927. The marine shells of the west coast of North America. Stanford Univ. Publ., Geol. Sci. 2 (pt. 1): 1-297; pls. 1-29. Pitspry, HENRY AuGusTUS 1895-96. Manual of conchology; structural and systematic. 16: vii + 262; pls. 1-74. Pruvot-Foi, ALICE 1954. Mollusques opisthobranches. Faune de France 58: 1-460; pl. 1; 173 textfigs. Studies on Mollusk Populations V. -- Tegula rugosa (A. Apams, 1853) BY RUDOLF STOHLER Department of Zoology, University of Califormia, Berkeley 4, California (4 Textfigures) Arthur Adams described Chlorostoma ru- gosum at the meeting of the Zoological Society of London under the date of May 27, 1851 (actu- ally published in 1853) as follows: ““C. testa turbinatd, profund? umbilicatd, luteo-fuscd, nigro variegatd, longitudinaliter nodoso-plicatd, transversim sulcatd; anfractu ultimo rotund- ato, infra suturam angustato; columelld incurvatd, anticé bituberculatd, tu- berculo supremo magno, prominente; labro fusco marginato. Hab. —?” This brief description may be translated, somewhat freely, as follows: 'The shell of this Chlorostoma is top shaped, deeply umbilicate, yellowish brown with black markings, longitudinally with nodose folds and transversely with grooves; last whorl rounded, narrowed at the suture; columella incurved with two tubercles anteriorly, the upper of which is large and prominent; lip with brown margin. ‘Habitat unknown. ' Fischer (1880) redescribed this same spe- cies in the large Iconograph of Kiener as Trochus rugosus, A. Adams: “Trochus rugosus, A. Adams. Testa anguste perforata, conoidea, cras- Sa, rudis; anfractus 5-6, superne et plerumque erosi, oblique striali, sordide fusco-cineret, fulvo obscure et radiatim flammulati, convexiusculi; ultimus tumidus, ad suturam late appressus, marginatus et irregulariter lamelloso- plicatus; spiraliter cingulatus, interdum radiatim subplicatus, infra convexus et concentrice, sulcis 6-7, apertura rhomboidea, nigro vel purpureo margin- ata; columella brevi, bidentata, dente superno majore; callo umbilicari per - forationem partim tegente.”* This somewhat difficult description, in which important words seem to be missing, was accompanied by a more complete and compre- hensive French description. Page 118 Fischer (1. c., p. 232) compares this species with ''Trochus euryomphalus Jonas" which, he states, is 'equally perforate but differs by its coloration, its smaller shell, its spiral grooves etc. ' (translation mine). Pilsbry (1889) in Tryon's Manual describes the same species, again as Chlorostoma rugos - um: " Shell narrowly umbilicate, conoidal, solid, heavy, dull cinereous, more or less variegated by brown, blackishor red streaks; spire conoid- al, generally eroded and white or yellow at the apex; whorls, about 5, obliquely striate, radiate- ly coarsely and irregularly plicate and rugose above, sometimes nearly smooth; periphery rounded; base convex, concentrically lirate; aperture oblique; columella strongly dentate in the middle or below it, with a second small tooth at the base; edge of the columella rather deeply curved above the tooth, but spreading at its junction with the whorl, bounding and somewhat narrowing the umbilicus by a white callus, which does not extend to the upper margin of the aper- ture; umbilicus deep, white within. Alt. 26, diam. 27 mm." In the discussion of the species, following this more thorough description, Pilsbry adds: "A rude, rugose species, like C. aureotinctum; but much less coarsely sculptured, withnarrow- er umbilicus. . uy Keen (1958, p. 259) states: ''Tegula (Om- phalius ) rugosa (A. Adams, 1853)... . The rough turban shell is heavy and dull gray, vari- egated with brown, black, or red streaks; the whorls are roughly and irregularly sculptured with oblique folds and some spiral threads. The umbilicus is deep and white within. ... "' In the collection of the Department of Zoo- logy, University of California, Berkeley, there are eleven lots of Tegula rugosa from various collecting stations on the west shore of the Gulf of California. It was possible for me to collect two fairly large random samples of populations about thirty miles south of the town of San Felipe, Baja California, Mexico. These samples are from two different areas, perhaps less than 500 meters distant from each other, but sepa- rated by a sandy beach devoid of any rocks or other solid objects to whicha Tegula might cling. The other lots in the collection of the Department have been received from various sources and do not represent truly randomly collected specimens, as none of these lots in- clude juvenile specimens. THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 In comparing our specimens with the various descriptions, several discrepancies were noted. The umbilicus showed great variability, and similarly, the sculpturing of the shell did not agree closely with the descriptions. While it must be admitted that the definition of colors of a shell will always remain a more or less sub- jective undertaking, nevertheless, to my eyes the shells of Tegula rugosa appear green rather than grayorashy. Becauseof these differences, rather striking to me, a careful examination was made of all 290 shells and the results were recorded. After the addition of two more lots early in 1962, the new total of 304 shells was again examined and the results were again rec- orded. It is sufficient to state that for two shell characters (umbilicus and ornamentation) the two sets of results were identical (except for the additional specimens); the appraisal of the color varied, but only very slightly. Figure 1: Tegula (Omphalius) rugosa (A. ADAMS, 1853) Lateral and ventral aspects of an unusually well preserved specimen. Puertecitos Cove, Baja California, Mexico. ex coll. Dr. Donald R. Shasky. x 1.6 Umbilicus: Figure 1 shows an exceptionally fine specimen of the species under discussion, from the collection of Dr. Donald R. Shasky; it is not included in our study but was used as it illustrates the various shell characters rather well. Among these, however, the umbilicus exhibits one of the extreme conditions observed — it is not only deep as stated in the original description by Adams (1. c.) but it is extremely wide open. Figure 2b illustrates the form of the umbilicus encountered in the majority of our shells (i. e. 50.33%); here the umbilicus is deep, indeed, but the columella forms what I call a 'fold', narrowing the umbilicus. Figure2d rep- resents perhaps a transition to the imperforate Figure 2: Tegula (Omphalius) rugosa (A. ADams, 1853) Lateral and ventral aspects of specimens collected January 24, 1959, on rocks approximately 30 miles south of San Felipe, Baja California, Mexico. Figure 2 a: unusually high form; figure 2 e: shape most commonly encounterd; figure 2 b: umbilicus narrowed by columellar callus; figure 2 d: umbilicus reduced to a “pit”; figure 2 f: umbilicus absent. ex coll. Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley. x 1.0 Tab THE VELIGER Page 119 condition, as here the callus formed by the col- umella narrows the umbilicus to what may be termed a mere pit, of variable depth, but never as deep as the two first mentioned conditions. Finally, the umbilical area may be closed, rep- resented by a more or less shallow depression — or it may be completely flat and smooth, In Table 1 are reproduced the results of my counts of the various lots, the latter arranged chronologically. Above the designations chosen for the various conditions of the umbilical area are small sketches showing the criteria used in segregating the individual specimens. It may be noted that 19.08 % are widely and deeply um - bilicate, 50.33% are narrowly and deeply umbil- icate, 12.83 %are extremely narrowly and rather shallowly umbilicate, whilea total of 17.76% are imperforate; these latter shells may be separated into two groups (as stated above): one witha shallow depression, comprising 9.21% of the grand total, the other completely imperforate, with 8.55% of the grand total. Somewhat differ - ently expressed, the shells in this study agree, as far as the perforation is concerned, only up to 70% with the generally unanimous statement by the cited authors: ''deeply umbilicate"'; only slightly more than 62% agree with Pilsbry's description: 'narrowly umbilicate''. If all the shells that show any sort of perforation are counted together, we find approximately 82 % in this category. In my opinion, however, the um- bilicus which I designated as 'pit'does not agree with what the different authors described, and le 1 Frequencies in Differences in the Umbilical Area of Tegula (Omphalius) rugosa (A. ADAMS, 1853) in the Collection of the Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley Locality Date? Collector imper- forate H. N. Lowe North & Scotten M. Turver R. Stohler P. Fleischer R. Stohler F. Wolfson R. Stonhler F. Wolfson F. Wolfson F. Wolfson San Felipe Los Angeles Bay San Felipe go mi S San Felipe! 60 mi S San Felipe? go mi S San Felipe’ N edge of San Felipe 36 mi S San Felipe’ San Luis Gonzaga 15 mi S San Felipe’ Puertecitos II 1929 23 % 1957 28 XI 1957 24. I 1959 T1959 IT 1959 IT 1959 IT 1959 III 1961 24 XII 1961 31 III 1962 I a (i) 3 (3) 31 (4) 4 9 6 (1) 128 (7) (1) 5 (1) 5) Totals: 1 approximate number of miles south of the town 58 (10) 2 months in roman numerals The numbers in parentheses refer to individuals showing a wavy sculpture on the whorls Page 120 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 ‘Table 2 Measurements (in millimeters) of the Largest and Smallest Specimens in a Random Population of Tegula (Omphalius) rugosa (A. ADAMS, 1853) from approximately 30 miles South of San Felipe Largest Smallest Umbilicus wide open With fold Pit Depression Imperforate we would therefore have about 30% of the shells not covered by these descriptions. It might be assumed that the condition of the umbilicus, i. e. whether it is wide open or completely imperforate, is correlated with the age of the animal. However, the figures in the accompanying Table 2 show clearly that this would beerroneous. In the sample of 200 spec- imens which I collected in January 1959 there were 28 measuring less than 20 millimeters in maximum height, and of these there were 7 measuring less than 14 millimeters. A shell of over 16 or 18 millimeters has the appearance of a''mature"' shell, losing the juvenile charac- ter of being wider than high. This is not to say that among truly adult shells none will be found which are wider than high. Rather, all juvenile shells are much more obese, having an obesity index exceeding 100. As will be noted from Table 2, truly juvenile shells are represented in all five classes of umbilical condition, just as are adult shells. Sculpture: Even more divergence is noted in regard to the character described by Pilsbry (1. c., p. 173, line 7) ''radiately plicate and rug- ose above... .'' This condition, illustrated in Figure 3, is observed in but 8.88 % of our spec- imens (see Table 1, figures in parentheses ). Particularly startling to me was the statement by Pilsbry (1. c.)in the discussion of Tegula rugosa: ''A rude, rugose species, like C. aureo- tinctum; but much less coarsely sculptured, . |"' It is true, the radiate plications on the whorls are similar to the regular sculpture of T. aureo- tincta (Forbes, 1852) but this, to my eyes, is the only similarity between the two species. It appears tome more Similar to the variant in T. brunnea (Philippi, 1848) which Dallnamed twice, first in 1871 and then again in 1919: fluctuatum and fluctuosus, respectively. In a previous article of this general series of studies (Stohler, 1958) I showed that in T. brunnea the character under discussion varied from about 4% to about 28% in different populations. At that time I suggested that the sculpture of the exceptional specimens of T. brunnea indicated the possibility of parallel evolutionary trends and that the character may, or may not, eventually, occur in every individual of a population. My obser- vations in T, rugosa seem to me to fit into the general thought expressed in that paper; the rather small percentage of individuals showing the trait seems to support the view that we are dealing with a mutation. It might be considered Surprising that the exceptional character was noted in all the early descriptions and even in as recent a work as Keen's (l. c.) excellent book it is referred to as if it were the usual occur- rence. To be sure, Pilsbry did state (l. c., p. U73, ibime Be sometimes nearly smooth; "' Our samples would suggest rather the reverse description, i. e. ''smooth, sometimes with oblique ribs." Shape: As noted above, the juvenile shells are much more obese than the adult shells. However, ina random sample of a population, such as the one mentioned before, comprising 200 specimens, a great variationin the shape of the adult shell will be noticeable. Figure 2, in addition to showing variation in the umbilical region, also illustrates some of the extremes encountered in the general shell shape. The relatively tall shell is comparatively rare in occurrence but is encountered frequently enough to be worth noting in a comprehensive descrip- tion of the species. Color: As already mentioned, color ap- praisal is subject to great variation due to the optical sense of the beholder as many subjective factors must enter intoascertaining of the color. Also already mentioned is the fact that the shells appear to me as green rather than as ash gray. However, comparing actual specimens with the colors in Maerz & Paul (1950) the following showed complete agreement: Figure 3: Tegula (Omphalius) rugosa (A. ADAMS, 1853) Lateral and ventral aspects of a specimen collected January 24, 1959, on rocks approximately 30 miles south of San Felipe, Baja California, Mexico. This specimen shows the “coarse, oblique plications’ (see text) ex coll. Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley. x 1.0 Figure 4: Tegula (Omphalius) rugosa (A. Apams, 1853) Ventral aspects of five specimens collected January 24, 1959, on rocks approximately 30 miles south of San Felipe, Baja California, Mexico. These shells show the various possible conditions of the umbilical area: a: wide open; b: with fold; c: pit; d: depression; e: imperforate. ex coll. Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley. x 1.0 General shell color: Pearl Gray (M & P, plate 44, field 1 A) with green in the uneroded areas; the green varied, in different specimens, from M & P, pl. 22, field 1 I to pl. 22, field 6 L. (which latter is called Peridot Green). The specks, rather than ''lines'"' of some authors, appear to be pure black to purple (M &P, pl. 44, field 5 F), I failed toseeany red markings any - where. The lip of the aperture is bordered by a green band (M & P, pl. 22, field 7 A to pl. 22, field 5 A; the first of these is called American Green). The outermost edge of the lip, being thin, appears translucent with a yellowish tinge. I failed to encounter any truly brown (Adams, l. c.) or black to purple (Fischer, 1. c.) color in my lots. On the basis of the observations recorded above, the following amplified and emended de- scription is offered: Tegula (Omphalius) rugosa (A. Apams, 1853) Shell top shaped, heavy, solid; umbilicus wanting to wide openand in the majority of spec- imens deep, white within; adult shell slightly to much higher than wide, usually eroded; dull: green to pearl gray, flecked with black to purple spots; eroded areas may be white to yellowish; whorls rounded, variably sculptured with spiral threads;some specimens have faint to pronounced oblique folds; body whorl appressed at the sut- ure to the penultimate whorl; aperture oblique, rounded; columella with two teeth in the upper half, the upper tooth much stronger and more prominent than the lower tooth; columella curved THE VELIGER Page 121 above the teeth, its callus inmany cases spread - ing and narrowing the umbilicus; inside of apert- ure nacreous, bordered with a green to bluish- green band, about 1 to 15 mm wide, the extreme edge of the lip thin with a yellowish-green trans- lucent color. The juvenile shell differs in that it is wider than high; body whorl is not appressed to the penultimate whorl; spiral threads distinct, usually a large one alternating with a small one; nepionic whorls usually eroded, white. The animal possesses four filamentous epipodial tentacles oneach side of the foot, which is green in color; the color appears as criss-crossed short lines rather thana uniform patch of color; head and tentacles are also dark green. Acknowledgment I wish to express my appreciation to all those many individuals who have assisted this study in one way or another, be it through the gift or loan of specimens, be it through discus- sionand criticism. But a special word of thanks is due to Mrs. Emily Reid, Staff Artist, for the excellent illustrations reproduced here and those yet to be published. Literature Cited ADAMS, ARTHUR 1853. Contributions towards a monograph of the Trochidae, a family of gasteropodous mollusca. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 19: 150-192. DaLL, WiLLIAM HEALEY 1871. Descriptions of new species of mollusca trom the North Pacific Ocean in the collection of the United States National Museum. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 56 (2295): 293-371. 1919. | Descriptions of sixty new forms of mollusks from the west coast of North America and the North Pacific, with notes on others already described. Am. Journ. Conchol. 7: 93-160; pits. 13-16. FiscHER, P. 1880. Spécies général et iconographie des coquilles vivantes, genre Trochus, 423 pp.; 120 plates. KEEN, A. Myra 1958. Sea shells of tropical west America; marine mollusks from Lower California to Colombia. Stanford Univ. Press, xi + 624 pp.; illus. Stanford, Calif. Maerz, A., & M. REA PAUL 1950. A dictionary of color. McGraw-Hill Company, New York. vii + 208 pp. (incl. 56 plts.) Pitspry, HENRY AUGUSTUS 1889. Manual of conchology; structural and systematic. 11: 519 pp.; pls. 1-67. STOHLER, RUDOLF 1958. Studies on mollusk populations: Illa. Nautilus 71 (4): 129-131; pl. 10. Page 122 Notes & News A New Marine Research Station at Guaymas, Mexico BY BRUCE CAMPBELL In August 1962 a group of doctors and uni- versity professors interested in marine biology and promotion of research organized and incor- porated as a non-profit corporation in the State of California under the name of ''Sea of Cortez Marine Research Center''. Collectively, this group has made in excess of 150 trips to the Gulf of California and points south. Several in- dividuals are past members of a research or- ganization that has worked extensively in such widely separated places as the Marshall Islands, Red Sea, and the Galapagos. It was felt that a research center in the area being investigated should be established so that scientists can work up their material as it is collected or observed and avoid the plague of collecting huge quantities of specimens only to have it sitting around gathering dust until some- one, perhaps years later, has time to study it. Plans have progressed to the point where a large portion of land, located on the shore of a small protected cove on the northern part of Bacochibampo Bay, Guaymas, Mexico, has been made available by the civic leaders in Guaymas. This has been purchased by the group, and through town officials, friends in the govern- ment, and Captain Xavier Mendoza, a director of the group, yards of ''red tape'' have been cut so that as money becomes available building can be started on the ''Center'' proper. It will be designed so that living quarters can be provided for visiting workers, and adequate laboratory space can be adapted to various projects. Plans THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 call for aquaria that will be at the disposal of investigators. Future plans include field sta- tions in remote areas and.an oceanographic vessel. This new facility will be open to any qualified investigator working in any field of biological or physical science. Sixteenth Annual Meeting American Malacological Union Pacific Division The 1963 meeting of the Pacific Division of the American Malacological Union will be held on the campus of the University of California at Santa Barbara, June 26 through June 29, inclus- ive. Reservation blanks and a Call for Papers will soon be in the mail to members. Anyone interested in malacology or conch- ology is welcome to attend. Membership in the A.M. U. is invited; annual dues are $3.00, with an extra $1.00 for each additional member ina family. Another 50¢ is charged for Pacific Di- vision members; this goes toward defraying the separate costs of the western meetings. Non-members of the A. M. U.-P. D. who wish to be placed on the mailing list of the Pacific Division may send their names and ad- dresses, together with 50¢, to Mrs. Fay Wolf- son, Treasurer, 3336 Poe Avenue, San Diego 6, California. As we anticipate a large attendance, all who plan to attend are urged to send in their reser- vation blanks as soon as possible. Many inter- esting papers have been promised, and several overseas collectors have indicated their plans to be with us this year. You may meet some of your foreign correspondents for the first time in person — don't miss this meeting! Crawford N. Cate, Chairman A. M. U.- Pacific Division Vol. 5; No. 3 Books, Periodicals & Pamphlets A REVISION OF THE SPHAERIIDAE OF NORTH AMERICA (MOLLUSCA: PELECYPODA) by H. B. Herrington Misc. Publs., Mus. Zool., Univ. Mich- igan, No. 118, pp. 1-74, pls. 1-74, April 26, 1962. This important analysis of the freshwater "finger-nail" and ''pea'' clams of North Ameri- ca is a landmark in the study of a most difficult but prolific group of small bivalved mollusks in which utter chaos, both systematic and taxon- omic, has existed for decades. With this paper in hand, one is at long last furnished with the means of identifying species under a workable classification based upon relatively simple cri- teria of shell and hinge characters. No one who has not attempted to work with these small clams can possibly appreciate the tremendously painstaking job the Rev. Dr. Her- rington has accomplished—a task he started in 1938. From the plethora of names given to spe- cies in the genera of Sphaerium and Pisidium, Dr. Herrington finds 12 species of the former and 22 of the latter genus valid for the North American continent. To illustrate the mass of species names that had to be considered, take the widespread S. striatinum (Lamarck, 1818), for example, which has 21 listed synonyms; an even more striking situation is found in P. cas- ertanum (Poli, 1791) under which no less than 41 synonyms appear, of which 31 are attributed to the late Victor Sterki, a prolific worker in the group for more than 25 years beginning before the turn of the century. A more detailed analysis of the distribution of sphaeriids for our three Pacific Coast states gives the following number of species: Sphaerium Pisidium California 3 11 Oregon 3 Washington 5 (6?) 11 THE VELIGER Page 123 These numbers are probably not final as additional collecting, especially in Oregon, is very likely to add more species not yet report- ed as living in these West Coast states. Technically, Herrington's ''Revision" is ex- cellent and full of necessary yet concise infor- mation. He discusses the influence of habitat on the shell (an important consideration in view of great individual variation within a species), both geographic and geologic distribution, and in- cludes a good key based upon shell characters for use in identification. The systematic treat- ment of species is consistent throughout. It in- cludes measurements of authentic specimens, diagnostic characters, comparisons with other species, habitat, and geographic distribution in Canada, the United States, and Mexico. Fossil records are noted. The work is concluded with a list of described species with their present- day equivalents, a glossary of the morphologi- cal terms used in diagnosis, and what appears to be a complete bibliography. The plates are well done, especially those dealing with hinge characters, which one must study carefully in order to identify species. Inclusion of type lo- calities and the location of the type specimens of each valid species would have been helpful to subsequent students of the group, but lack of this information hardly detracts from the gen- eral excellence of the work. AGS BETWEEN PACIFIC TIDES by Edward F.. Ricketts and Jack Calvin Third edition, revised by Joel W. Hedg- peth. Stanford University Press, 1962. 516 pp. $8.75. This long-lived classic is here presented in a new edition. As the editor points out in a brief prefatory note, the book is now 23 years old, and much has changed. Some of the changes are duly noted in the revisions and additions to the annotated bibliography, but the original text by Ricketts remains for the most part in- tact. The most conspicuous exception to this is the replacement of the chapter on plankton by a new chapter which ‘attempts to summarize the researches conducted in the last dozen years by Page 124 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 3 the California Cooperative Oceanic Fisheries' Investigations. In most recent years this study has had to take into consideration the implica- tions and possible effects of radioactive mate- rials. Since the shore line—especially between Pacific tides—is a potential region for the con- centration of radioactive materials, discussion of this problemis not as far at sea as may first appear. In any event, this chapter, ''Beyond the tides: the uncertain sea'', brings together from various sources a summary of informa- tion not easily found by those who do not make it a profession to keep up with the growing flood of technical literature. In it the reader will find discussions of the California current system and the events of the last ten years along our shores —and of the complex interrelations of plants, animals, and water that professional scientists call the ecosystem. The book as a whole remains a ''must"! for every serious student of marine biology, be it in California or anywhere else in the world. RS NEW NAMES INTRODUCED BYE aA se SBIR IN THE MOLLUSCA AND CRUSTACEA by William J. Clench and Ruth D. Turner Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia, Special Publication No.4. 218 pp. 1962. $5.-, postpaid in the United States, $5.50 elsewhere. Not only did Henry Augustus Pilsbry live a long time, he also was productive for an almost unbelievably long time. He published, during a span of 75 years, a total of 1,151 papers and created 5,680 new names. Many students of mollusks may not be aware that Pilsbry also named many crustaceans, especially barnacles; but other groups of invertebrates also received his occasional attention. All of the Pilsbry names are listed in this book. Its value to all serious workers in the fields of conchology and malacology, as well as to students of crusta- ceans, cannot be exaggerated. The names are arranged alphabetically, followed by the "'author'’—a great help since Pilsbry published many important large works in co-authorship with various other workers. Following this information in each case is the year of publication, the bibliographic reference, and a citation of the type locality. As the au- thors, Drs. Clench and Turner, point out in the introduction to this compilation, no critical re- view was intended. That is left to those work- ers who will encounter the problems as they work on one taxon or another. The authors in- vite the users of this book to communicate to them any errors Or omissions that may be un- covered, as they intend to publish a supplement to this work at a later date. Anyone who has ever done any amount of bibliographical research can appreciate the herculean task performed by Clench and Turner; for this they deserve high praise and the gratitude of serious students for genera- tions to come. RS Some Back Numbers of THE VELIGER é are still available, sold in complete volumes only é Vol. 3: $3.75, Vol. 4: $5.-, plus handling charge of -.25 : CD PRBBKRBBIK ESHER OBES BSSROITK OK BBS OBR WII BESHOPIHO MILO Tue NortrHern CALirornia MALACOZOOLOGICAL CLUB is a non-profit educational corporation (Articles of Incorporation No. 388588 were filed December 31, 1959 in the office of the Secretary of State). The Ciup publishes a scientific quarterly, the VELIGER. Donations to the Cus are uscd to defray a part of the production costs and thus to keep the subscription rate at a minimum. Donors may designate the Fund to which their contribution is to be credited: Operating Fund (available for current production); Savings Fund (available only for specified purposcs); Endowment Fund (income only available). Unassigned donations will be used according to greatest necd, Contributions to the N. C. M. C. are deductible by donors as provided in section 170 of the Internal Revenue Code. Bequests, legacies, devices, gifts are deductible for Federal estate and yift tax purposes under section 2055, 2106, and 2522 of the Code. THE VELIGER is open to original papers pertaining to any problem concerned with mollusks. This is meant to make facilities available for publication of original articles from a wide field of endeavor. Papers dealing with anatomical, cytological, distributional, ecological, histological, morphological, phys- iological, taxonomic, etc., aspects of marine, freshwater or terrestrial mollusks from any region, will be considered. Even topics only indi- rectly concerned with mollusks may be acceptable. In the unlikely event that space considerations make limitations necessary, papers dealing with mollusks from the Pacific region will be given priority. However, in this case the term “Pacific region” is to be most liberally interpreted. It is the editorial policy to preserve the individualistic writing style of the author; therefore any editorial changes in a manuscript will be sub- mitted to the author for his approval, before going to press. Short articles containing descriptions of new species or lesser taxa will be given preferential treatment in the speed of publication provided that arrangements have been made by the author for depositing the holotype with a recognized public Museum. Museum numbers of the type specimens must be included in the manuscript. Type localities must be defined as accurately as possible, with geographical longitudes and latitudes added. Short original papers, not exceeding 500 words, will be published in the column “NOTES & NEWS”; in this column will also appear notices of meetings of the American Malacological Union, as well as news items which are deemed of interest to our subscribers in general. Articles on “METHODS & TECHNIQUES” will be considered for publication in another column, provided that the information is complete and tech- niques and methods are capable of duplication by anyone carefully fol- lowing the description given. Such articles should be mainly original and deal with collecting, preparing, maintaining, studying, photo- graphing, etc., of mollusks or other invertebrates. A third column, en- titled “INFORMATION DESK,” will contain articles dealing with any problem pertaining to collecting, identifying, etc., in short, problems encountered by our readers. In contrast to other contributions, articles in this column do not necessarily contain new and original materials. Questions to the editor, which can be answered in this column, are in- vited. The column “BOOKS, PERIODICALS, PAMPHLETS” will attempt to bring reviews of new publications to the attention of our readers. Also, new timely articles may be listed by title only, if this is deemed expedient. Manuscripts should be typed in final form on a high grade white paper, 81/2.” by 11”, double spaced and accompanied by a carbon copy. EDITORIAL BOARD Dr. Donatp P. Axsportt, Associate Professor of Biology Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University Dr. J. Wyatr Duruaw, Professor of Paleontology University of California, Berkeley Dr. E. W. Facer, Associate Professor of Biology Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California, La Jolla Dr. Capet Hann, Associate Professor of Koolog y University of California, Berkeley Dr. G. Datias HANNA, Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Joe, W. Hepcpetu, Professor of Zoology Director of the Pacific Marine Station, Dillon Beach Dr. LEo G. HERTLEIN, Associate Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Myra KEEN, Associate Professor of Paleontology and Curator of Concholog y Stanford University Dr. FRANK PiTELKA, Professor of oolog y University of California, Berkeley Mr. ALLyn G. Smitn, Associate Curator, Department of Invertebrate Zoology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. RaAtpH I. Situ, Professor of Koolog y University of California, Berkeley EDITOR Dr. RuDOLF STOHLER, Associate Research Koologist University of California, Berkeley A Quarterly published by NORTHERN CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL CLUB Berkeley, California VOLUME 5 APRIL I, 1963 NUMBER 4 CONTENTS Further Remarks on Two Rare Cowrie Species (Gastropoda) RAN ZP ALTERED SCHIEDERD i (-vofai@ibie isa Gul 6. Mel ida Olsens, <6 a2 eo teey wwe 4 EDD Insular Haliotids in the Western Pacific (Mollusca : Gastropoda) (Plate 14) INOBERTER: AL MAD GE uunradmonialsMiien Wille! (oiclao]a repre ered alts Peper eh yc? a | QO A New Cowrie (Mollusca : Gastropoda) from West- Central Philippines (Plate 15; 1 Textfigure) CRAWEORD ING CATEM rier cnie eth Ce si ec epee tea, tee os oi 2 GO An Unusual Occurrence of Tresus nuttalli (CoNRAD, 1837) (Mollusca : Pelecypoda) (3 Textfigures) WARE NEO) ADDICOMD Nias ci teal ep ainre ie oh) Ho Sep, en ee TAQ Notes on the California Species of Aplysia (Gastropoda : Opisthobranchia) Rosert D. BEEMAN ae os) A Revised List of Chitons from Guadelupe Island, Mexico (Mollusca : Polyplacophora) AEE NE Gea MILE ee ee mI ean citation eh es dears ae epee ots te eo es TT Cowrie Populations from Kenya (Mollusca : Gastropoda) FRANz ALFRED SCHILDER & MarRIA SCHILDER . .. - + + + «© «© «© « «+ 149 [Continued on Inside Front Cover] Subscriptions payable in advance to N. C. M. CG. $ 4.50 per volume Domestic; $ 4.80 in the Americas; $ 5.00 all other Foreign Countries. $ 1.80 for single copies of current volume only. Send subscriptions to: Mrs. PHorse Batcu, Treasurer, 1150 Brown Avenue, Lafayette, California. Address all other correspondence to: Dr. R. STOHLER, Editor, Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley 4, California. Second-Class Postage paid at Berkeley, California CONTENTS [ CONTINUED | NOTES & NEWS). 0:56 cies tle We rs re Ss The Terebridae (Mollusca : Gastropoda) of Bileau Island, Madang Harbour, New Guinea. _R. D. Burcu Range Extensions for Terebra robusta Hinps, 1844, and for Terebra formosa DESHAYES, 1857. HELEN Du SHANE Notes on a Miirella (Mollusca : Soe from the Gulf of California. AV ERD SEL OWARD Cin eee SA SO es eee ee ae ; & Two Range Extensions. AtLyn G. SMITH BOOKS, PERIODICALS & PAMPHILETS 00.0) 40) 5) a enero Note: The various taxa above species are indicated by the use of different type styles as ‘shown by the following examples: - ORDER, Suborder, DIVISION, Subdivision, SECTION, SUPERFAMILY, FamILy, Subfamily, Genus, (Subgenus). Vol. 5; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 125 Further Remarks on Two Rare Cowrie Species (Gastropoda) BY FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER University of Halle (Saale), German Democratic Republic Zoila venusta (Sowerby, 1846) and its ally Z. episema Iredale, 1939 (Cypraeidae) recently have been treated by C.N. Cate (1962) in a paper excellent both with regard to the complete re- view of the history of these cowries, as well as to the descriptions of their morphological char- acters. In the decade before World War II, I have personally examined the only three specimens of Zoila venusta preserved in collections of Eu- rope; they are tabulated in Table 1. Sowerby (1846) stated that the holotype of Cypraea venusta had been "received" from Port Adelaide, but he did not assert that it had been really collected there: therefore, its real habi- tat should be regarded as unknown, as the spe--. cies surely does not live in eastern South Aus- tralia. Cox (1869) indicated that C. thatcheri had been collected in the Dampier Archipelago, but subsequently Brazier (1882) corrected the type locality to Cervantes Island (his quotation of the width of the shell is evidently a misprint); Cate (1962, p. 9) thought the latter habitat should be adopted, whereas I prefer the former locality, as Cervantes Island is too close to the area inhabited by Zoila episema, and one might . wonder that not more than four specimens of Z. venusta (the young "'var.'’ bakeri Gatliff, 1916, included) have been collected in this far better known area. Cox (1869) possessed two specimens of Cy- praea thatcheri said to be ''exactly alike in ev- ery way"; he did not designate a holotype, but I think the shell figured in his original publica- tion should be regarded as holotype. This shell which Cox had sent ''to be figured’' evidently remained in his collection until it was sold in 1904 by Sowerby and Fulton to Dautzenberg who expressly stated his shell to be the specimen figured by Cox; the minor differences between Dautzenberg's shell (Cate, 1962, Pl. 4) and Cox' figure mentioned by Schilder & Schilder (1952, p. 176) may be explained by inexact freehand Table 1 Nomenclatural Status Collection Formula!; Figure dorsal spots Cypraca venusta SOwWERBY, 1846 holotype Cambridge, England, Cypraea thatcheri Cox, 1869 holotype (received from Dautzenberg Cox), now Museum Brussels Cypraea thatchert Cox, 1869 paratype Cox) Saul, now Museum University British Museum (received from 71 (62) 28:16 oi never figured 74(63) 25:15 Th Cox 1869, copied by Roberts 1885; new photograph in Cate 1962, pl. 4 76 (61) 26:17 mi Sowerby 1870, copied by Weinkauff 1881 and approxi- mately by Allan 1956 ' The formula indicates the length of the shell (in millimeters), the relative breadth (in per cent of length, in parentheses), the absolute number of labial and columellar teeth (separated by a colon), and the relative closeness of labial and columellar teeth (as explained in ScuitpeER, 1958) Page 126 THE VELIGER Vol. 5; No. 4 drawing of the latter, especially for the purpose of making the shell appear more regular with regard to the distribution of dorsal spots, the number supported by the fact that according to Sowerby (1870, p. 19) Cox sent the other specimen to the British Museum, and that he did so very soon, as this paratype was figured only one year after the original publication (pl. 2 of Sowerby's The- saurus, published in 1870). The formula cal- culated from Cox! original description [76(65)24: 14 lg] does not agree with either specimen, but this fact may be explained by inexact measuring and different counting of the teeth. of which was increased. This view is Cate (1962, p. 13) has carefully described the differences between a recently discovered shell from West Wallaby Island in the Houtman Abrolhos Archipelago, thought to be Cypraea venusta, and the far more frequent C. episema living farther south. But these characters do not agree with the three adult Zoila venusta tabulated above, whereas these three real Z. venusta agree with Z. episema in all characters except that the columellar teeth are less oblit- erated in most specimens of the latter, the gen- eral color is much paler with the margins pinkish instead of greyish, and the spots re- duced. lated below) surely should be regarded as racial only; therefore, Ihave separated Z. episema as good species from Z. thersites (Gaskoin, 1849) Such superficial characters (as tabu- in 1960, and I have united it with Z. venusta in my list of cowrie species in 1961. [ According to Iredale (1935), Gaskoin's paper printed in the volume for 1848 of the Proc. Zool. Soc. London in fact was published in March 1849, so that the correct data of Cypraea thersites, C. bicolor, C. gracilis, Cc. labrolineata, and C. pal- lidula are 1849, instead of 1848, as well as those of C. obscura, C. sulcata, C. vitrea, and C. grando now belonging to the family Trivii- dae.] Among Zoila venusta episema with large dorsal spots and greyish, distinctly spotted margins, there are two different kinds of spe- cimens: the typical large Z. episema from Cape Naturaliste (type locality) and Geographe Bay, and a consistently smaller variety with still darker and confused dorsal markings which ev- idently lives farther north and has been sepa- rated as "Sorrento Reef variant''’ by Cate (1962, p. 12). There is a distinct gap between the range of size in eleven specimens of this north- ern variant (53 to 65 mm) and seven southern real Z. episema (75 to 81 mm), so that I should like to recommend the replacing of Cate's term "Sorrento Reef variant’’ by a Latin racial name. 2.2 5 .